Surfacing using Creo Parametric

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

T3406-380-01
r
Fo

Authored and published using

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Copyright © 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its
In

subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This software
is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and
C

other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to
PT

third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN
CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
r

User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright
Fo

laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement
that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to
the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation
if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance
with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy
made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of
PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to
any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any
means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make
copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to
change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by
PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may
appear in this document.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see
backside of this guide.
About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!

With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:
• An innovative learning methodology - PTC’s Precision Learning
Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.

y
• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the same
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive

nl
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.

O
• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting

se
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
U
derived from thousands of deployments.
• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when you
al

need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries

offering content in nine languages.
rn

• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people

have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
te

organization’s overall performance goals.

In

The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:
C

• Instructor-led Training (ILT) - The ideal blend of classroom lectures,

personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
PT

post-classroom tools.
• Pro/FICIENCY - This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
r

• eLearning Libraries - 24/7 access to Web-based training that will

Fo

compliment your instructor-led course.

• Precision LMS - A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are
corporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specific goals,
current skills, desired competencies and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America
• Education Services Registration
– Tel: (888) 782-3773
– Fax: (781) 370-5307
• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
– Tel: (800) 477-6435
– Fax: (781) 707-0328

y
• License Management and Contracts

nl
– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)

O
– Fax: (781) 707-0331
Europe

se
• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting
– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
U
Asia
al

• Please refer to [Link] for contact

information.
rn

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at [Link]. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
te

to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
In

searches, reference libraries and documentation. You can also find general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
C

Support, and PTC Partners.

r PT
Fo
Precision Learning

Precision Learning In The Classroom

PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:
• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key
concepts.

y
• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
software application.

nl
• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.

O
After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you to
assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also

se
identify the class topics that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
U
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.
al

Precision Learning After the Class

rn

Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
te

have one.
In

As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:

• A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a
C

Recommended Learning Report based on your results.

PT

• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same

instructional approach of lecture, demonstration and exercise. The
Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
r
Fo

Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.
Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at [Link]

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 ― Surface Modeling Overview
Module 02 ― Advanced Selection
Module 03 ― Advanced Datum Features
Module 04 ― Advanced Sketching
Module 05 ― Basic Surfacing Tools
Module 06 ― Boundary Blend Surfaces

y
Day 2

nl
Module 07 ― Additional Boundary Surfaces

O
Module 08 ― Sweep Surfaces with Variable Sections
Module 09 ― Helical Sweeps

se
Module 10 ― Swept Blends
Module 11 ― Analyzing Surface Curvature
U
Module 12 ― Additional Surface Analysis Tools
al

Day 3
rn

Module 13 ― Extending and Trimming Surfaces

Module 14 ― Manipulating Surfaces
te

Module 15 ― Creating and Editing Solids using Quilts

In

Module 16 ― Master Model Technique

Module 17 ― Project
C
r PT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Table of Contents

Surfacing using Creo Parametric

Surface Modeling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Introduction to Surfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Surface Modeling Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Surface Modeling Paradigms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Freeform Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Blending Surface Modeling Paradigms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

y
Surfacing Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

nl
Advanced Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

O
Advanced Chain Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Advanced Surface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

se
Advanced Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Creating Datum Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
U
Creating Datum Coordinate Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Creating Points On or Offset from Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
al

Creating Points at Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

rn

Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Sketching Geometry Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
te

Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

In

Creating a Curve Through a Point Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
C

Creating a Curve From Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

PT

Creating Composite Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
r

Projecting and Wrapping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Fo

Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

Creating Offset Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Creating Cosmetic Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Advanced Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using Sketched Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Sketching Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Sketching Elliptical Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Sketching Splines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Modifying Splines — Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Importing and Exporting Spline Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Sketching Conics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
 Sketching Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Locking Sketcher Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Sketcher Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Basic Surfacing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Creating Surface Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Creating Surface Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Creating Fill Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Creating Sweep Surfaces with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

y
Creating Sweep Surfaces with Closed Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

nl
Creating Parallel Blend Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

O
Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Section Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

se
Understanding Rotational and General Blend Theory . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Creating Rotational Blend Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
U
Analyzing Rotational Blend Surface Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Creating General Blend Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
al

Analyzing General Blend Surface Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

rn

Defining Rotational and General Blend Surface Tangency . . . . . . . 5-51

Selecting Sections for Rotational and General Blend Surfaces . . . . 5-55
te

Boundary Blend Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

In

Understanding Boundary Curve Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Creating Boundary Blends in One Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
C

Creating Boundary Blends in Two Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Analyzing Blended Surface Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
PT

Analyzing Blended Surface Constraint Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Analyzing Blended Surface Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
r

Additional Boundary Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Fo

Creating Conic Surfaces from Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Creating Approximate Blended Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Analyzing Approximate Blended Surface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Creating N-Sided Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Creating a Blend Tangent to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Sweep Surfaces with Variable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Creating Sweep Surfaces using a Constant Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal to Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Creating Sweep Surfaces using Constant Normal Direction . . . . . . 8-13
Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal to Projection . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Sweep Surface . . . . 8-19
 Creating Sweep Surfaces Utilizing Multiple Trajectories . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Creating Sweep Surfaces using Tangent Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Analyzing Sweep Surface Trajectory Options and Rules. . . . . . . . . 8-33
Using Trajpar with Surface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Sweep Surface Features . . 8-40
Helical Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Utilizing Helical Sweeps for Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Analyzing Helical Sweep Surface Profile and Pitch Variations. . . . . . 9-7
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweep Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

y
Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

nl
Understanding Swept Blend Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

O
Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by Sketching Sections. . . . . . . . . . 10-9

se
Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section Plane Control . . . . . . . . . 10-19
U
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend Surface10-23
Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Tangency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
al

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

rn

Analyzing Swept Blend Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Analyzing Surface Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
te

Analyzing Surfaces Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

In

Defining Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Defining Curvature Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
C

Analyzing Curvature of Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

PT

Analyzing Curvature of Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Analyzing Curvature using Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Analyzing Curvature using Normals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
r

Using Shaded Curvature Analysis for Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24

Fo

Using Shaded Section Curvature Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

Creating Curvature Continuous Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Additional Surface Analysis Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Using the Point Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Using the Radius Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Using the Dihedral Angle Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Using the Offset Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Using the Draft Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Using the Slope Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Using the Reflection Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Using the Shadow Analysis Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Extending and Trimming Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
 Extending Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Extending Surfaces using Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Analyzing Extend Surface Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Creating a Surface Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Trimming Surfaces with Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Trimming Surfaces with Quilts Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Trimming Surfaces with the Silhouette Trim Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Trimming Surfaces with the Vertex Round Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Manipulating Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Copying and Pasting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

y
Offsetting Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

nl
Offsetting Surfaces with the Expand Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

O
Offsetting Surfaces with Draft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Moving and Rotating Quilts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

se
Mirroring Quilts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Merging Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
U
Creating and Editing Solids using Quilts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
al

Thickening Surface Quilts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Solidifying Quilts to Add Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
rn

Solidifying Quilts to Remove Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

te

Solidifying Quilts to Replace Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

Offsetting Surfaces using the Replace Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
In

Creating Rounds on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22

Converting Solid Rounds to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
C

Master Model Technique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

PT

Master Model Technique Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Creating a Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
r

Creating Framework in the Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10

Fo

Creating Surfaces in the Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15

Refining and Completing the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Sharing Geometry from the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Completing Body Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
The Shaver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Creating the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Creating Framework in the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Creating Surfaces in the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Refining and Completing the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Sharing Geometry from the Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Creating a Body Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
 Student Preface — Using the Header
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.

y
nl
Course Handbook Layout:

O
• Modules
– Topics

se
♦ Concept
♦ Theory
U
♦ Procedure
♦ Exercise (if applicable)
al

Procedure / Exercise Header:

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate
information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figures and bullets.
• Theory — This section provides detailed information about content
introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
• Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an

y
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide

nl
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
The first module for certain courses is known as a “process

O
module.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise Header

se
U
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as
concise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the name
al

of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
rn

The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.
te

2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The
In

Scenario is only found in Exercises.

3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should
close any open files and erase them from memory:
C

• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.

PT

• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.

4. Folder Name — This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are
r

stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to
Fo

the lab files is:

• PTCU\CreoParametric1\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Rounds is the functional area folder and Variable
is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to
PTCU\CreoParametric1\Round\Variable.
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to
open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If
you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
create a new model, you will see Create New.
• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and
select Open.
 6. Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.
Two other items to note for labs:
• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless
otherwise stated.
• Exercises — Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs
Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you

y
configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab

nl
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:

O
• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.

se
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such
as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\.
U
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
al

– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.

– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
rn

the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\.

te

• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.

– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric1 folder.
In

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
C
r PT
Fo
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo
Parametric working environment for each lab in the course.

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run

the lab exercises properly.

y
nl
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

O
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.

se
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,
such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1.
U
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
al

• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.

rn

• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be

PTCU\CreoParametric1.
te

3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.

• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric1 folder.
In

You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
C

Step 2: Add the Erase not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar.
PT

1. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed.
• Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
r
Fo

Step 3: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Quick Access toolbar.

• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
 Step 4: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure
and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric
working directory.

1. Notice the folder indicated in the header above.

2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser tab from the navigator.

• Click Working Directory to view the current working directory
folder in the browser.
• Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.

y
3. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working

nl
Directory.
4. Double-click the Topic1_Folder folder to display its contents in the

O
browser.

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the

C

browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and

PT

select Set Working Directory from the browser.

Step 5: Open the file for this procedure.

r
Fo

1. Notice the lab model is specified in the header above.

• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.

2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
• Read the first task.
• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial
datum display for the procedure or exercise. Complete the optional
task below to customize the In Graphics toolbar, making the
selection of the datum display options easier
• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 6: OPTIONAL: Customize the In Graphics toolbar to show the datum
display options.

1. Right-click the In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum Display

Filters check box.
• Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and Csys
Display check boxes.
• Click in the graphics window.
• Enable only the following Datum Display types:

y
2. The In Graphics toolbar should appear as shown.

nl
O
3. The model should now appear

se
as shown.
U
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo
 Module 1

y
Surface Modeling Overview

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Surface modeling in Creo Parametric enables you to create models with
sculpted, organic, or curvature continuous shapes that would be too complex
to create with typical solid modeling tools.
U
In this module, you will be introduced to surface modeling, including surface
al

modeling uses, paradigms, and terminology.

rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Describe the capabilities and uses for a surface modeling environment.
In

• Describe the parametric and freeform surface modeling paradigms.

• Describe how the parametric and freeform surface modeling paradigms
C

can be integrated.
PT

• Discuss surface modeling terminology.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Introduction to Surfacing
The figures in this slide illustrate examples of models that have
been developed using Creo Parametric surface modeling tools.

• Surface modeling enables you to

design the models that have:
– Geometric shapes with high
curvatures, or curvature in two
directions.
– Fluid, sculpted, or organic

y
shapes. Figure 1 – Camera

nl
– Shapes that cannot be designed
using solid features.

O
– Smooth shapes with tangent or
curvature continuity.
• Surface Modeling Scenarios
se
U
al

Figure 2 – Faucet
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Helmet Figure 4 – Hedge Trimmer

r

Introduction to Surfacing
Fo

The figures illustrate examples of models that have been developed using
Creo Parametric surface modeling tools. Surface modeling enables you to
design the models that have:

• Geometric shapes with high curvatures, or curvature in two directions.

• Fluid, sculpted, or organic shapes.
• Shapes that cannot be designed using solid features.
• Smooth shapes with tangent or curvature continuity.

Surfacing Model Scenarios

Some of the surface modeling scenarios that you might encounter are:

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Your colleague has developed a foam model of a product shape. You
create a model that matches to the mockup.
• Your company must create a digital model of an engine head. There are no
drawings available. You create a rough scan of the actual casting.
• You receive an E-mail attachment with the concept sketches of a molded
suitcase. You develop a Creo Parametric model.
• Using drawings of an automobile mirror with views and sections, you create
a digital model of the mirror.
• Using the internal components of a handheld PDA (Personal Digital
Assistant), you intuitively create the body design.
• You design a toy based on the data available in IGES form.

y
• You are designing a turbine blade with the sections defined in the form
of equations.

nl
• You are designing a product in which the external shape was roughly

O
conceptualized using another software program. You recreate the surface
model to define the shape in Creo Parametric, and then you generate
the part designs.

se
• You prepare the design of a Creo Parametric model of a handheld PDA
(Personal Digital Assistant) for a model making company. The company will
U
design a physical mockup of the model using a rapid prototyping method.
• You have received low-quality IGES data to design a tooling. You need to
al

fix the imported surface data before undertaking further modeling.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 3

Surface Modeling Uses
You can use surface modeling for a variety of situations.
• You use surface modeling to:
– Design enclosures.
– Visualize and develop
conceptual designs.
– Design thin-walled components
with complex shapes.
– Fix problems in imported

y
surface data.

nl
– Design tooling.
– Redefine and manipulate solid

O
models.
– Define complex fillets. Figure 1 – CD Player

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Casting Manifold Figure 3 – Molding

C

Surface Modeling Uses

PT

You can use surface modeling to:

• Design enclosures (the outside body of any product) – Examples include
r

the body shells of consumer goods such as the CD player in Figure 1 or

Fo

skins or casings of highly contoured engineering components such as the

engine intake manifold in Figure 2.
• Develop conceptual designs – When you conceptualize product shapes,
you need the flexibility to manipulate the shape of the model interactively
and review the aesthetic requirements.
• Design thin-walled components – You use surface modeling to design
complexly shaped components, for example, the floor pan of an automobile.
• Fix imported surface data – It is common to receive imported surface data
with untrimmed and unstitched surfaces. This requires the data to be
manipulated and fixed for further design.
• Design tooling – To design tooling, you work on quilts using surface editing
tools such as the mold components in Figure 3.
• Redefine and manipulate solid models – In a solid modeling environment,
using surface features enables you to manipulate solids to cut and replace

Module 1 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 solid surfaces, create transition surfaces, and create robust pattern
features using surface transform.
• Design complex fillets – In complex situations in which standard radii tools
do not provide satisfactory results, you create fillets using surfaces.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 5

Surface Modeling Paradigms
In comparison to solid modeling, the surface modeling paradigm
uses very different approaches, techniques, and workflow.

• Parametric Surface Modeling:

– Driven by dimensions,
parameters, and mathematical
equations.
– Surface Modeling course.

y
• Freeform Surface Modeling:

nl
– Driven by intuition, feel, and
aesthetic requirements.

O
– Freeform Surface Modeling
Course.

se
• Choosing appropriate method: Figure 1 – Sheet Panel
– Design Input
U
– Design Intent
– Designer’s background
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Door Interior

PT

Surface Modeling Paradigms

r
Fo

The surface modeling paradigm can be very different from the solid modeling
paradigm. It can use different approaches, techniques, and workflow. You
can divide the surface modeling paradigm into two categories:

• Parametric or constrained surface modeling (Also known as technical

surfacing) – These techniques are covered in this Surface Modeling course.
• Freeform or interactive surface design – This technique is covered in the
Freeform Surface Modeling course.
Both approaches can often deliver the required surface model shape. You
can select a suitable approach based on the following factors:

• The design input – Hard data and dimension values versus sketches or
conceptual drawings.
• The design intent – Geometry is controlled based on dimensions versus
being controlled by pushing and pulling on surface contours.

Module 1 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 • The designer's background – Users with Creo Parametric modeling
experience may prefer parametric modeling, whereas users with design or
artistic backgrounds may prefer freeform modeling.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 7

Freeform Overview
The Style tool is a powerful and comprehensive surface
modeling tool.
• Style Tool
– Freeform Curves
– Surfaces

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Creating a Freeform
U
Curve
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Creating a Second

Fo

Freeform Curve Figure 3 – Creating the Surface

Freeform Overview
The Style tool is a powerful and comprehensive surface modeling tool
which is covered in detail in the Freeform Surface Modeling course. It is
a spline-based freeform modeler that enables you to create 2-D and 3-D
curves and freeform surfaces. For example, in Figure 1 and Figure 2, two
freeform curves are being created. In Figure 3, the curves are used to create
the freeform surface. These curves and surfaces are created within a Style
feature. A Style feature is an independent feature with its own modeling
environment.

Module 1 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Where Do You Use the Style Tool?
You primarily use style features to create models in which the design intent is
dependent on a visual or aesthetic criterion. However, it can also be used in
other ways, including:

• Creating freeform features on an otherwise parametric model.

• Creating freeform curves and surfaces on top of controllable parametric
geometry.
• Creating a conceptual model.
• For reverse styling tasks.

y
nl
Style Tool Uses

O
The Style tool enables you to:

se
• Create freeform planar and 3-D curves.
• Project curves on surfaces.
U
• Create surfaces from three or four boundaries.
• Trim surfaces.
al

• Define surface continuity.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 9

Blending Surface Modeling Paradigms
Many product shapes can be constructed using a combination
of parametric and freeform surface features.
• Blending the two paradigms
• Many product shapes can utilize a
combination of:
– Parametric surface models with
freeform curves and surfaces.
– Freeform surface models with
parametric framework and

y
relations.

nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Designing a Ring
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Parametric Framework

C

Figure 3 – Designing a Freeform

Surface
PT

Blending Surface Modeling Paradigms

r
Fo

Many product shapes can be constructed using a combination of parametric

and freeform surface features. Using surface modeling tools, you can
integrate feature-based parametric modeling with freeform unconstrained
surfacing in a single modeling environment. You can create freeform features
with reference to parametric features and vice-versa.

For example, jewelry design uses freeform surface modeling tools to create
the sculpted shapes and constrained surfaces to create a ring base and
precise jewel cavities. With a typical jewelry design for a ring, you create a
base model with an exact circular dimension, and then use Translate/Rotate
and Pattern tools to locate the stones. You can also use relations and family
tables. Figure 1 displays the construction of rings with a combination of
parametric and freeform surface features.

Another common approach is to create a parametric framework, and then

create freeform features with reference to the framework. Figure 2 displays a

Module 1 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 personal data assistant where a parametric framework is used to modify the
overall dimensions of free form surfaces.

In parametric surface modeling, you can define blends and transition surfaces
using freeform surfaces. Figure 3 displays a blending surface, highlighted in
wire mesh, which is designed as the freeform surface between parametric
features.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 11

Surfacing Terms
Surface modeling terms are important to understand because
they are used throughout this course.
• Surfaces
– Quilt
– Surface Patch
– Solid Surface
– Datum Planes
• Edges

y
– Surface edge Figure 1 – Viewing a Surface

nl
♦ One-sided

O
♦ Two-sided
– Solid edge

se
U
Figure 2 – Surface Quilt
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Solid Surface

PT

and Edge Figure 4 – Surface Edge

r

Surfacing Terms
Fo

Surface modeling terms are used throughout this course. Therefore, they
are important to understand.
• Surface – Surfaces are infinitely thin, non-solid features used to aid in the
design of highly complex and irregular shapes. Notice that surfaces are
shown using yellow and purple highlighting on the edges when viewed in
wireframe display, as in Figure 1.
– Yellow denotes outer or one-sided edges.
– Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges, since they border two surface
patches.
In Creo Parametric, the term surface can be used for any of the following:
• Quilts – A quilt may consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces.
A quilt represents a patchwork of connected surfaces. A multi-surface

Module 1 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 quilt contains information describing the geometry of all the surfaces
that compose it, and information on how these surfaces are joined or
intersected, such as the models shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
• Surface Patch – If you create a surface feature, which is made of several
segments, the surface is created with multiple patches, as in Figure 1.
• Solid Surfaces – A face of a solid feature, such as the solid model shown
in Figure 3.
• Datum Planes – A planar datum feature that extends infinitely but is
represented by a rectangular border.
• Edge – An edge is the boundary of a solid, as in Figure 3 or a surface, as in
Figure 4. Surface edges can be one-sided or two-sided depending on the
presence of adjacent surface geometry.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 1 | Page 13

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 1 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Module 2

y
Advanced Selection

nl
O
Module Overview

se
In this module, you learn advanced methods for how to select edges and
geometry within a part model. Learning advanced methods for selection
enables you to create more robust models in a shorter period of time.
U
Objectives
al

After completing this module, you will be able to:

rn

• Understand advanced chain selection.

te

• Understand advanced surface selection.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 1

Advanced Chain Selection
You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different
types of chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness.
• Chain types:
– Intent chain
– One-by-one
– Tangent chain
– Surface loop
– Surface loop from to

y
– Boundary Figure 1 – Intent Chain

nl
– From-to Boundary loop

O
– Multiple chains
• Selection methods:

se
– Direct with mouse
– Chain dialog box
U
Figure 2 – Surface Loop
al

Advanced Chain Selection

rn

You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of
chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness. A chain is a collection
te

of adjacent edges and curves that share common endpoints. Chains can be
open-ended or closed-loop, but they are always defined by two ends.
In

Chain Types
C

The following are the different types of chains that can be used to select
PT

edges:
• Intent chain – Enables you to select edges based on their intent. For
example, say you use an intent chain to select the four edges of a square
r

cut for purposes of rounding them. If the square cut is redefined into a
Fo

hexagon cut, the intent chain automatically adds the two additional edges
and rounds them, because your intent was to round the edges of the cut.
If you instead select the edges one at a time and round them, the round
feature either fails or does not round the newly added edges.
• One-by-one – Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a
continuous path.
• Tangent chain – Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to
an anchor edge.
• Surface loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface.
• Surface loop from to – Enables you to select a range of edges from the
surface loop.
• Boundary – Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt.
• From-to Boundary loop – Enables you to select a range of edges from
the boundary.

Module 2 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Multiple chains – You can select multiple chains by selecting the first chain,
pressing CTRL and selecting an edge for a new chain, then holding down
SHIFT and completing the new chain from the selected edge.

Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:

• Directly with the mouse.

• Using the Chain dialog box –

The Chain dialog box enables a
GUI approach to selection. This

y
dialog box is only available in the

nl
context of a tool. You can click
the Details button near the tool's

O
reference collector to display the
Chain dialog box.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Chain Dialog Box

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Advanced Chain Selection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Selection\Adv_Chain ADV_CHAINS.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with the different chain selection types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 3.
3. Cursor over one of the top edges

y
and right-click to query-select the

nl
end edges Intent chain.

O
4. Cursor over one of the vertical
edges and right-click to

se
query-select the side edges
Intent chain.
U
5. De-select all geometry.
al

6. Select the top, front horizontal

edge.
rn

7. Press SHIFT and select the two

adjacent edges One-by-one.
te

8. De-select all geometry.

In

9. Select Extrude 1.
10. Select the top, front horizontal
C

edge.
PT

11. Press SHIFT and select the top,

right front edge to select the
Tangent chain.
r

12. De-select all geometry.

Fo

13. Select Extrude 1.

14. Select one of the top, front
edges.
15. Press SHIFT and select the top,
right flat surface to select the
Surface loop.
16. De-select all geometry.

Module 2 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 17. Select Extrude 1.
18. Select the top, front edge.
19. Press SHIFT and select the top,
back edge to select the Surface
loop from to chain.

20. Select the quilt on the right.

21. Select an edge of the quilt.
22. Press SHIFT and select the quilt
to select the Boundary.

y
23. De-select all geometry.

nl
O
24. Select the quilt again.
25. Select the front, vertical edge.
26. Press SHIFT and select the se
U
back, vertical edge to select the
From-to Boundary loop.
al

27. De-select all geometry.

rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 5

Advanced Surface Selection
You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using
different types of sets.

• Surface set types:

– Individual Surfaces
– Solid Surfaces
– Intent Surfaces
– Seed and Boundary

y
– Loop Surfaces

nl
– Exclude Surfaces
• Selection methods:

O
– Direct with mouse Figure 1 – Selecting Multiple
– Chain dialog box Individual Surfaces

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Selecting a Surface Loop

Advanced Surface Selection

C

You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of
PT

sets. A surface set is a collection of surface patches from solids or quilts.

Surface patches do not need to be adjacent.
r

Surface Set Types

Fo

The following are the different types of surface sets that can be used to
select surfaces:
• Individual Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces from solids or quilts
one at a time. To select multiple individual surfaces, press CTRL.
• Solid Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces of the solid geometry
in a part model.
• Intent Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces based on their intent.
An intent surface set tends to be more robust because it can account for
changes made to geometry.
• Seed and Boundary Surfaces – Enables you to select all surfaces from the
selected seed surface up to the boundary or boundaries.
• Loop Surfaces – Enables you to select all the surfaces that are adjacent
to the edges of a surface.

Module 2 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 • Exclude Surfaces – Enables you to exclude surface patches during or
after a surface set has been created.

Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities:

• Directly with the mouse.

• Using the Surface Sets dialog

box – The Surface Sets dialog
box enables a GUI approach
to selection. This dialog box is

y
only available in the context of

nl
a tool. You can click the Details
button next to the tool's reference

O
collector to display the Surface
Sets dialog box.

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Surface Sets Dialog Box

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Selection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Selection\Adv_Surface ADV_SURFACE-[Link]

Task 1: Experiment with the different surface set selections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Extrude 1.
3. Select the front surface of

y
Extrude 1.

nl
4. Press CTRL and select the

O
second individual surface.
5. De-select all geometry.

6. Select any feature.

se
U
7. Select any surface on that
feature.
al

8. Right-click and select Solid

Surfaces.
rn

9. De-select all geometry.

te

10. Right-click to query and select

In

cut Extrude 2.
11. Select the Intent surface.
C
r PT
Fo

12. De-select all geometry.

13. Select the front surface on the
silver protrusion as the seed
surface.
14. Press SHIFT and select the
top, right flat surface as the
Boundary.

Module 2 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 15. Release SHIFT to select all the
surfaces from the seed surface
up to the Boundary.

You can continue to use

SHIFT to select additional
boundaries.

16. Select the top, flat surface.

17. Press SHIFT and select the front

y
edge.

nl
18. Release SHIFT to select the
Surface loop.

O
19. Press CTRL and click to
se
U
de-select the two surfaces,
excluding them from the loop.
al

20. De-select all geometry.

rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 2 | Page 9

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Module 3

y
Advanced Datum Features

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Datum features often serve as the foundation when modeling advanced
geometry. A datum feature framework can efficiently capture the design
intent of the model, and then solid features can be created on the framework.
U
Datum curves and sketches may reference other datum features, such as
datum points and coordinate systems. In addition, you can create datum
al

graphs that can be utilized by relations to control part geometry.

rn

In this module, you learn how to create datum points and several types of
datum curves. You will also learn how to create datum graphs and coordinate
te

systems.
In

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
C

• Create datum graphs.

PT

• Create datum coordinate systems.

• Sketch geometry datums.
• Create numerous types of datum points.
r
Fo

• Create numerous types of datum curves.

• Create cosmetic sketches.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 1

Creating Datum Graphs
A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model.

• Created like a Sketch feature:

– Used as an X-Y function.
– Can be used to control
part geometry.
• Must contain a Sketcher
coordinate system.
• Must contain sketched

y
geometry.

nl
O
Figure 1 – Datum Graph Features

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Creating a Datum

Graph using Lines Figure 3 – Creating a Datum Graph
In

from a Spline
C

Creating Datum Graphs

PT

A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model, as shown in

Figure 1. The datum graph is created much like a sketch feature, except that
a visible datum curve is not created. Instead, the system is able to use the
r

sketch as an X-Y function. This function can then be utilized by relations to

Fo

control part geometry based on the X-Y relation of the graph.

The datum graph must contain a Sketcher coordinate system, and sketched
geometry. Centerlines and construction geometry can be used to simplify the
sketch creation, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. However, the system
only recognizes solid sketched geometry such as lines, arcs, and splines
for the graph function.

Module 3 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Graphs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Graph DATUM_GRAPH.PRT

Task 1: Create a datum graph comprised of lines.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph .

y
3. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_1.

nl
4. A new Sketcher window opens.

O
5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

se
6. Click Centerline from the
Sketching group and sketch a
U
vertical and horizontal centerline.
7. Click Coordinate System
al

from the Sketchng group.

rn

• Click the intersection of

the centerlines to place the
coordinate system.
te
In

8. Click Line Chain and sketch

an angled line and a horizontal
C

line. The left endpoint of the

PT

angled line should be aligned to

the vertical centerline.
r
Fo

9. Click Normal from the

Dimension group and dimension
the sketch, editing the values as
shown.
10. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 3

 11. Notice the datum graph feature
in the model tree.

Task 2: Create a datum graph comprised of two arcs.

1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph .

y
2. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_2.

nl
3. A new Sketcher window opens.

O
4. Click Centerline from the
Sketching group and sketch
two vertical centerlines and one
horizontal centerline. se
U
5. Click Coordinate System
al

and click the left intersection

of the centerlines to place the
rn

coordinate system.
te

6. Click 3-Point / Tangent End

and sketch two arcs. The
In

arcs should be tangent to

one-another, and their endpoints
aligned to the vertical centerlines.
C
PT

7. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and constrain the

r
Fo

arc endpoints perpendicular to the vertical centerlines.

8. Click Normal from the

Dimension group and dimension
the arcs and centerlines,
pressing ENTER to accept the
default values.
9. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
10. Click OK .

Module 3 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 11. Notice the datum graph feature
in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 5

Creating Datum Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems can be used as a modeling or
assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and for
assembling components.

• Define References:
– Datum features
– Existing model geometry
• Define Orientation:
– References selection

y
– Selected CSYS axes

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Datum Coordinate

te

System Types
In

Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems are individual features that can be redefined,
C

suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A coordinate system defines a specific

PT

location in space based on coordinates. Datum coordinate systems can be

used as a modeling or assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and
for assembling components.
r

Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

Fo

To create a new datum coordinate system, you must define the following
two items:
• References – Used to define the coordinate system location. You can
select existing datum references including datum planes, datum axes,
datum points, or other datum coordinate systems. You can also select
existing geometry including edges, vertices, and surfaces.
• Orientation – Used to define the position of the coordinate system's axes.
There are two different ways to orient the datum coordinate system:
– References selection – Enables you to select reference geometry for
any two of the coordinate system's axes.
– Selected CSYS axes – Is available only when another coordinate
system is specified as the reference. This option enables you to rotate
the coordinate system about the axes of the reference coordinate

Module 3 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 system. You can also use the Set Z Normal to Screen option to orient
the z-axis perpendicular to the screen.

Defining Coordinate System Offset Types

If a coordinate system is selected as a reference, there are three coordinate
system offset types that can be created in Creo Parametric.
• Cartesian – Created by defining X, Y, and Z parameters.
• Cylindrical – Created by defining R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters.
• Spherical – Created by defining r, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters.

Defining Coordinate System Placement Types

y
If datum planes or surfaces are specified as references, there are up to three

nl
coordinate system types that can be defined in Creo Parametric. The type
defines the dimensioning scheme used to locate the coordinate system. The

O
three types are as follows:

se
• Linear – Places the coordinate system using two linear dimensions.
• Radial – Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and an
U
angular dimension.
• Diameter – Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and
al

an angular dimension.
You must specify the offset references from which to define the dimensions.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Coord_Sys [Link]

Task 1: Create an offset datum coordinate system.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Coordinate System

nl
from the Datum group in the
ribbon.

O
3. Select coordinate system DEF.
4. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, edit the Offset type to
Cartesian, if necessary.
se
U
• Edit the Z offset to 10.
• Select the Orientation tab.
al

• Select the Selected CSYS

rn

axes option.
• Edit the About Z angle to 180.
te

• Click OK.
In

5. De-select the geometry.

Task 2: Create a datum coordinate system using three planes.

C
PT

1. Click Coordinate System .

2. Select the front surface of the
r

model.
Fo

3. Press CTRL and select datum

planes TOP and RIGHT from the
model tree.
4. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, select the Orientation tab.
• Use the surface to determine
Z.
• Use datum plane TOP to
project Y.
• Click OK.
5. De-select the geometry.

Module 3 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Create a datum coordinate system using axes and planes.

1. Start the Coordinate System

.
2. Press CTRL and select datum
axis A_4 and datum plane DTM1
as references.
3. In the Coordinate System dialog
box, select the Orientation tab.
4. In the Orientation tab, click in the

y
First Direction collector.

nl
• Select datum coordinate

O
system CS1 and use Z to
determine Z.

5. In the Orientation tab, click in the

Second Direction collector. se
U
• Select datum axis A_4.
al

• Use datum axis A_4 to project

Y.
rn

• Click Flip to flip the Y

projection.
te

6. Click OK from the Coordinate

System dialog box.
In

7. De-select the geometry.

C

Task 4: Create a datum coordinate system on a surface.

PT

1. Start the Coordinate System

.
r
Fo

2. Select the top, rounded surface.

3. Right-click and select Offset
References.
4. Press CTRL and select datum
plane RIGHT from the model
tree and the front surface.
5. Edit the Angle from datum plane
RIGHT to 0.
6. Edit the Axial distance from the
front surface to 30.
7. Click OK.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 9

 8. Enable only the following Datum
Display types: .

y
nl
O
se
This completes the procedure. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Points On or Offset from Entities
You can create datum points both on and offset from geometry
or other datum features.

• Reference types:
– Placement
– Offset
• Reference combinations:
– On/Offset surface or datum
plane

y
– On/Offset axis

nl
– On curve:

O
♦ Length Ratio
♦ Real Length

se
♦ Reference
– Center of surface or curve Figure 1 – Datum Point on a
U
Surface Offset from Datum Planes
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Datum Point on

PT

Figure 3 – Datum Point at

Curve Ratio Offset Center of Curve

Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

r
Fo

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features,
for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points both on and
offset from geometry or other datum features. Most geometry that defines or
locates a point in 3-D space can be specified as a reference. Both Placement
references and Offset references can be selected, depending upon the
combination.
The following reference combinations are available:
• On/Offset surface or datum plane – Locate a point directly on a surface or
datum plane, or offset a specified distance. In Figure 1, the datum point is
on the selected surface, and offset from the two datum planes.
• On/Offset axis – Locate a point on a datum axis, or offset a specified
distance.
• On curve – You can locate a point on a curve. There are three ways to
further define the point location on the curve:

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 11

 – Length ratio – Enables you to locate the point as a function of the curve's
overall length. For example, if you want to locate the curve 3/4 from the
end of the curve you type 0.75 as the ratio. You can also switch from
which curve endpoint the ratio is determined by clicking Next End. In
Figure 2, the point is on the curve, offset from the right endpoint a ratio
of 0.75.
– Real length – Enables you to locate the point a specified distance from
the curve's endpoint. You can switch from which curve endpoint the
distance is measured by clicking Next End.
– Use reference – You can specify another entity as an offset reference
and specify the offset value from that reference.
• Center of surface or curve – Selecting a rounded surface or curve enables

y
you to locate a point at the center of the surface or curve, as shown in

nl
Figure 3.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Points_On-Offset POINTS_ON-[Link]

Task 1: Create datum points on and offset from surfaces.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Click Point from the Datum

nl
group in the ribbon.
3. Select the top surface in the

O
back, left quadrant.
4. In the Datum Point dialog box,

se
click in the Offset references
collector.
U
5. Press CTRL and select datum
planes FRONT and RIGHT from
al

the model tree.

6. Edit both offset values to 5.
rn

7. In the Datum Point dialog box,

te

click New Point.

In

8. Select the right, drafted surface

near the front center.
• Edit the Offset from On to
C

Offset.
PT

• Edit the Offset value to 2.

r
Fo

9. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Offset
References.
• Press CTRL and select datum
plane FRONT from the model
tree and the bottom, flat
surface.
• Edit the offset from datum
plane FRONT to 3.00.
• Edit the offset from the bottom
surface to 7.00.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 13

 10. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click New Point.
11. Select the top, curved surface.
• Edit the Offset from Offset to
Center.
12. Click OK from the Datum Point
dialog box.

Task 2: Create datum points on axes and curves.

y
nl
1. Click Point .

O
2. Select datum axis A_2 in the
model tree.

se
3. In the graphics window,
right-click and select Offset
References.
U
• Right-click to query and select
al

the bottom, flat surface.

4. In the graphics window, edit the
rn

offset value to 25.00.

te

5. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
In

6. Select the back, top vertex.

C
r PT
Fo

7. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
8. Select the curve on the right,
drafted surface.
9. Edit the offset to Center.
10. Click OK.

Module 3 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Create datum points on curves.

1. Click Point .
2. Select the front datum curve to
the right of the datum plane that
intersects it.
• Edit the Offset drop-down to
Ratio.
• Edit the Offset value to 0.75.
• Click Next End twice.

y
nl
3. In the Datum Point dialog box,

O
click New Point.
4. Select the front datum curve to
the right of the datum plane that
intersects it. se
U
• Edit the Offset drop-down to
Real.
al

• Edit the Offset value to 8.00.

rn

• Click Next End twice.

te

5. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
In

6. Select the front datum curve to

the right of the datum plane that
C

intersects it.
PT

• Select Reference as the

Offset reference.
• Select datum plane RIGHT as
r

the reference.
Fo

• Edit the Offset value to 2.00.

• Click OK.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 15

Creating Points at Intersections
You can create points at the intersections of two or three
references from geometry or other datum features.
• Combinations include:
– Three planes/three surfaces
– Two curves
– Two edges
– A curve and edge
– Two axes

y
– Curves/Edges/Axes with

nl
Surfaces/Planes
• References do not need to

O
physically intersect
• Next Intersection

se
Figure 1 – Point at the Intersection
of Three Planes
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Points at the Intersections Figure 3 – Point at the Intersection

PT

of Curves and Planes of a Surface and Datum Axis

Creating Points at Intersections

r
Fo

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features,
for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points at the
intersections of two or three references from geometry or other datum
features. Most geometry that defines or locates a point in 3-D space can
be specified as a reference.
The following reference combinations are available for creating intersections:
• Three planes/three surfaces – Locate a point at the intersection of three
planes, three surfaces, or a combination. In Figure 1, the point is located at
the intersection of the three datum planes.
• Two curves – Locate a point at the intersection of two curves. In Figure 2,
points 4 and 5 are located at the intersection of the two curves.
• Two edges – Locate a point at the intersection of two edges.
• A curve and edge – Locate a point at the intersection of a curve and edge.
• Two axes – Locate a point at the intersection of two axes.

Module 3 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 • Curves/Edges/Axes with Surfaces/Planes – Locate a point at the
intersection of a curve, edge, or axis, and a surface or plane. In Figure 2,
point 6 is located at the intersection of a datum plane and a curve. In Figure
3, the point is located at the intersection of the datum axis and the surface.
There does not need to be a physical intersection between the selected
entities. The system extrapolates to find an intersection, if one exists. If
more than one intersection exists between the selected entities, you can
click Next Intersection to toggle between all available intersections for the
specified entities. In Figure 2, there are two intersections between the two
datum curves. Point 4 is located at one intersection, and point 5 is located at
the other intersection.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Points at Intersections
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Points_Intersect POINTS_INTERSECT.PRT

Task 1: Create points at the intersections of different entities.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Click Point from the Datum

y
group.

nl
3. Press CTRL and select datum

O
axis A_1 from the model tree,
and the top surface.

4. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
se
U
5. Press CTRL and select the top,
rear edge and datum plane
al

RIGHT from the model tree.

rn

6. Click OK.
7. Disable .
te
In

8. Click Point .
9. Press CTRL and select datum
planes TOP, RIGHT, and
C

FRONT from the model tree.

r PT
Fo

10. Disable the following Datum

Display types: .
11. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click New Point.
12. Press CTRL and select the rear,
right, and front surfaces.
13. Click OK.
14. Notice that the selected
references do not have to
physically touch. The point
determines the intersection.

Module 3 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 15. Click Point .
16. Press CTRL and select the two
datum curves to the left side of
the model.

17. In the Datum Point dialog box,

click New Point.
18. Press CTRL and select the two
datum curves on the left side of

y
the model.

nl
19. In the Datum Point dialog box,
click Next Intersection.

O
20. In the Datum Point dialog box,

se
click New Point.
21. Press CTRL and select the top
U
datum curve and datum plane
RIGHT.
al

22. Click OK.

rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 19

Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate
System
You can create an array of datum points by referencing a
coordinate system.

• Array is one feature in model tree.

• Specify reference coordinate system.
• Specify coordinate system type:
– Cartesian

y
– Cylindrical

nl
– Spherical
• Specify parameters based on coordinate system type.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 1 – Creating an Array of Points using an Offset Coordinate System

PT

Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System

You can create an array of datum points by referencing a coordinate system.
The entire array of points created becomes a single feature in the model tree.
r
Fo

To create the array of points you must first select a reference coordinate
system. You can then specify the type of coordinate system selected. The
coordinate system type specified determines the parameters that must be
typed for each datum point. The locations of all points in the array are based
on the coordinates for each parameter. The following coordinate system
types are available:
• Cartesian – You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters for the points.
• Cylindrical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters for the points.
• Spherical – You must specify r, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters for the
points.
You can create new points in the array by clicking in the empty row at the
bottom of the existing point array. You can edit the point coordinate values
within the table by editing the values in the graphics window, or by dragging
the handle in the appropriate parameter direction. For example, if the

Module 3 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 reference coordinate system type is Cartesian, the drag handle parameters
are X, Y, and Z.
You can also specify the option for Use Non Parametric Array. Enabling this
option converts the point array to a Non Parametric Array, which does not
include any dimensions. You are not able to modify the values using the
Edit command in the right mouse button menu, as this option is removed
from the menu.
The following file options are available for creating points using an offset
coordinate system:
• Import – Enables you to import a text file of coordinate data. The file type
that can be imported is a .pts file.

y
• Update Values – Enables you to add, delete, or update the point

nl
coordinates using a text editor. Upon saving the file in the text editor, the
list of points in the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box updates.

O
• Save – Enables you to save an array of points as a .pts file.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Creating Points using an Offset
Coordinate System

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Points_Offset-Csys POINTS_OFFSET-[Link]

Task 1: Create a set of datum points using an offset coordinate system.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. In the ribbon, select Offset
Coordinate System from the

O
Point types drop-down menu in
the Datum group.
3. Select coordinate system CS0.
se
U
4. Click in the first row of the Datum
Point dialog box to create the
al

first row of points.

• Right-click the first row of
rn

points and select Rename.

• Edit the name to START.
te

• Verify that the X, Y, and Z

In

coordinates are 0, 0, and 0,

respectively.
C

5. Click in the second row of the

Datum Point dialog box to create
PT

the second row of points.

• Edit the X, Y, and Z coordinates
to 0, 10, and 0, respectively.
r
Fo

6. Click in the third row of the

Datum Point dialog box and
create seven more rows of
points.
7. Edit the values as shown.

Module 3 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 8. Click OK from the Datum Point
dialog box.
9. Disable the following Datum
Display types: .

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 23

Sketching Geometry Datums
Create points, axes, and coordinate systems in a Sketch.
• Geometry Points Create:
– Datum Points (External Sketch)
– Datum Axes (Internal Sketch)
• Geometry Centerlines Create:
– Datum Axes
• Geometry Csys Create:
– Datum Csys

y
Figure 1 – Geometry Points

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Geometry Centerline

and Csys Figure 3 – Datum Features Created
te

Sketching Geometry Datums

In

You can create datum points, datum axes, and datum coordinate systems
in a sketch. A sketch may contain any number of sketched datum features
C

without any further geometry. Likewise, a sketch may contain sketched

geometry or construction geometry in addition to sketched geometry datums.
PT

You can also use a sketch that contains sketched datum features to create
features, such as an extrude or revolve.
The following tools, found in the Datum group of the ribbon, are used to
r

create geometry datums:

Fo

• Point
• Centerline
• Coordinate System
Traditional sketched points, centerlines, and coordinate systems
now have new icons with a dashed appearance to distinguish from
the new sketched geometry tools.

Geometry datums can be created in external or internal sketches:

• For external sketches existing on their own, the geometry datums are
created in the sketching plane.
• For an internal sketch within an Extrude, the Geometry Point tool creates
an axis normal to the sketching plane.

Module 3 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Note the following when creating geometry datums:
• When a sketch containing geometry datums is used for a feature, the
geometry datums are hidden along with the sketch.
• When a geometry datum is selected, you can right-click and select
Construction to convert it to a sketch entity. Likewise you can select
a construction point, centerline, or sketched coordinate system, and
right-click and select Geometry to convert the entity to a geometry datum.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Sketching Geometry Datums

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Geometry_Datums SKETCH_DATUMS.PRT

Task 1: Create geometry points in an external sketch.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Sketch 1 from the model

y
tree.

nl
• Right-click and select Edit
Definition.

O
3. Enable only the following

se
Sketcher Display types:
.
U
4. Select the arc, then right-click
and select Construction.
al
rn

5. Click Point from the Datum

group in the ribbon.
te

• Place three points on the

construction arc: one on each
In

centerline, and one on the

vertical reference.
C
PT

6. Click OK .
7. Notice that datum points are
created as part of Sketch 1 in the
r

model tree.
Fo

Task 2: Place geometry points in an internal sketch for an extrude.

1. Click Extrude from the Shape group in the ribbon.

• Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
• Click Use Previous.

Module 3 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 2. Click Center and Ends from
the Arc drop down menu in the
Sketching group in the ribbon.
Sketch and dimension an arc as
shown.
3. Click Point , and place a
geometry point on each arc
endpoint.
4. Click OK .

y
5. Right-click and select Remove

nl
Material.
6. Right-click and select Flip Depth

O
Direction.
7. Right-click the depth handle and
select Through All.
8. Click Complete Feature . se
U
9. Notice the created axes.
al

Task 3: Create a geometry centerline and a geometry coordinate system.

rn
te

1. Click Sketch . Click Use

Previous.
In

2. Right-click and select

References. Select PNT1
C

and click Close.

PT

3. Click Centerline from the

Datum group in the ribbon.
r
Fo

• Place a horizontal geometry

axis through PNT1.

4. Click Coordinate System

from the Datum group.
• Place a geometry coordinate
system as shown.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 27

 5. Click OK .
6. Notice the axis and coordinate
system.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex
You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum
points, or edge/curve vertices.
• Curve Dashboard options:
– Use Line – Line
– Use Spline – Spline
• Curve Attributes:
– Free
– Place curve on surface

y
• Ends conditions:

nl
– Free

O
– Tangent
– Normal

se
– Curvature Continuous
Figure 1 – Defining Curve
• Tweak: Placement
U
– Move type
– Style Points
al

– Movement Plane
rn

– Motion direction
– Region
te

– Sliders
In

– Diagnostics

Figure 2 – Displaying Curvature Plot

C

Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex

PT

You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum points, or
edge/curve vertices. Each point to point segment can be defined as either a
line (Use Line ) or a spline (Use Spline ).
r
Fo

Segments defined as straight lines can be filleted at the points where they
connect to one another using the Add fillet option. When this option is used,
the segments are selectable so that a dragger for a radius value can be
accessed. If no radius is added, the segments are joined through each point.
You can group points of equal fillet radii together, thereby controlling multiple
radii with a single dimension.
Defining Curve Placement Options
When creating a curve through points, you can define the following placement
options:
• Free (Default) – The curve passes through the selected points using the
Free option. The curve in the upper image of Figure 1 is Free.
• On Surface – The curve passes through the selected points and lies on
a specified quilt or surface using the Place curve on surface option. Only

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 29

 one surface can be selected, so it may be necessary to merge surfaces if
more than one is to be selected. The curve in the lower image of Figure
1 lies on the surface.

Defining Tangency Conditions

Using the Ends Condition tab in the dashboard, you can define tangency
conditions for both the start point and end point of the curve. The following
options are available for tangency conditions:
• Free – Enables you to set the end tangencies to be free (default).
• Tangent – Enables you to define the curve endpoints tangent to the
selected reference.
• Normal – Enables you to define the curve endpoints normal to the selected

y
reference.

nl
• Curvature Continuous – Enables you to define the curve as curvature

O
continuous. This means that the curvature equals the curvature of the
selected tangency reference. This option is only available for the tangent
condition.

se
When specifying the tangency condition, you must select a reference that is
used to set the tangency condition against. For example, if you define a
U
tangent condition, you must select a reference to which the curve endpoint
is tangent. The reference types that can be selected include curves, edges,
al

axes, surfaces, or a surface normal to the edge. You can also create an axis.
rn

You can always remove a tangency condition from either end point by
selecting Free from the End condition drop down list.
te

Defining Tweak Options

In

The Tweak curve option enables you to click Tweak Curve Settings and
dynamically manipulate the spline. The following types of manipulations can
be performed to the curve:
C

• Move type – Enables you to move the curve either using its control
PT

polyhedron or by its spline points. In Figure 2, the spline's control

polyhedron is displayed.
• Style Points – Enables you to move, add, delete, or redistribute points.
r

This option is only available when the Move type is set to spline points.
Fo

• Movement Plane – Enables you to specify the movement plane as the

Curve Plane, a Defined Plane, or the View Plane.
• Motion direction – Enables you to move the curve in the First direction,
Second direction, or the Normal direction.
• Region – Enables you to determine which area of the curve to move,
whether Local, Smooth Region, Linear Region, or Constant Region.
• Sliders – You can move the curve using sliders for First direction, Second
direction, and Normal direction. You can also adjust the sensitivity of the
sliders.
There is also a series of diagnostics available to help you achieve the desired
curve shape. Available diagnostics include:
• Curvature display
• Radius display

Module 3 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 • Tangents display
• Interpolation Points display

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Creating Curves Through a Point or
Vertex

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Curve_Through-Pnt-Vtx CURVE_THRU-[Link]

Task 1: Create a curve through two vertices.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve through

O
Points from the Curve types
drop-down list.

se
3. Select the two vertices. U
4. Select the Ends Condition tab
from the Curve dashboard.
al

5. Select Start Point from the Curve

side list and select Tangent from
rn

the End condition drop-down

menu.
te

• Select the front edge on the

left surface.
In

6. Select End Point from the Curve

side list and select Tangent from
C

the End condition drop-down

PT

menu and select the front edge

on the right surface.
r
Fo

7. Select the Options tab, select

Tweak curve and click Tweak
Curve Settings.
8. In the Modify Curve dialog box,
click Diagnostics and display
the Curvature plot.
9. In the graphics window, click the
middle two points and drag them
outward so the curvature plot
line resembles an arc.

Module 3 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 10. Click Apply Changes from
the Modify Curve dialog box.
11. Click Complete Feature from
the dashboard.

Task 2: Create a curve through two vertices and a point.

1. Click Curve from the Datum

y
drop-down menu.

nl
2. Select the left vertex, the datum
point, and the right vertex.

O
3. Cursor over the left control se
U
handle, then right-click and
select Normal.
al

4. Select the long adjacent edge on

rn

the left surface.

te
In

5. Cursor over the right control

handle, then right-click and
C

select Normal.
6. Select the long adjacent edge on
PT

the right surface.

7. Click Complete Feature from
the dashboard.
r
Fo

8. Right-click datum plane DTM2

from the model tree and select
Edit.
9. Edit the offset value to -1.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 33

Task 3: Create a curve through a point and vertex.

1. Click Curve .
2. Select datum point PNT1, and
the rear vertex.

y
nl
3. Spin the model and notice that
the curve is above the surface.

O
• Select the Placement tab
in the dashboard and select

se
Place curve on surface.
• Right-click to query, select
U
Quilt:F11.
• Notice that the curve now lies
al

on the quilt.
rn

4. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Creating a Curve Through a Point Array
You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of
points.

• Connection types:
– Spline
– Single Radius
– Multiple Radius
• Point selections:

y
– Single Point

nl
– Whole Array

O
se
U Figure 1 – Fitting a Spline Curve
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Fitting a Single Figure 3 – Fitting a Multiple

Radius Curve Radius Curve
r
Fo

Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of points when those
points are created as a point array. When selecting the points, query the
array until all points highlight, then select the whole array. You can fit the
following types of curves through an array of datum points:
• Use Spline – Enables you to create a spline curve through the
selected array of datum points.
• Use Line – Enables you to join points with line segments and, if
desired, to add a radius to the line segments, making the resulting curve
smoother.
– Zero Radius
– Single Radius – A single radius value controls the fit of the curve.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 35

 – Multiple Radii – Provided the points are selected individually within the
array, multiple radii can be used to control the fit. Enable the Group with
equal radius points option to group separate radii controls together,
thereby controlling them with a single dimension value.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Crv_Thru-Pnt-Array CRV_THRU-[Link]

Task 1: Create a spline datum curve through an array of points.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Click the Datum group drop-down

y
menu and select Curve through

nl
Points from the Curve
drop-down list.

O
3. Highlight datum point START.

4. Right-click so the entire point

array highlights, then select the se
U
point.
5. Click Complete Feature .
al

6. Right-click Curve 1 in the model

rn

tree and select Hide.

te
In

Task 2: Create a curve through an array of points with straight line

segments, with zero radius and a single radius.
C
PT

1. Click the Datum group drop-down

menu and select Curve .
2. Highlight datum point START,
r

then right-click and then select it.

Fo

3. Click Use Line in the

dashboard to toggle from a
spline to straight lines.
4. Click Preview Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 37

 5. Click Resume Feature .
6. Click Round Curve and edit
the radius to 10.
7. Click Complete Feature .
8. Right-click Curve 2 in the model
tree and select Hide.

y
nl
Task 3: Create a multiple radius datum curve through an array of points.

O
1. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve .
2. Select datum point START.
3. Select the next adjacent datum se
U
point in the array.
al

4. Click Use Line from the

dashboard.
rn

5. Select the next 7 points in the

array.
te

6. Select the Placement tab in the

dashboard.
In

7. Press CTRL and select Point 2,

C

Point 3, and Point 4.

PT

• Select Add fillet.

• Edit the Radius to 5.00.
8. Select Point 5.
r

• Select Add fillet.

Fo

• Disable Group with equal

radius points.
• Edit the Radius to 10.00.
9. Select Point 6, press CTRL and
select Point 7, Point 8, and
Point 9.
• Select Add fillet.
• Edit the Radius to 5.00.
• Enable Group with equal
radius points.

Module 3 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 10. Double-click any of the 5.00
radius values on the model, and
edit it to 2.00.

y
nl
11. Click Complete Feature .

O
12. Right-click the third Curve 3 in
the model tree and select Edit.
• Notice that even though bend
radius 2 was used in multiple se
U
locations, it is only displayed
once.
al
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 39

Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section
You can create a curve at the intersection of a planar
cross-section and part outline.

• You can use solid or surface models.

• The cross-section boundary is used to create the datum curve.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section Figure 2 – Creating the Curve

te

Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

In

You can use the Curve from Cross Section option to create a datum
curve from a planar cross-section by selecting the cross-section from the
drop-down list in the dashboard.
C

Alternatively, you can create or select a cross-section from the Xsec tab
PT

in the View Manager, by right-clicking and selecting Curve from xsec. The
system creates a curve at the intersection of the planar cross-section and
the part outline. You can create cross-section curves from solid or surface
r

models. The cross-section boundary is used to create a datum curve. If a

Fo

cross-section has more than one chain, each chain has a composite curve.
In Figure 1, a cross-section was created at a datum plane intersecting the
model. The curve in Figure 2 was then created using this cross-section
boundary.
You cannot use a boundary from an offset cross-section to create
a datum curve.

Module 3 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Cross-Section [Link]

Task 1: Create a surface cross-section.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager from

y
the In Graphics toolbar.

nl
• Select the Xsec tab.
• Click New and press ENTER

O
to accept the default name of
Xsec0001.

se
3. In the menu manager, click
Surf/Quilt > Planar > Single >
U
Done.
4. Click anywhere on the model.
al

5. Select datum plane DTM3 from

the model tree.
rn

6. Click Repaint from the In

te

Graphics toolbar.
7. Click Close.
In

Task 2: Create the curve from the cross-section.

C
PT

1. Click the Datum group drop-down

menu and select Curve from
Cross Section from the
Curve types drop-down menu.
r
Fo

2. In the dashboard, select

cross-section XSEC0001 from
the Cross-section drop-down list.
3. Click Complete Feature .
4. Notice that the curve is created.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 41

Task 3: Create a Cross Section Curve from the View Manager.

1. Click View Manager from

the In Graphics toolbar.
• Select the Xsec tab, if
necessary.
• Double-click cross section A
to activate it.

y
nl
O
2. Right-click and select Curve

se
from xsec.
• Notice that the curve is
U
created.
al
rn
te
In
C

This completes the procedure.

r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 Creating a Curve From Equation
You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a
mathematical equation.
• Can create in terms of parameter T
– Varies from 0 to 1
• Can also type in explicit equations
– Automatically finds the
independent variable.
Figure 1 – Straight Line Curve
– Range specified by the user.

y
– You may use substitutions to
keep expressions simple.

nl
• You must specify the following:

O
– Coordinate system
– Coordinate system type
♦ Cartesian
♦ Cylindrical se
U
♦ Spherical
Figure 2 – Parabola Curve
al

– Equation
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Sine Wave Curve

C

Creating a Curve From Equation

PT

You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a mathematical
equation. The equation can be defined for one, two, or three coordinate
system axes. The coordinate system type can be specified for the selected
r

coordinate system. The following three coordinate system types can be used:
Fo

• Cartesian – You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters in the equation.

• Cylindrical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Z parameters in the
equation.
• Spherical – You must specify R, Theta (θ), and Phi (Φ) parameters in the
equation.
You type the equation into a text editor, which launches once you specify the
type of coordinate system. You define the three parameters for the coordinate
system type specified, each on a separate line of the text editor.
Using the ‘T’ Parameter
One method of defining equations is to do so in terms of a parameter T,
which varies from 0 to 1. The following are examples of different Cartesian
coordinate system equations that you can create a curve from:
• Straight Line (in X direction) – x=35*t, y=0, z=0. Shown in Figure 1.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 43

• Parabola (in XZ plane) – x=35*t, y=0, z=35*t^2. Shown in Figure 2.
• Sine wave (in XY plane) – x=t*10, y=3*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure 3.
• Circle (in XY plane) – x=4*cos(t*360), y=4*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure
4.

Figure 4 – Circular Curve

y
nl
Using Explicit Equations

O
Another method of defining curves is to type in an explicit equation. Creo
Parametric automatically finds the independent variable and internally
parameterizes the equations to draw the curve. You type in the independent

se
variable’s range, with the default range being 0 to 1. You may use
substitutions to keep the expressions simple, as long as there is only a single
U
independent variable.
The following are examples of different explicit equations that you can create
al

a curve from:
rn

• Straight Line – y=x, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 5.

te
In

Figure 5 – Straight Line Curve

C

• Angled Line – y=x/2+5 range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 6.

r PT
Fo

Figure 6 – Angled Line Curve

• Full parabola – y=10*(x/10)2, range –10 to 10. Shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7 – Full Parabola Curve

• Half parabola – y=10*(x/10)2, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 8.

Module 3 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Figure 8 – Half Parabola Curve
• Sine wave – y=100*sin(2*x)+10, range 0 to 360. Shown in Figure 9.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 9 – Sine Wave Curve
• Helix along Z axis, cylindrical csys – r=1000, z=5*theta, range 0 to 360.
U
Shown in Figure 10.
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 10 – Helical Curve

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 45

PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve From Equation

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curves_Equation CURVES_EQUATION_1.PRT

Task 1: Create a datum curve from an equation using the T parameter.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Datum group drop-down
menu and select Curve from

y
Equation from the curve

nl
types drop-down list.
3. In the model tree, select

O
coordinate system CS0.
4. In the dashboard, select

se
Cartesian, if necessary.
5. Click Equation.
U
6. Read the Equation information
dialog box then click Close.
al
rn

7. In the Equation dialog box, type

the following equation:
te

• x=6*t
• y=0
In

• z=0
C
PT

8. Click OK from the Equation

dialog box.
r
Fo

9. Click Complete Feature .

Module 3 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 10. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
11. Click Equation.
12. In the Equation dialog box, edit
the equation to:
• x=6*t
• y=14*t
• z=0
13. Click OK.
14. Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
O
se
U
15. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
al

16. Click Equation.

rn

17. In the Equation dialog box, edit

the equation to:
te

• x=6*t
• y=14*t^3
In

• z=0
18. Click OK.
C

19. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 47

Task 2: Investigate and refine a datum curve using an explicit equation.

1. Click Open , select

CURVES_EQUATION_2.PRT,
and click Open.
2. Enable only the following Datum
Display types: .
3. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
4. Click Equation from the

y
dashboard to review the
equation.

nl
5. Click OK from the Equation

O
dialog box.
6. Edit the From range value to 0.
7. Click Complete Feature .
se
U
8. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
9. Click Equation.
al

10. In the Equation dialog box, edit

rn

the equation to:

• y=100*sin(2*x)+10
te

11. Click OK.

In

12. Edit the To range value to 360.

13. Click Complete Feature .
C

14. Edit the definition of Curve 1.

PT

15. Edit the Coordinate System type

to Cylindrical.
16. Click Equation.
r
Fo

17. In the Equation dialog box, edit

the equation to:
• r=1000
• z=5*theta
18. Click OK.
19. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Composite Curves
You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a
solid or surface model to create a composite datum curve.

• Two types of composite curves:

– Exact
– Approximate

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Creating an Exact
Composite Curve
se
Figure 2 – Creating an Approximate
Composite Curve
U
al
rn

Creating Composite Curves

You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a solid or
te

surface model to create a composite datum curve. There are two types of
In

composite curves that can be created:

• Exact – Creates an exact copy of the selected edge(s).
C

• Approximate – Creates a datum curve that approximates a chain of

tangent (C1) curves by creating a single curvature continuous (C2) spline.
PT

This is useful for surfacing applications, when a continuous curvature curve

is desired to create a surface, in cases where the original edges may only
be tangent. You can also use approximate curves to remove small surfaces
r

from the design, and create a single surface with continuous curvature,
Fo

instead of a surface with multiple patches.

Approximate curves cannot be created on joint angles greater then

5 degrees.

During curve creation, you can drag the handles at either endpoint of the
previewed curve to lengthen or shorten the resulting curve. You can also edit
the values directly. In Figure 1, you can view the drag handles. To shorten
the resulting composite curve you can type negative values. To lengthen or
extend the endpoints of the resulting composite curve you can type positive
values.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 49

PROCEDURE - Creating Composite Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Composite [Link]

Task 1: Create an exact copy composite curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the boundary blend
surface.

y
3. Query-select the straight, front,

nl
surface edge until the entire
edge length is pre-highlighted.

O
4. Click to select the pre-highlighted
edge.

se
U
5. Click Copy and click Paste
.
al

6. Select Exact from the Curve type

drop-down list in the dashboard,
rn

if necessary.
te

7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Notice the Copy 1 feature in the
In

model tree.
C

Task 2: Create an approximate copy composite curve.

PT

1. Select the boundary blend

surface.
2. Query-select the rear tangent
r
Fo

chain of edges until the entire

edge length is pre-highlighted.
3. Click to select the pre-highlighted
edge.

Module 3 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 4. Click Copy and click Paste
.
5. Select Approximate from the
Curve type drop-down list in the
dashboard.
6. Click Complete Feature .
7. Notice the Copy 2 feature in the
model tree.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 51

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections
With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the
intersection of two sketches.

• System extrudes theoretical

surfaces.
• Curve created at the intersection
of these surfaces.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 1 – Viewing Theoretically Figure 2 – Creating a Curve from

Extruded Surfaces Curve Intersections
In

Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections

C

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection
PT

of two sketches. The system theoretically extrudes surfaces towards each

other from the selected sketches, as shown Figure 1, and then creates the
curve at the intersection of the theoretical surfaces.
r

The Intersect feature automatically completes without opening the Intersect

Fo

dashboard if you preselect both references. You can, however, redefine the
intersect feature to change the selected sketch references. You can also
preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the Intersect
dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.

Module 3 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from Curve
Intersections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Isect-Curve CURVE_INTERSECTION.PRT

Task 1: Create a new curve from the intersection of two other curves.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Notice that there are two 2-D
datum curves.

nl
3. Press CTRL and select the two

O
datum curves.

se
U
4. Click Intersect from the
al

Editing group in the ribbon.

5. Notice the 3-D curve that is
rn

created. Notice that the original

two curves are hidden.
te
In

6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.

7. Select the References tab in the
C

dashboard and view the selected

sketches.
PT

8. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 53

Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection
The Intersect tool enables you to create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the
intersection of two surfaces.

• Curve created at the intersection

of two surfaces.
• Resulting curve can be 2-D or 3-D.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 1 – Creating a Curve from

Surface Intersection
In

Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

C

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection
PT

of two surface quilts. The system creates the curve at the intersection of
the surfaces, as shown in Figure 1. The Intersect feature automatically
completes without opening the Intersect dashboard if you preselect both
r

references, since the Intersect process is fully defined. However, you can
Fo

redefine the intersect feature to change the selected quilt references. You
can also preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the
Intersect dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.

Module 3 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Isect-Surface CURVE_INTERSECT-[Link]

Task 1: Create a curve at the intersection of two surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the two surfaces.
3. Press CTRL and select the two

y
surfaces.

nl
O
4. Click Intersect from the
se
U
Editing group in the ribbon.
5. Notice the 3-D curve that is
al

created.
rn
te

6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.

In

7. Select the References tab and

view the selected quilts.
C

8. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 55

Projecting and Wrapping Curves
You can project or wrap curves onto a surface or set of surfaces.

• Projected Curves
– Projected onto a surface or set of surfaces
– Normal to reference plane
– Length can increase or decrease from original
• Wrapped Curves
– Formed over a surface

y
– Length does not change from original

nl
O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 1 – Projecting a Curve Figure 2 – Wrapping a Curve

te

Creating Project Curves

In

You can project a selected curve onto a surface or set of surfaces, normal to
C

a reference plane. Depending on the shape of the surface and the angle of
the plane, the length of the projected curve can increase or decrease from
PT

the original.
When projecting a curve, the following options are available:
r

• References – Enables you to select the sketch or chain of curves to be

Fo

projected and the surface or surfaces to be projected onto. If desired,

you can define an internal sketch.
• Direction – Enables you to specify both the direction reference and the
direction. There are two different directions you can select:
– Along direction – Projects the selected chains or sketch in a specified
direction.
– Normal to surface – Projects the selected chains or sketch normal to the
target surface.
• Flip – Enables you to flip the direction of the projected datum curve.

Creating Wrap Curves

You can wrap (form) a sketched curve over a surface. The length of the
wrapped curve is not changed from the original. The surface the curve

Module 3 | Page 56 © 2011 PTC

 is wrapped onto must be developable, meaning that it must be some type
of ruled surface.
When wrapping a curve, the following options are available:
• Select the sketch to be wrapped. If desired, you can define an internal
sketch.
• Specify the destination surface onto which the curve is to be wrapped.
• Define the wrap origin – By default, the wrap origin is the sketch center.
You can also create a sketched coordinate system in the wrapped sketch
and define it as the wrap origin.
• Ignore intersection surface – Causes any intersecting surfaces to be
ignored when wrapping the curve.

y
• Trim at boundary – Trims the portion of a curve that cannot be wrapped at

nl
the surface boundary.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 57

PROCEDURE - Projecting and Wrapping Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Project-Wrap PROJECT_WRAP.PRT

Task 1: Project a datum curve onto a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the two circular datum
curves.

y
3. Select datum curve

nl
PROJ_CURVE from the model
tree.

O
4. Click Project from the
Editing group in the ribbon.
5. Select the surface.
se
U
6. Click Complete Feature .
7. The curve is projected onto the
al

surface.
rn

8. Edit the definition of Project 1.

9. In the dashboard, click in the
te

Direction reference collector to

activate it.
In

• Select datum plane DTM2

from the model tree as the
C

new datum reference.

PT

10. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

Task 2: Wrap a datum curve onto a surface.

1. Select datum curve

WRAP_CURVE.
2. Select the Editing drop-down
menu and click Wrap .
3. Click Complete Feature .

Module 3 | Page 58 © 2011 PTC

 4. Edit the definition of datum curve
WRAP_CURVE.

5. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group.
• Place a sketched coordinate
system on the sketch.
6. Click OK .

7. Orient to the WRAP view

orientation.

y
8. Edit the definition of Wrap 1.

nl
9. Edit the Wrap Origin from Center

O
to Sketcher CSYS.
10. Notice the difference in the

se
wrapped curve location.
11. Click Complete Feature .
U
al

This completes the procedure.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 59

Trimming Curves
You can trim a curve at a selected point to either break it into
segments or specify which side to keep.

• Curve trimmed at Trimming object:

– Datum Point
– Datum Plane
– Another curve
• Blue side denotes the portion to

y
be removed.

nl
• You can flip which side to keep:
– Keep side 1

O
– Keep side 2
– Keep both sides

se
Figure 1 – Keeping Both Sides
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Selecting Trimming Object, Keeping a Side,

C

Viewing Completed Trim

PT

Trimming Curves
r
Fo

The Trim tool adapts to the object selected. It enables you to trim a curve or a
surface, whichever is selected. You can use the Trim tool to either remove a
portion of a curve or break it into multiple segments.
To trim a curve, you must select it as the Trimmed curve. You must then
select the Trimming object such as a datum point, datum plane, or point. The
curve is split at the Trimming object location. In Figure 2, a datum plane
is selected as the Trimming object.
The blue “shading” on the curve indicates the side that will be trimmed, or
removed. The yellow arrow points towards the side to be kept. In the lower
image of Figure 2, the right half of the curve is to be removed.
You can flip the side of the curve that is trimmed using the following order:
• Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 1.
• Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 2.

Module 3 | Page 60 © 2011 PTC

 • Curve split at Trimming object, keep both sides. No geometry is trimmed.
Rather, the curve is segmented. In Figure 1, both sides of the curve are
to be kept. Thus, both sides display an arrow.
You can flip the side by clicking the yellow arrow in the graphics window, by
right-clicking and selecting Flip, or by clicking Flip Trim Sides from the
dashboard.

You cannot access the option to keep both sides by clicking the
arrow in the graphics window.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 61

PROCEDURE - Trimming Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curve_Trim CURVE_TRIM.PRT

Task 1: Trim a datum curve.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select Sketch 1.

y
nl
3. Click Trim from the Editing
group in the ribbon.

O
4. Select datum point PNT0.

se
5. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim
Sides to make the arrow
U
point to the left, leaving blue
geometry on the right.
al
rn
te

6. Click Complete Feature .

7. The curve side that was blue has
In

been trimmed away.

8. De-select all features.
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 62 © 2011 PTC

 9. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
10. Enable Plane Display .
11. Select the curve on its left side
as shown. Notice it is a trim
feature in the model tree.
12. Also notice that only one piece
is available for subsequent
selection.

y
nl
O
13. Click Trim . se
U
14. Select datum plane DTM1 from
the model tree.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 63

 15. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim
Sides twice to keep both
sides.

y
nl
O
16. Click Complete Feature .
se
U
17. De-select all features.
18. Select the curve. Notice it is
al

another trim feature in the model

tree.
rn

19. Also notice that two pieces

are available for subsequent
te

selection.
In

20. Select the lower half of the curve.

C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 64 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Offset Curves
You can create curves that are offset either along a surface or
normal to a surface.

• Curves offset along a surface:

– Original reference can be a
curve or surface edge.
– Define offset values:
♦ Distance
♦ Distance Type

y
♦ Location

nl
• Curves offset normal to a surface:

O
– Original reference must be a
curve.

se
– Specify Scale.
Figure 1 – Offsetting a Curve
– Can specify datum graph. Along a Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Offsetting a Curve Figure 3 – Offsetting a Curve

PT

Normal to a Surface using a Datum Graph

Creating Offset Curves Along a Surface

r
Fo

You can create a datum curve that is offset from a surface boundary edge,
a chain of edges, or another curve on that surface. The resulting curve lies
on the surface. By default, one offset value is provided. However, you can
create additional offset values and then locate those offset values along the
offset edge as desired. The offset value location is a ratio of the entire offset
line length. For example, if you want to locate an offset value at the midpoint
of the curve, you would specify a Location of 0.5. You can also locate the
offset values on the curve endpoints. In Figure 1, the curve has two offset
values defined, one at each endpoint.
For each offset value, you can specify the distance the curve is offset from
its original curve. In Figure 1, the curve is offset on one side by 2.00, and
on the other side by 1.00. This distance value can be measured using the
following distance types:
• Normal to Edge – Measures offset distance normal to the boundary edge.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 65

• Along Edge – Measures offset distance along the measurement edge.
• To Vertex – Starts offset curve at the vertex and parallel to the boundary
edge.

Creating Offset Curves Normal to a Surface

You can offset a curve on a surface, normal to a reference surface. The
resulting curve is raised off the surface by a distance, as shown in the lower
figures.
You can specify this offset distance using the following methods:
• Offset value – The distance the curve is offset from the surface.

y
• Unit Datum Graph – A datum graph with a constant X-length of 1.0 is used

nl
to specify the curve offset. The resulting curve is offset at a constant value
as defined by the Scale value in the dashboard. In Figure 2, a unit datum

O
graph is used to offset the curve. As a result, the offset is the same along
the entire curve.

se
• Optional Datum Graph – The curve offset is determined by an optionally
specified datum graph. When an optional datum graph is defined, the
U
system uses the Offset value as a multiplier. In Figure 3, the optional
datum graph is specified. As a result, the offset varies along the curve
al

based on the datum graph.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 3 | Page 66 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Datum\Curves_Offset CURVES_OFFSET.PRT

Task 1: Create a curve offset along a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the surface.
3. Select the front edge.

y
nl
4. Click Offset from the Editing
group in the ribbon.

O
5. Edit the offset distance to 2.

se
6. In the dashboard, select the
Measurements tab.
U
• Right-click in the tab and select
Add. A point is added.
al

• Drag the point's dot to the

rightmost end.
rn

• Edit the Distance Type to

Along Edge.
te

7. Right-click in the Measurements

In

tab and select Add. Another

point is added.
C

• Edit the Location to 0.35.

PT

• Edit the Distance to 1.

r
Fo

8. In the Measurements tab,

right-click the third point and
select Delete.
9. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 67

Task 2: Create a curve offset normal to a surface.

1. Edit the definition of GRAPH1.

• In the menu manager, click
Done.
• Press ENTER.
2. View the graph. Notice that it
slopes from 0.5 to 1.25.
3. Click OK .

y
nl
O
se
4. Select curve Offset 1.
5. Click Offset .
U
6. The dashboard now has more
options. The first, and default,
al

option is Offset Along Surface

rn

. The first curve was this

type.
te

7. Select Offset Normal To

In

Surface .
• Edit the Scale to 1.0, if
C

necessary.
PT

8. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
r
Fo

9. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
• Click in the Graph collector to
activate it.
• Select GRAPH1.
• Notice that the curve has
updated.
10. Click Complete Feature .

Module 3 | Page 68 © 2011 PTC

 11. Spin the model to notice the
difference in curve creation.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 69

Creating Cosmetic Sketches
Cosmetic sketches are used to sketch entities on the model for
purely visual purposes.
• Purely visual
• Do not add or remove material
• Fully constrained or
Under-Constrained
• Unique display on screen and in
model tree
Figure 1 – Before and After

y
• Can be cross-hatched
Cosmetic Features

nl
O
se
U
Figure 3 – Cosmetic Sketched
al

Figure 2 – Under-Constrained Mode Text Created

rn

Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Cosmetic sketches are created very similar to a typical sketch feature
te

(sketched datum curve). Unlike sketch features, cosmetic features are not
used to add or remove material from the model, but instead are used to
In

sketch on the model for purely visual purposes, as shown in Figure 1.

Cosmetic sketches are created using the Cosmetic Sketch option in the
C

Engineering group of the ribbon, and can contain any sketched geometry.
PT

The sketch can be fully constrained, as with standard sketched features,

or can use the special Under-Constrained Mode of sketcher. This mode
enables you to snap the sketched geometry to references if desired, but
does not require dimensions to fully constrain the sketch, as shown in Figure
r

2. Under-Constrained Mode enables the import of large and complex 2-D

Fo

geometry.
By default, cosmetic sketches are created in a different color (orange) from
standard sketches (blue), and also have a unique icon in the model tree,
as shown in Figure 3.
Cosmetic sketched can contain cross-hatching that can be modified on a
drawing.
Several restrictions apply to cosmetic sketches:
• They do not appear by default when rotating the model.
• They cannot be used as a sketch reference for a sketch-based feature
(such as extrude).
• They cannot be referenced by other features or sketches. For example,
you cannot select a cosmetic sketched curve for a sweep trajectory or for
a snapping reference in sketcher.

Module 3 | Page 70 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Cosmetic\Sketch [Link]

Task 1: Create a constrained cosmetic sketch with text.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT
in the model tree, then right-click

y
and select Open.

nl
• Notice the existing standard
sketch features (blue).

O
3. Click the Engineering group

se
drop-down menu and select
Cosmetic Sketch.
U
4. Select the main model surface
and click Sketch.
al

5. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
rn

.
te

6. Click Text and sketch a

reference line.
In

7. In the Text dialog box:

C

• Type 5mm.
• Select Right for the Horizontal
PT

Position.
• Select Middle for the Vertical
Position.
r
Fo

• Click OK.
8. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.

9. Click OK to complete the

sketch.
10. Click the screen to de-select any
geometry.
• Notice the difference in the
cosmetic appearance.

© 2011 PTC Module 3 | Page 71

Task 2: Create an unconstrained cosmetic sketch with hatching.

1. Press ALT and select the main

surface.
2. Click the Engineering group
drop-down menu and select
Cosmetic Sketch.
3. Click the Setup group
drop-down menu and enable
Under-Constrained Mode.

y
4. Select Center Rectangle

nl
from the Rectangle drop-down
list, and create the sketch shown.

O
• Notice the lack of dimensions
in Under-Constrained Mode.

5. Select Center and Axis Ellipse

se
U
from the Ellipse drop-down
list and sketch two ellipses.
al

• Constrain the ellipse centers

coincident to the diagonal
rn

construction line endpoints, if

necessary.
te

6. Click Delete Segment and

In

trim the sketch as shown.

• Constrain the vertices
C

coincident as necessary.
PT

7. Click Sketch Setup from the

r

Setup group.
Fo

8. Select the Properties tab in the

Cosmetic Sketch dialog box.
• Enable Add cross-hatching.
• Edit the spacing to 5.
• Click Sketch.
9. Click OK to complete the
sketch.

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 72 © 2011 PTC

 Module 4

y
Advanced Sketching

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Sketches can consist of simple entities, such as lines, arcs, and circles.
However, you can create more complex shapes by using advanced entities,
such as ellipses, conics, splines, and elliptical fillets. You can also create
U
sketched text entities by either manually typing in the text value, or by using
the value of a parameter that you have specified in the design model. You
al

can adjust the text as desired. You can use Sketcher diagnostic tools to aid
you while in Sketcher to be more efficient.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Understand sketched curves.

• Sketch ellipses, elliptical fillets, and conics.
C

• Sketch and modify splines, as well as import and export spline points.
PT

• Sketch and modify text.

• Analyze Sketcher convert options including Strong, Spline, Reference,
Perimeter, and Tapered.
r

• Analyze Sketcher dimension options, including creating reference and

Fo

baseline dimensions as well as locking dimensions.

• Use Sketcher diagnostic tools including shading closed loops, highlighting
open ends, highlighting open geometry, and feature requirements check.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 1

Using Sketched Curves
Sketched curves can be used in a variety of different ways.

Uses include:
• Section
• Boundary
• Trajectory
• Reference Geometry
– Other curves

y
– Other datum features

nl
– Surfaces or supporting Figure 1 – Sketched Curve

O
geometry Used as a Section

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Sketched Curves Figure 3 – Sketched Curve

Used as Boundaries Used as a Trajectory
In
C

Using Sketched Curves

PT

Sketched curves are powerful because they can be used in so many different
ways. The following are common uses of sketched curves:
r

• Section – In Figure 1, the sketched curve was used as one of the three
Fo

sections in a rotational blend feature.

• Boundary – In Figure 2, the two sketched curves are used as the first
direction boundaries in a boundary blend feature.
• Trajectory – In Figure 3, the two sketched curves were used as trajectories
in the variable section sweep feature.
• As a reference for other geometry – Sketched curves can be used in
general for reference geometry for other features. They can be used as a
reference for other curves, other datum features, or ultimately for surfaces
or supporting geometry.

Module 4 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Sketching Ellipses
You can sketch elliptical sections using two methods.

• Ellipse creation options:

– Center and Axis
– Axis Ends
• Dimension options:
– Length of Major/Minor Axes
– Radius of Major/Minor Axes

y
– Any custom scheme

nl
• Either Ellipse type can be created
or rotated to any angle.

O
se
Figure 1 – Center and Axis Ellipse,
Length Dimensions
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Axis Ends Ellipse, Figure 3 – Center and Axis Ellipse,

Radius Dimensions Created on an Angle
r
Fo

Sketching Ellipses
You can create two different types of ellipses:
• Center and Axis Ellipse
– When using this type of ellipse, you select a center location for the
major axis and one endpoint of the major axis. (The major axis is
always created symmetric to the center location.) You then select a third
location that defines the length of the minor axis.
• Axis Ends Ellipse
– When using this type of ellipse, you select a location for one endpoint of
the major axis and the other endpoint of the major axis. You then select
a third location that defines the length of the minor axis.
Keep in mind the following when sketching ellipses:

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 3

• The center point can be dimensioned or snapped to Sketcher references.
In the previous figures, the center point has been located using the
horizontal and/or vertical references.
• Ellipses are created with construction lines for the major and minor axes.
These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain the ellipse.
• You can dimension an ellipse by its major and minor axes, even if the
ellipse is created on an angle. To create these dimensions, you can select
the axes construction lines and dimension them directly.
• You can also dimension an ellipse using the major axis (Rx) and minor axis
(Ry) radius dimensions. These radius values are measured along the axes
from the ellipse to its center. The major axis is always the first axis placed,
regardless of size compared to the minor axis.

y
• You can create an ellipse at any angle, based on the placement points for

nl
the major axis. You can also rotate the ellipse to any angle after creating it.
• You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Sketching Ellipses

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Ellipse [Link]

Task 1: Sketch an Axis Ends Ellipse and dimension it using radius

dimensions on the major and minor axes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Click the Sketch from the
Datum group.

nl
3. Select datum plane FRONT from

O
the model tree as the Sketch
Plane.

se
• Click Sketch in the Sketch
dialog box. U
4. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
al

.
rn

5. Click Sketch View from the

Graphics toolbar.
te

6. Click Axis Ends Ellipse

In

from the Sketching group.

7. Click the intersection of the
C

references as the first endpoint

PT

of the major axis.

• Move the cursor to the right
and click to define the second
endpoint for the major axis.
r
Fo

• Move the cursor up and click

to define the length of the
minor axis.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 5

 8. Middle-click to stop sketching.
• Notice the default
dimensioning scheme.
9. Click Normal .
• Select the ellipse and then
middle-click. Click Major Axis
and click Accept. Type 120 as
the value and press ENTER.
• Select the ellipse again and
then middle-click. Click Minor

y
Axis and click Accept. Type

nl
75 as the value and press
ENTER.

O
Task 2: Sketch a Center and Axis Ellipse and dimension it using length

se
dimensions on the major and minor axes.
U
1. Select Center and Axis Ellipse
from the Ellipse type
al

drop-down menu.
rn

2. Click the center of the previous

ellipse.
te

• Move the cursor up and to the

right, then click to define the
In

endpoint of the major axis.

• Without permitting the ellipse
to snap to existing geometry,
C

move the cursor and click to

PT

define the length of the minor

axis.
r
Fo

Module 4 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 3. Middle-click to stop sketching.
• Notice the default
dimensioning scheme.
4. Click Normal .
• Select the major axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 275 as the
value and press ENTER.
• Select the minor axis and
middle-click to place the

y
dimension. Type 85 as the

nl
value and press ENTER.
• Select the major axis from

O
each ellipse and then
middle-click to place the

se
angle. Type 75 as the value
and press ENTER.
5. Middle-click and then select the
U
dimensions and drag them as
shown.
al
rn

6. Click OK .
7. Press CTRL+D to orient to the standard orientation.
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 7

Sketching Elliptical Fillets
You can sketch elliptical fillets between sketched entities.

• Sketching elliptical fillets:

– Select two sketched entities.
– Tangent at the endpoints.
– Dimension schemes are the
same as ellipses.
♦ Fillets can be rotated.

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Creating Elliptical Fillets

se
U
Sketching Elliptical Fillets
al

Creating an elliptical fillet is very similar to creating a circular fillet; the

size of the fillet is initially based on pick point locations. However, using
rn

elliptical fillets enables you to create an elliptical intersection between two

entities, rather than a rounded intersection. The elliptical fillet is tangent at its
te

endpoints to the adjacent geometry.

In

Elliptical fillets are similar to sketched ellipses in the following ways:

C

• Elliptical fillets are created with construction lines for the major and minor
axes. These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain
PT

the ellipse.
• You can dimension an elliptical fillet by its major and minor axes, as shown
in the right elliptical fillet. To create these dimensions, you can select the
r

axes' construction lines and dimension them directly.

Fo

• You can also dimension an elliptical fillet using the major axis (Rx) and
minor axis (Ry) dimensions, as shown in the upper-left elliptical fillet. These
radius values are measured along the axes from the elliptical fillet to its
center. The major axis is always the horizontal axis when the fillet is first
sketched, regardless of size compared to the minor axis.
• You can also rotate the elliptical fillet after creating it, as shown in the right
elliptical fillet.
• You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.
You cannot select parallel lines as the entities for creating elliptical fillets.

Module 4 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Sketching Elliptical Fillets

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Fillet_Elliptical ELLIPTICAL_FILLET.PRT

Task 1: Sketch and dimension three elliptical fillets using different

dimensioning schemes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

y
3. Enable only the following

nl
Sketcher Display types:

O
.
4. Click Elliptical from the

se
Fillet drop-down in the Sketching
group.
U
5. Click the vertical and horizontal
sketched entities at the locations
al

shown to create the elliptical

fillet.
rn

6. Click Vertical from the

te

Constrain group and select the

vertical minor axis.
In

7. Click Normal .
• Select the fillet and then
C

middle-click. Select Major

PT

Axis and click Accept. Type

0.47 as the value and press
ENTER.
r

• Select the fillet again and then

Fo

middle-click. Select Minor

Axis and click Accept. Type
0.25 as the value and press
ENTER.

8. Click Elliptical .
9. Click the vertical and horizontal
sketched entities at the locations
shown to create the elliptical
fillet.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 9

 10. Click Normal .
• Select the major axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 0.42 as the
value and press ENTER.
• Select the minor axis and
middle-click to place the
dimension. Type 0.80 as the
value and press ENTER.

y
11. Click Elliptical .

nl
12. Click the vertical and horizontal

O
sketched entities at the locations
shown to create the elliptical
fillet.
13. Click Vertical and select the
vertical minor axis. se
U
al

14. Click Normal .

rn

• Select the right fillet endpoint

and left vertical line.
te

• Middle-click to place the

horizontal dimension and type
In

1 as the value.
• Select the left fillet endpoint
C

and bottom horizontal line.

• Middle-click to place the
PT

vertical dimension and type

0.25 as the value.
r

15. Further constrain and dimension

Fo

the sketch as shown.

16. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or
more points.
• Minimum two points required.
• Can have any number of
intermediate points.
• Dimensioning schemes include:
– Dimensioning and constraining
spline points
– Tangency Angle

y
– Radius-of-Curvature

nl
O
Figure 1 – Dimensioning a Spline

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Dimensioning Points Figure 3 – Dimensioning Radii

Tangency Angle of Curvature
C
PT

Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or more points. A
spline can also have any number of intermediate points. Each time you click
r

the mouse, you create an additional point through which the spline passes.
Fo

Note that a spline passing through only two points initially forms a straight line.

Dimensioning Splines
You can dimension the endpoints of a spline, and you can also dimension
any of the intermediate points if desired. You do not have to dimension any
points of a spline if both endpoints snap to Sketcher references.
There are special dimensioning schemes for splines:
• Tangency Angle Dimensions – You can create tangency angle dimensions
for endpoints and intermediate points of a spline. Changing the angle
value alters the shape of the spline. To create this dimension, select the
spline, the spline endpoint, and a reference for tangency, then middle-click
to place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement
location dictates the “quadrant” for angle dimension measurement. In

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 11

 Figure 2, the spline endpoints and one intermediate point are dimensioned
with tangency angles.
• Radius-of-Curvature Dimensions – After a Tangency Angle dimension
is created for a spline endpoint, you can create a Radius of Curvature
dimension for that endpoint. The Radius of Curvature dimension can be
used to control the radius of curvature at the endpoint of a spline; changing
its value changes the shape of the spline near the endpoint. Controlling
the Radius of Curvature dimension is useful in cases where a spline meets
up with other geometry (an arc for example), and a curvature continuity
is desired. To create this dimension, select the spline endpoint, then
middle-click to place the dimension. The dimension appears similar to a
radius dimension. In Figure 3, the spline endpoints are dimensioned for
radius of curvature.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Sketching Splines

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Splines [Link]

Task 1: Sketch a spline.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Start the Sketch from the

nl
Datum group.
3. Select datum plane FRONT as

O
the Sketch Plane.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch

se
dialog box.
4. Enable only the following
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al
rn

5. Click Spline from the

Sketching group.
te

6. Click the vertical and horizontal

reference intersection as the
In

spline starting point.

7. Click four more times to create
C

additional points through which

the spline must pass. The first,
PT

third, and fifth points should all

be on the horizontal reference.
8. Middle-click to stop creating
r

points and complete the spline.

Fo

9. Click One-by-One and edit

the two dimensions to 5 and 12,
respectively.
10. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 13

Task 2: Edit the spline definition and dimension an intermediate point.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

2. Click Normal and dimension
the lowest intermediate point to
the horizontal reference. Type
2.65 as the value and press
ENTER.
3. Click One-by-One and edit
the weak, horizontal dimension
to 9.30.

y
nl
4. Click OK .

O
Task 3: Edit the spline definition and dimension tangency angles and

se
radii of curvature.
U
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
2. Click Normal .
al

• Click the spline, the left

endpoint, and the horizontal
rn

reference, and middle-click

to place the tangency angle
te

dimension.
• Type 65 and press ENTER.
In

• Click the spline, right endpoint,

and horizontal reference,
C

then middle-click to place the

dimension.
PT

• Type 90 and press ENTER.

When placing a tangency
r

angle dimension on a
Fo

spline, you must select the

spline body, a spline control
point, and a reference entity
to create the dimension.
However, it does not matter
in which order you make
the dimension reference
selections.

Module 4 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 3. Click the left endpoint, then
middle-click to place the radius
of curvature dimension.
• Type 7.5 and press ENTER.
• Click the right endpoint, then
middle-click to place the
dimension.
• Type 4.5 and press ENTER.
4. Click OK .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 15

Modifying Splines — Basic Operations
There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a
spline in Sketcher.
• Moving points.
• Spline Edit mode:
– Move individual points
– Move a range of points
– Specify X-Y coordinate
location

y
– Add points

nl
– Delete points Figure 1 – Moving a Point
– Extend spline

O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Deleting a Point

te

Modifying Splines — Basic Operations

In

There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a spline in

Sketcher. You can select individual points that comprise the spline and drag
C

them to new locations to change the shape of the spline, as shown in Figure 1.
PT

You can also perform further basic operations within Spline Edit mode. To
access Spline Edit mode, you have two options: you can either double-click
the spline in the graphics window, or you can select it, then right-click and
r

select Modify. Upon accessing Spline Edit mode, the dashboard appears.
Fo

You must be in Spline Edit mode to perform the following basic spline
operations:
• Moving Points – You can move points using the following methods:
– You can select individual points and drag them to new locations to
change the shape of the spline.
– You can also select multiple points to move simultaneously. To do this,
you select a range of points to move by pressing SHIFT and selecting
two points to limit the range. For example, to move points 2, 3, and 4
in a spline that has 5 points you press SHIFT, select points 1 and 5,
then drag points 2-3-4 together. Note that the range of points cannot
contain constrained points.
– You can move points to precise locations by selecting a point and then
using the Point tab in the dashboard. In the Point tab, you can specify
a reference as the sketch origin or a selected sketched coordinate

Module 4 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 system. Once the coordinate value's reference is selected, you can
specify precise X-Y location values. If the spline is placed in an internal
sketch for a sweep feature, and the spline is dimensioned to a Local
coordinate system, then you can edit the X, Y, and Z-coordinates to
create a 3-D spline.
• Adding and Deleting Points – You can add intermediate points to a spline
by right-clicking the spline and selecting Add Point, as shown in the
lower-right figure. You must right-click over the spline for this menu to
appear. You can delete intermediate points from a spline by right-clicking
the point you wish to delete and selecting Delete Point, as shown in Figure
2. You must right-click the top of the point for this menu option to appear.
• Extending the spline – You can also extend a spline by pressing CTRL+ALT
and clicking beyond a spline endpoint. This can only be done on an

y
endpoint without tangency or constraints defined.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines — Basic Operations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Splines_Modify MOD_SPLINE_BASIC.PRT

Task 1: Move the points of a spline.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 3.
3. Enable only the following

y
nl
Sketcher Display types: .
4. Notice that the spline contains

O
five points.

se
5. Click the point second from the
left and drag it upward.
U
6. Click the point third from the left
and drag it to the left.
al

7. Click the point fourth from the left

and drag it downwards and to
rn

the left.
te

Task 2: Access Spline Edit mode, add three points, and move points as a
range.
In

1. Double-click the spline to access

C

Edit mode.
PT

2. Right-click the spline below the

horizontal reference and select
Add Point.
r

3. Add two more points to the spline

Fo

below the horizontal reference.

4. Select the point fourth from the

left.
5. Press SHIFT and select the point
seventh from the left.
6. Select the point fifth from the left
and drag it downward. Notice
that points five and six move
together as a range.

Module 4 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Edit the X-Y coordinate values of a point to specific values and
delete a point.

1. In the Spline ribbon, select the

Point tab.
2. Select the point above the
horizontal reference. Notice that
the Point tab displays the X and
Y coordinate values of this point.
• Edit the X and Y coordinate
values to 4 and 3, respectively.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

3. Select the point sixth from the

In

left, then right-click and select

Delete Point.
C
r PT
Fo

4. In the dashboard, click Complete

Spline .
5. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 19

Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations
There are a number of advanced operations you can perform
on a spline in Sketcher.

Edit Spline mode enables you to

perform advanced operations:
• Fit Type
– Sparse
– Smooth
• Spline Curvature

y
– Scale

nl
– Density

O
• Interpolation versus Control Points
• Control Polygon mode Figure 1 – Using the Smooth

se
Fit Type
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Viewing Curvature Analysis

te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Interpolation versus

Control Points
r
Fo

Modifying Splines — Advanced Operations

There are a number of advanced operations you can perform on a spline
in Sketcher. These operations are performed within Spline Edit mode.
To access Spline Edit mode, you can either double-click the spline in the
graphics window, or select it, then right-click and select Modify.

Using Fit Type

Fit type enables you to remove redundant data in the spline. You can use
either of the following methods:
• Sparse – Using the Sparse option, you can evenly decrease the number of
points on a spline. To use this option, you specify a sparsity deviation value.
• Smooth – Using the Smooth option, you can alter the shape of the spline
to make it flow more smoothly. To use this option, you specify a quantity of

Module 4 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 spline points the system can use for averaging. In Figure 1, the Smooth
option was used to smooth the spline.

Displaying Spline Curvature

You can click Curvature Analysis in the Spline ribbon to display the
spline curvature. The spline curvature is a porcupine-style spline curvature
plot. The length of the spikes are proportional to the amount of curvature at
that location along the spline. The curvature plot can be displayed while
dynamically dragging spline points, and you can adjust the scale and density
of the curvature plot as desired. Scale increases or decreases the length of
all spikes, and density increases or decreases the quantity of spikes in the

y
plot. The spline curvature is displayed in Figure 2.

nl
O
Interpolation Points Versus Control Points
By default, the system uses interpolation points to control the shape of the

se
spline. If desired, however, you can switch to viewing control points instead
by clicking Control Points in the Spline ribbon, as shown in the top
U
image of Figure 3. When you have toggled to control points, you can then
drag the spline points by the control points, as shown in the bottom image
al

of Figure 3. You can add or delete control points to control the shape of the
spline. You cannot, however, dimension to the control points unless you
rn

switch to Control Polygon mode.

te

Control Polygon Mode

In

You can switch to Control Polygon mode to dimension to the control points
instead of the interpolation points. To access Control Polygon mode,
C

click Control Polygon in the Spline ribbon. You can also move the
PT

interpolation points by dragging the control points. Plus, you can add or
delete control points to control the shape of the spline.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines — Advanced
Operations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Splines_Modify-Advanced MOD_SPLINE_ADV.PRT

Task 1: Display the spline's curvature and adjust the fit type.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

nl
3. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types: .

O
4. Double-click the spline to access
Edit mode.

5. Click Curvature Analysis in se

U
the dashboard.
al

• Drag the Scale slider to the

right to increase the scale.
rn

• Drag the Density slider to the

right to increase the density.
te

• Drag one point upward to

simulate a “non-ideal” spline.
In

Notice that the curvature

becomes erratic.
C

6. In the dashboard, select the Fit

PT

tab.
• Select the Smooth Fit type.
• Edit the number of Odd Points
r

to 5.
Fo

• Edit the number of Odd Points

to 3. Click Yes, if necessary.

7. In the Fit tab, select the Sparse

Fit type.
• Edit the Deviation to 0.01.
• Close the Fit tab.
8. Click Curvature Analysis .

Module 4 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Edit the spline control point locations.

1. In the dashboard, toggle the

spline modification to Control
Points .
• Drag the point second from
the right upward to the height
of the point third from the right.

2. Click Display Dimensions

y
from the Graphics toolbar.
Notice the single dimension.

nl
O
3. Click Control Polygon to
access Control Polygon mode.

se
4. Drag the control points to
approximate a dome shape. U
5. In the Sketch tab, click Normal
as if to create a dimension.
al

6. Notice that the polygon control

rn

points are dimensioned rather

than the spline.
te

7. Click OK .
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 23

Importing and Exporting Spline Points
You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each
point along a spline.

• Requirements:
– Sketched Coordinate System
– Specify Coordinate System
Type
♦ Cartesian
♦ Polar

y
• Coordinate File options:

nl
– Open a .pts text file.

O
– Save current coordinate data to
a file.

se
– Display current coordinate data. U
Figure 1 – Importing Point
al

Coordinate File
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Viewing Spline

Point Coordinates
r
Fo

Importing and Exporting Spline Points

You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each point along
a spline. You must first select a sketched Coordinate System. You can then
specify the type of Coordinate System selected, whether Cartesian (X, Y, Z)
or Polar (R, Theta, Z).

Once the coordinate system is selected, you have three options available:

• Open a text file (with a *.pts extension) of coordinate data by selecting

Open Coordinates from the File tab.
• Save the current coordinate data to a file by selecting Save Coordinates
from the File tab.

Module 4 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 • Display the current coordinate data by selecting Coordinate Info from
the File tab.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Importing and Exporting Spline Points

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Spline_Points SPLINE_PTS.PRT

Task 1: Create a spline and import a file of point coordinates.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
3. Enable only the following

y
nl
Sketcher Display types: .
4. Click Spline and sketch a

O
spline with 5 points. The spline
endpoints should snap to the line

se
endpoints.
5. The third spline point should lie
U
on the horizontal line.
al

6. Click Coordinate System

rn

from the Datum group in the

Sketch ribbon.
te

7. Click the left line endpoint to

place the coordinate system.
In

8. Middle-click to stop sketching

coordinate systems.
C

9. Double-click the spline to access

PT

Edit mode.
10. In the dashboard, select the File
tab.
r

• Select the coordinate system.

Fo

• Click Coordinate Info to

view the current spline point
locations.
• You could save this information
to a text file.
• Click Close.

Module 4 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 11. In the File tab of the dashboard,
click Open Coordinates .
12. In the Modify Spline dialog box,
click Yes to delete the strong
dimensions.
13. In the Open dialog box, click
SPLINE_DATA.PTS and click
Open.
14. Click Yes in the Confirmation
dialog box.

y
nl
15. In the dashboard, click
Coordinate Info to view

O
the current spline point locations.
• Click Close.
16. In the dashboard, click Complete
Spline . se
U
17. Click OK .
al
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 27

Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and
hyperbolic using conic arcs.

• The type of conic created depends

upon the value of RHO.
• Dimensioning Conic Sections
– Conic endpoints
– Using RHO parameter
♦ RHO = A/(A+B), where C=D

y
– Using three points

nl
– Tangency angle dimensions

O
Figure 1 – Understanding the

se RHO Parameter
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Creating a Conic Figure 3 – Creating a Conic

using RHO using Three Points
C
PT

Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic
using Conic arcs. To create a conic arc, select the endpoint locations and
r

then select an apex or shoulder location. A centerline is automatically created

Fo

connecting the endpoints of the conic.

Dimensioning Conic Endpoints

You can dimension the ends of the conic using dimensions or constraints.
You then further dimension conic sections by using the RHO parameter, by
using three points, or through tangency angle dimensions.

Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic, as shown in
the lower-left figure. This is a dimension that appears on the conic similar
to a radius dimension. As shown in Figure 1, the RHO value is the ratio of
length A to A+B (that is, A/(A+B)), where C=D. RHO can vary from 0.05 to

Module 4 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 0.95. Higher RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO
values create a more flat conic shape.
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
• 0.5 = Parabolic
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse

Using Three Points

y
Instead of using a RHO parameter, you can locate a Sketcher point at the

nl
apex of the conic to control the conic shape. The Sketcher point can then
be dimensioned or constrained accordingly. In Figure 3, the conic is created

O
using three points. Notice that a RHO parameter is not present.

Using Tangency Angle Dimensions

se
U
You can create tangency angle dimensions for endpoints of a conic. Changing
the angle value alters the shape of the conic. To create this dimension, select
the conic, the conic endpoint, a reference for tangency, and middle-click to
al

place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement location
rn

dictates the “quadrant” for angle dimension measurement. In Figures 2 and

3, the endpoints have tangency angle dimensions defined.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Sketching Conics

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Conic [Link]

Task 1: Sketch a conic and dimension it with a RHO parameter.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the Sketch from the feature toolbar.

y
3. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Plane.

nl
• Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

O
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

se
5. Select Conic from the Arc
types drop-down menu in the
U
Sketching group.
• Click the origin of the vertical
al

and horizontal references as

the left endpoint.
rn

• Click the horizontal reference

to the right of the vertical
te

reference as the right endpoint.

• Move the cursor upward and
In

click to complete the conic.

C

6. Click Normal .
PT

• Click the conic, the left

endpoint, and the horizontal
reference, and middle-click
to place the tangency angle
r

dimension.
Fo

• Type 70 and press ENTER.

• Click the conic, right endpoint,
and horizontal reference,
then middle-click to place the
dimension.
• Type 50 and press ENTER.

Module 4 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 7. Click One-by-One and edit
the width dimension to 10. If the
RHO dimension is already 0.5,
select it, right-click, and select
Strong, and press ENTER.
8. Click OK from the Sketch tab.
9. In the model tree, right-click
Sketch 1 and select Hide.

Task 2: Sketch a conic and dimension it using three points.

y
nl
1. Start the Sketch .

O
• Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.

2. Click Conic .
• Click the origin of the vertical se
U
and horizontal references as
the left endpoint.
al

• Click the horizontal reference

to the right of the vertical
rn

reference as the right endpoint.

• Move the cursor upward and
te

click to complete the conic.

In

3. Click Point from the

C

Sketching group.
4. Click the conic near the apex to
PT

create the point.

r
Fo

5. Click Normal and create the

two tangency angles, editing the
left and right values to 70 and
50, respectively.
6. Notice that the point is
constrained to the conic and is
linearly dimensioned.
7. Notice that there is no RHO
dimension.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 31

 8. Click One-by-One and edit the
remaining dimensions as shown,
starting with the width dimension.
9. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 Sketching Text
You can add text as a sketched entity.
• Creating Text
– Specify manually
– Using existing parameters
• Placing Text
– Define start and end point
• Modifying Text
– Fonts Figure 1 – Sketching Text

y
– Horizontal and Vertical Position

nl
– Aspect ratio

O
– Slant angle
– Place along curve

se
– Kerning
• Open-Type Fonts
U
– Multi-Language Support
Figure 2 – Modifying Text Attributes
– Expanded Character Set
al

– Advanced Control
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Placing Text Along

a Curve
PT

Creating Sketched Text

r
Fo

You can add text in a sketch when creating extruded protrusions and cuts,
trimming surfaces, and creating cosmetic features. The sketched text can
be used by almost any solid or surface feature, as long as the rules for open
and closed sketches are followed.
You can either manually type the value for the text, or use existing parameters
in the design model. The system displays the value of the parameters as the
text value. You can also include text symbols, such as degree (°), plus or
minus (±), and omega (Ω).

Placing Sketched Text

To add text, you must define a start point and an end point. The system
creates a construction line between the start point and end point. The

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 33

length of this line determines the height of the text, while the angle of the
line determines the text orientation.
To help you visualize the direction and the orientation of the text, a small
triangle symbol is presented at the text start position point.
You can select the start point of the construction line at the beginning of the
text flow, and drag it to increase or decrease the height of the text. You can
also select the end point of the construction line and drag it to change the
text orientation.

The construction line length is determined by a dimension, which

you can modify to change the overall text height.

y
nl
Modifying Sketched Text

O
You can perform the following types of modifications to sketched text entities:

se
• Fonts – To modify the font of sketched text entities, select from a list
of standard fonts, such as cal_alf, cal_grek, filled, font, font3d, isofont,
U
leroy, norm_font. Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire enables you to read and place
Open-Type Font (OTF) characters into Sketcher.
al

• Horizontal and Vertical Position – You can modify the justification values
for the horizontal and vertical positions of the text, which updates the text
rn

justification around the text start position point. You can constrain the
vertical position of the text to Top, Middle, or Bottom. You can constrain
te

the horizontal position of the text to Left, Center, or Right. The default
dimensioning scheme for the text is consistent, regardless of its orientation.
In

The resulting text boundary box is tight against the text, providing additional
control on its exact position in Sketcher.
C

• Aspect ratio – Using this option, you can modify the aspect ratio factor of
the text without changing its height or orientation.
PT

• Slant angle – You can modify the slant angle of the text using this option.
The Slant angle option affects how the text is angled, with respect to the
sides of the rectangle in which it is contained.
r
Fo

• Place along curve – Using this option you can place text along a curve.
First, select the arc or circle on which you wish to place the text. Then,
select the direction in which you want the text to flow. You can always flip
the direction of the text flow. You can also control the justification of text
along a curve by using the horizontal and vertical position options. If you
change the horizontal position, the text moves along the curve, either to the
right or left side of the defined curve.
• Kerning – Enables font kerning for the text string. This controls the space
between certain pairs of characters, improving the appearance of the text
string. For example, in some font types an “i” and an “m” are allotted
the same amount of space. Kerning provides proportionate spacing for
narrow and wide letters. Kerning is a characteristic of the particular font.
Alternatively, set the sketcher_default_font_kerning configuration option to
automatically enable kerning for all the new text strings that you create.

Module 4 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Open-Type Fonts
OTF is becoming a global font standard, with added capabilities for advanced
typography. The font is based on Unicode, which enables the framework
for multi-language support. Open-Type Fonts offer an expanded character
set and layout features to provide better linguistic support and advanced
typographic control. This enables you to read and place these custom fonts,
including symbols and logos that have been mapped, to specific functional
keys. In addition, you can select a custom font and place it, while still
maintaining proportions and ratios.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Sketching Text

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Text [Link]

Task 1: Sketch text on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of feature TEXT_SKETCH.

y
3. Click No Hidden .

nl
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

O
5. Click Text from the Sketching
group.
6. Click at the center of the model
and drag a line upwards to se
U
approximately 75% of the total
model height. Click again to
al

create the overall text height.

rn

7. Move the Text dialog box to the

right.
te

8. In the Text dialog box, type 123

In

as the text. Notice that it moves

to the right.
• Edit the Horizontal Position to
C

Center.
PT

• Edit the Vertical Position to

Middle.
• Click Text Symbol and click
r

the ° (degree) symbol.

Fo

• Click Close in the Text Symbol

dialog box.

9. In the Text dialog box, edit the

Aspect ratio to 1.5.
• Edit the Slant angle to 15.

Module 4 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 10. In the Text dialog box, select the
Place along curve check box.
• Select the arc.
• Edit the Vertical Position to
Bottom.

11. In the Text dialog box, select Use

parameter.

y
12. In the Select Parameter dialog

nl
box, select parameter VENDOR.
• Click Insert Selected.

O
• Notice that the numbers are
replaced by the parameter

se
value text.
13. Click OK in the Text dialog box.
U
14. Click One-by-One .
al

15. Select the arc, then right-click

rn

and select Construction.

16. Click OK .
te
In
C

17. Click Shading .

PT

18. Click Parameters from the

Tools tab.
19. In the Parameters dialog box,
r

edit the VENDOR parameter

Fo

Value to PTC.
• Click OK.

20. Click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 37

Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options
Existing geometry and/or dimensions can be converted into
different formats in Sketcher without having to be re-created.
• The following conversions
can be performed:
– Strong
– Spline
– Reference
– Perimeter

y
– Tapered

nl
– Arc Length/Arc Angle
– Radius/Diameter/Linear

O
Figure 1 – Converting to a Reference
Dimension

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Converting an Offset Line

In

Figure 2 – Converting to a to a Tapered Line

Perimeter Dimension
C

Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

PT

Existing geometry or dimensions can be converted into different formats

in Sketcher without having to be re-created. Conversions are handled by
r

selecting the item to be converted, then selecting Operations > Convert To

Fo

from the main menu and selecting the desired conversion type. In many
cases, you can also select the item, then right-click and select the desired
conversion type. The following types of conversions can be performed:
• Strong – Enables you to convert a weak (gray) dimension to strong. You
can also select the weak dimension, then right-click and select Strong.
• Spline – Enables you to select a chain of lines and arcs, and convert them
to a spline that closely approximates the selected chain. After conversion,
you can delete the old entities to view or manipulate the spline.
• Reference – Enables you to select an existing dimension and convert
it to a reference dimension. You can convert any dimension type
including linear, angular, and radial dimensions. You can also select the
dimension, right-click, and select Reference. Reference dimensions track
with geometry, but you cannot edit their value. Reference dimensions
do not factor into a sketch's regeneration, so they cannot cause

Module 4 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 over-dimensioning. Also, you can display reference dimensions on a 2-D
drawing. You can always convert a reference dimension back to a strong
dimension.
• Perimeter – Enables you to convert existing dimensions into a perimeter
dimension. To create a perimeter dimension, you select all dimensions
to be converted and the geometry that is to be included in the perimeter
measurement. You must then specify the dimension to be varied. This
dimension is driven by the perimeter dimension. That is, as the perimeter
value is updated, the sketch geometry updates by varying the dimension
specified. You can also click Perimeter from the Dimension group in
the Sketch tab.
• Tapered – Enables you to select a single offset edge and taper it. The

y
system achieves this by creating a second dimension for the offset edge.

nl
You can then edit either dimension to create the taper. Note that you can
only taper single offset edges and not loops.

O
• Arc Length/Arc Angle – Enables you to convert an arc angle dimension
to an arc length dimension, or an arc length dimension to an arc angle

se
dimension.
• Radius/Diameter/Linear – Enables you to convert a radius, diameter, or
U
linear dimension to either of the other dimension types.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 39

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Convert [Link]

Task 1: Convert a radius to a diameter and an arc angle to an arc length.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
3. Enable only the following

y
Sketcher Display types:

nl
.

O
4. Select the 5 radius dimension,
then right-click and select

se
Convert to Diameter.
5. Select the 100 dimension, then
U
right-click and select Convert to
Length.
al

6. Click OK .
rn

Task 2: Convert a normal dimension to a reference dimension.

te

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.

In

2. Click No Hidden .
3. Select the 8.38 dimension, then
C

right-click and select Reference.

PT

4. Notice the angle dimension is

created because the reference
dimension is no longer factored
into the sketch's regeneration.
r
Fo

5. Click Perpendicular from the

Constrain group and select the
two angled lines.
• Notice the angle dimension is
removed and the reference
dimension value has adjusted
to match the new geometry.
• Middle-click to stop
constraining entities.

Module 4 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 Task 3: Convert an existing dimension to a perimeter dimension.

1. Select the five lines in the sketch

and click Perimeter from the
Dimension group.
2. Read the message area prompt
and select the 6.00 dimension as
the dimension to vary.
3. Edit the perimeter value to 40.
4. Notice the variable dimension

y
adjusts to compensate for the

nl
new perimeter.

O
Task 4:
se
Convert a vertical line to a tapered line.
U
1. Click Offset .
al

2. Select the right, vertical edge of

rn

the protrusion.
• Type 4 as the offset and press
te

ENTER.
• Click Close.
In

3. Click Line Chain and sketch

two horizontal lines.
C
r PT
Fo

4. Click One-by-One .
5. Select the vertical offset line.
6. Click Operations > Convert To
> Tapered.
7. Notice the extra dimension that
is created.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 41

 8. Edit the top 4 dimension to 2.
9. Click OK .
10. Click Shading .

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 Locking Sketcher Entities
You lock Sketcher dimensions and/or geometry to prevent
accidental modifications.

• Locking Geometry
– Cyan lock icon
– Geometry cannot be dragged
– Will update to other edits
• Locking Dimensions

y
– Red color

nl
– Dimension cannot be dragged
– Value can be edited

O
se
Figure 1 – No Entities Locked
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Geometry Lines Locked Figure 3 – Dimensions Locked

PT

Locking Sketcher Entities

r

In a sketch, you can lock either geometry or dimensions to help preserve

Fo

your design intent. By locking an entity, you prevent accidental modifications

from dragging to an undesired value. However, you can still make changes to
locked geometry or dimensions by editing the dimension value.
Keep in mind the following when locking Sketcher entities:
• For geometry, a cyan lock symbol is shown when you highlight an entity
or Show entity locks.
• For dimensions, the whole dimension displays in red.
• The locked status of an entity is preserved when you complete and
redefine a sketch.
• The locked status of an entity is preserved when using dynamic edit to drag
a section from Part mode.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 43

Locking Sketcher Geometry
To lock sketcher geometry, select the geometry item (for example, a line
or arc) you want to lock and then either right-click and select Lock, or
selectToggle Lock from Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock
the selected geometry, select Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down
menu in the ribbon, or right-click and select Unlock.
You can toggle the display of the lock icons by right-clicking, with nothing
selected in the sketch, and selecting Show entity locks or Hide entity locks
from the right-click pop-up menu.

Locking Sketcher Dimensions

y
nl
To lock dimensions, select the dimension or dimensions you want to lock
and then either right-click and select Lock, or select Toggle Lock from the

O
Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock the selected dimension,
click Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon, or
right-click and select Unlock.

se
In addition, the Autolock option enables you to automatically lock
U
user-defined dimensions. You can specify whether you want to automatically
lock the dimension that you create or modify by setting the value of the
sketcher_dimension_autolock configuration option to yes. Alternatively,
al

you can click File > Options > Sketcher and select the Lock User Defined
rn

Dimensions option in the Miscellaneous tab of the Sketcher Preferences

dialog box. After you specify that the user-defined dimensions are to be
locked, all dimensions that you subsequently create or modify automatically
te

appear locked. The locked state of the user-defined dimension is maintained

when you quit or reenter Sketcher mode. The state of the dimensions that
In

are created before you specify to automatically lock the dimensions, do not
change.
C

The locked state of a dimension is not retained if the dimension is

PT

referenced in a relation; the relation takes priority over the locked

status of the dimension.
r
Fo

Module 4 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options
In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types
of dimensions within Sketcher and perform operations on
dimensions.

• Dimension options include:

– Creating Reference
Dimensions
♦ Driven dimension
♦ Track with geometry

y
♦ Not editable

nl
♦ REFsuffix

O
– Creating Baseline
Dimensions

se
♦ Creates ordinate Figure 1 – Creating a Reference
dimension scheme U Dimension
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Creating a Baseline

Dimension and Ordinate Dimensions
r
Fo

Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types of dimensions
within Sketcher. You can also perform various operations on dimensions
within Sketcher.

Creating Reference Dimensions

A Reference dimension is a driven dimension that is created within Sketcher.
Reference dimensions track with geometry, but you cannot edit their value.
Reference dimensions are denoted within Sketcher with the suffix REF.
You can create a Reference dimension for linear, angular, and radial
dimensions. Reference dimensions do not factor into a sketch's regeneration,
so they cannot cause over-dimensioning. Also, you can display Reference

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 45

dimensions on a 2-D drawing. A Reference dimension has been created in
Figure 1. You can click the Reference icon from the Dimension group.

Creating Ordinate Dimensions using a Baseline Dimension

A baseline dimension creates an ordinate dimension scheme. When you
place the baseline dimension, switch to normal dimensioning, and dimension
the baseline to a reference; the resulting dimension is ordinate. In Figure
2, the baseline dimension is the 0.00 dimension, and the 5.00 and 15.00
dimensions were dimensioned to the baseline dimension, which resulted in
an ordinate scheme. You click the Baseline from the Dimension group to

y
create the ordinate scheme.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Dimensions_Options [Link]

Task 1: Create a reference dimension and resolve a Sketcher conflict.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.

y
3. Click No Hidden .

nl
4. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:

O
.
5. Click Reference from the
Sketcher toolbar.
6. Select the upper-right angled se
U
line and middle-click to place the
dimension.
al
rn

7. Click Normal and dimension

the adjacent angled line.
te

8. Notice the over-dimensioned

condition.
In

9. In the Resolve Sketch dialog

box, click Dim > Ref to resolve
C

the conflict.
PT

Task 2: Lock dimensions to restrict the sketch.

r

1. Click One-by-One .
Fo

2. Click the lower-right corner of the

sketch and drag it in a circular
motion.
3. Notice that the whole sketch
moves.
4. Click Undo .
5. Press CTRL and select the 4.00
and 5.00 dimensions.
• Right-click and select Lock.
• Notice the red color.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 47

 6. Click the lower-right corner of the sketch and drag it in a circular
motion.
7. Notice the sketch motion is restricted.
8. Click Undo .

9. Select the bottom sketched

entity, then right-click and select
Lock.
10. Cursor over the entity and notice
the lock.

y
11. Click the lower-right corner of the

nl
sketch and drag it.
12. Notice the sketch motion is fully

O
restricted.

se
Task 3: Create ordinate dimensions. U
1. Click Baseline from the
Dimension group.
al

2. Select the left vertical sketch line

rn

and middle-click above it to place

the baseline dimension.
te
In
C
PT

3. Right-click and select

Dimension.
• Select the 0.00 baseline
r

dimension.
Fo

• Select the first peak and

middle-click above it to place
the dimension.
• Select the perpendicular
(orthogonal) constraint below
the first peak.
• Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box and press
ENTER.

Module 4 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 4. In the graphics window, select
the 0.00 baseline dimension.
• Select the second peak and
middle-click above it to place
the dimension.
• Select the perpendicular
(orthogonal) constraint below
the second peak.
• Click Delete and press
ENTER.

y
5. Click OK .

nl
6. Click Shading .

O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 49

Sketcher Diagnostic Tools
Sketcher diagnostic tools enable you to analyze common
sketching problems.

Sketcher Diagnostic Capabilities

• Shade closed loops.
• Highlight overlapping geometry.
• Highlight open ends.
• Feature requirements check.

y
Figure 1 – Shade Closed Lopes

nl
O
se
U
al

Figure 2 – Highlight
Overlapping Geometry
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Highlight Open Ends

Figure 4 – Feature
Requirements Check
r
Fo

Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Four diagnostic tools have been added to Sketcher to help find, analyze, and
solve common sketching problems. The following icon tools are available
from the main toolbar in Sketcher:

• Shade Closed Loops – The area inside entities that form a closed
loop is shaded. The default shading color is a pale yellow.
– The icon for this option stays depressed, enabling you to sketch and
manipulate the sketch to view the shading appear and disappear.

• Overlapping Geometry – Sketched geometry that is overlapping is

highlighted in magenta. This includes sketched geometry that crosses
other geometry, or lies directly on other geometry.

Module 4 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 – The icon for this option does not remain depressed, meaning the
highlighting appears until the sketch view is changed or repainted, and
then you can click the icon again.

• Highlight Open Ends – The endpoints of entities that are not common
to more than one entity are highlighted. For example, any open ends of
the sketch are highlighted. The highlight appears as a large red dot on the
open endpoints in question.
– The icon for this option stays depressed, enabling you to sketch and
manipulate the sketch to view the open ends highlighting appear and
disappear.

• Feature Requirements – Provides a report indicating whether the

y
sketch meets the requirements for the feature being created. This option is

nl
available in 3-D (Part mode) Sketcher only. Although this option works for
an external or internal sketch, to get the full benefit from the tool you should

O
be in an internal sketch. This ensures that the tool can compare the sketch
geometry with the specific requirements for that feature. For example, the
following features each have different sketch requirements:

se
– Solid Extrude – Must form a closed loop by itself or against adjacent
geometry.
U
– Solid Revolve – Sketched geometry must be on one side of the
centerline.
al

– Rib – Must have an open sketch.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 51

PROCEDURE - Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Diagnostics [Link]

Task 1: Utilize the diagnostic tools on a sketch with issues.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Start the Extrude .

y
• Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.

nl
• Select the front model surface.
• Click Sketch.

O
• Click No Hidden .

se
• Click Sketch View .
• Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
U
al

3. Click Palette .
• Double-click the diagnostic
rn

sketch.
–
te

If you do not see

In

the diagnostic
sketch, make
sure to set the
C

Working Directory
PT

to Sketcher\
Diagnostics
folder.
r

• Place the sketch anywhere on

Fo

the model.
• Click Close from the Sketcher
palette.
• Edit the Scale to 1.0 and press
ENTER.
• Drag the sketch to snap to the
centerlines.
• Click Accept Changes .

Module 4 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 4. Click OK .
• Notice the two warnings in the
message window.
• Click No.
5. Click Feature Requirements
.
• Notice the various warnings.
• Click Close.
6. Notice that the sketch is not

y
shaded, indicating that the

nl
section is open.
• Closed sections should be

O
shaded when Shade Closed
Loops is enabled in the

se
Inspect group. U
7. Click Overlapping Geometry
.
al

• Zoom in on the green

rn

highlighted lines.

8. Click Corner and trim the

te

lines.
In

• Click Refit .
C
r PT

9. Verify that Highlight Open Ends

Fo

is enabled in the Inspect

group.
• Zoom in on the two green dots.

10. Click Corner and trim the

lines.
• Click Refit .
• Notice that the closed sketch
is now shaded.

© 2011 PTC Module 4 | Page 53

 11. Click Feature Requirements
.
• Notice that the sketch has
no warnings and the section
is now shaded, indicating a
closed section.
• Click Close.
• Click OK .

y
nl
O
12. Click Shading .
13. Right-click and select Remove
Material. se
U
• Right-click the depth handle
and select To Selected.
al

• Select the rectangular surface

rn

of Extrude 2.
14. Click Complete Feature .
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 Module 5

y
Basic Surfacing Tools

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Once you have learned how to create datum curves and advanced sketched
geometry, you can utilize them to create surface features. Basic surface
feature creation is similar to solids when using the Extrude and Revolve
U
dashboards. However, you can also create surfaces using the sweep, blend,
and fill tools.
al

In this module, you will learn how to create surfaces using the Extrude,
rn

Revolve, and Fill tools. You will also learn how to create surfaces using
Sweep, as well as Parallel, Rotational, and General Blends.
te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Create Extrude, Revolve, and Fill surfaces.
C

• Create sweep surfaces with open and closed trajectories.

PT

• Create parallel blend surfaces and analyze their attributes.

• Analyze parallel blend surface section tools.
• Create rotational and general blend surfaces and analyze their attributes.
r
Fo

• Define rotational and general blend surface tangency.

• Select sections for rotational and general blends.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 1

Creating Surface Extrude Features
Create extruded surface features from 2-D sketches.

• Extrude surfaces perpendicular

to the sketching plane.
• Extrude open section sketches.
• Extrude closed section sketches.
– Capped ends

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Extruded Open
Section Sketch

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Extruded Surface, Open Figure 3 – Extruded Surface, Capped

Ends, Closed Section Sketch Ends, Closed Section Sketch
r
Fo

Creating Surface Extrude Features

An extruded surface feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. It linearly
extrudes a sketch perpendicular to the sketching plane. You can either select
the sketch first and then start the Extrude tool, or you can start the Extrude
tool and then select the sketch.
You can extrude surfaces from either open section sketches, as shown in
Figure 1, or from closed section sketches, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure
[Link] extruding a surface from a closed section sketch, you have the option
of capping the ends of the extruded surface using the Capped ends option.
Although this result may appear solid, it actually creates end surfaces that
result in a closed-volume merged surface feature.

Module 5 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Surface Extrude Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Extrude\Surface EXTRUDE_SURFACES.PRT

Task 1: Extrude a surface from a closed section sketch.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, start the Extrude
from the Shapes Group.

y
nl
3. Select Sketch 1 from the model.
Notice this is a closed sketch.

O
se
U
4. In the dashboard, click Extrude
al

Surface .
• Click Change Depth
rn

Direction .
te

• Edit the depth to 300 and

press ENTER.
In

5. Click Preview Feature .

C
PT

6. Click Resume Feature .

7. In the dashboard, select the
r

Options tab.
Fo

• Select the Capped ends

check box.
8. Click Complete Feature from
the Extrude dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 3

Task 2: Extrude a surface from an open section sketch.

1. Select Sketch 2 from the model

tree. Notice this is an open
sketch.
2. Start the Extrude .
3. In the dashboard, notice Surface
is selected by default,
because this is an open sketch.

y
nl
O
4. Edit the depth to 200 and press
se
U
ENTER.
5. Click Complete Feature from
al

the Extrude dashboard.

rn
te
In
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 5 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Surface Revolve Features
Create revolved surface features from 2-D sketches.
• Revolve a section about an axis of
revolution in a sketching plane.
• Select different axes of revolution:
– First sketched Geometry Axis
– Existing Axis
– Existing Straight Curve or Edge
• Revolve open section sketches.

y
• Revolve closed section sketches.

nl
– Capped ends

O
Figure 1 – Viewing a 2-D Sketch

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Revolving a Closed

C

Figure 2 – Same Revolved Sketch Section Sketch, Open versus

using Different Axes of Revolution Capped Ends
PT

Creating Surface Revolve Features

r
Fo

A revolve surface feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. You can

use a revolve feature to revolve a sketch about an axis of revolution (in the
sketching plane) to create a surface. You can either select the sketch first
and start the Revolve tool, or you can start the Revolve tool and then select
the sketch.
By default, when you select a sketch to be revolved, the feature uses the first
geometry centerline sketched within the section as the axis of revolution,
as shown in the left image in Figure 2. However, you can also select any
other geometry axis in the sketch, or any straight curve/edge, datum axis,
or coordinate system axis as the axis of revolution. If the sketch you are
revolving does not contain a sketched geometry centerline, you need to
select one of these other references as the axis of revolution. In the right
image in Figure 2, the axis of revolution has been changed to the CTR datum
axis. There are two rules for defining the axis of revolution:
1. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 5

 2. The axis of revolution must lie in the sketching plane of the section.
You can revolve surfaces either from open section sketches, as shown in
Figure 2, or from closed section sketches, as shown in Figure 3. When
revolving a surface from a closed section sketch, you have the option of
capping the ends of the revolved surface using the Capped ends option,
as shown in Figure 3.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Surface Revolve Features
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Revolve\Surface
revolve_surface.prt

Task 1: Create revolved surface features using different axes of revolution.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Select CURVE_1. Notice the

nl
geometry axis created in the
sketch highlights with the sketch

O
feature.
3. In the ribbon, start the Revolve
from the Shapes group.
se
U
4. In the dashboard, notice Surface
is selected automatically due
al

to the open sketch.

rn

5. By default, the feature revolves

about the sketch's geometry
te

centerline.
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 7

 6. In the dashboard, edit the angle
from 360 to 90 degrees.
• Click Change Angle Side .
7. Click Preview Feature .

y
nl
8. Click Resume Feature .

O
9. In the dashboard, select the
Placement tab.

se
• Right-click and select Axis of
revolution Collector.
• Select datum axis CTR.
U
al
rn
te

10. Edit the angle back to 360.

11. Click Complete Feature from
In

the Revolve dashboard.

C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Fill Surfaces
You can fill a sketch to create a planar surface.

Sketch rules:
• Must use a sketched curve.
– Can be internal or external.
• Must be closed.
– Can have multiple loops.
• Can be any shape.

y
• Can reference other geometry.

nl
O
Figure 1 – Filling a Sketch

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Fill Surface Containing

PT

Multiple Loops

Creating Fill Surfaces

r
Fo

You can fill a sketch to create a planar surface. You can either select the
sketch first and then start the Fill tool, or you can start the Fill tool and then
select the sketch. If you select the sketch first and then start the Fill tool, the
feature is automatically completed.
The following are important points about the sketches used by the Fill tool:
• The sketch must be a sketched curve, and it can be either an internal or an
external sketch.
• The sketch must be closed. However, the sketch can contain multiple loops.
• The sketch can be any shape. That is, it can contain either tangent or
non-tangent entities.
• The sketch may reference other geometry.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Fill Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Fill FILL_SURFACE.PRT

Task 1: Create fill surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select sketch UPPER.

y
nl
O
se
U
3. In the ribbon, select Fill from
the Surfaces Group.
al

4. Notice the tool automatically

completes the feature.
rn
te
In
C
PT

5. Click Fill from the Surfaces

Group to start the Fill tool.
r

6. Right-click and select Define

Fo

Internal Sketch.
• Select datum plane DTM2 as
the Sketch Plane.
• Click Sketch.
• In the Sketch dashboard, click
Sketch View from the
setup Group.

Module 5 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 7. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
.
8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
Standard Orientation.
9. Click Project .
• Right-click to query and select
the bottom, circular intent
edge.
• Click Close in the Type dialog

y
box.

nl
10. In the Sketch dashboard, click

O
Sketch View from the setup

se
Group.

11. Click Palette and drag the

U
Pentagon into the graphics
window.
al

• Click Close in the Sketcher

Palette dialog box.
rn

• Drag the section to the center

of the sketch.
te

• In the Rotate Resize

In

Dashboard, edit the angle

to 0, scale to 20, and click
Accept Changes .
C

12. Click OK .
PT

13. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 11

 14. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
standard orientation.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sweep Surfaces with Open Trajectories
A sweep surface feature consists of a sketched section that
sweeps, or traverses, along a trajectory.

• Components of a sweep feature:

– Trajectory
♦ Select the trajectory.
♦ Define the Start point.
– Section

y
♦ Placed at the trajectory

nl
start point, denoted by the
crosshairs.

O
♦ Closed or open
• Enable or disable the Cap Ends

se
option.

Figure 1 – Sweeping a Section

U
Along an Open Trajectory
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Cap Ends Disabled

and Enabled
r
Fo

Creating Sweep Surfaces with Open Trajectories

You can create a sweep surface feature to create a constant cross-section
feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep surface feature can also
have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A
sweep surface feature consists of both a trajectory and a section. To switch
the sweep feature from a solid to a surface, click Surface in the Sweep
dashboard.
If your company has legacy data that contains ‘Simple’ sweep
surface features, you get the classic menu manager interface when
redefining them.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 13

Selecting the Trajectory
The trajectory is the path that a section sweeps along. The trajectory must
be selected, rather than sketched. The trajectory can be open, meaning
that it does not have to create a loop, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. It
can have sharp or tangent corners.
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available:
• Select a previously created external sketch.
• Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include
additional adjacent edges as the trajectory you can press SHIFT while
selecting them.
• Select an intent chain.

y
nl
Within the Sweep dashboard, you can select the Sketch at the
right end, but this does not make the sketch internal to the sweep.

O
Once the trajectory has been selected, you may decide that you do not
want the trajectory to traverse the entire length of your selected sketch or

se
geometry. You can drag the trajectory endpoint handles to lengthen or
shorten the overall trajectory. If you press SHIFT while dragging, you can
U
snap the endpoints to entities such as vertices, datum planes, or edge
endpoints. You can also directly specify a value.
al

You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the
location from which the section begins to sweep, and is displayed in the
rn

graphics window with a yellow arrow. You can click the arrow to toggle the
start point to the opposite trajectory endpoint.
te

Defining the Section

In

Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch
the section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for
C

the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The
crosshairs seen in the sketching plane are the intersection of the trajectory
PT

and sketch plane.

The sketched section may be either open or closed. In Figure,1 and Figure 2,
the section is closed.
r
Fo

Toggling the Cap Ends Option

The swept surface feature has an option to edit its ends using the Cap Ends
option. To use this option, the sketch must be a closed section. When the
option is enabled, the ends of the closed section are each capped, or closed
off, with a flat surface. In Figure 2, the Cap Ends option is enabled in the
lower image. You cannot view the trajectory sketch because the ends of the
shape are capped with flat surfaces.
Causes of a Sweep Failure
A constant section sweep surface feature may fail if one of the following
three situations occur:
• A trajectory crosses itself.
• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the
section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.

Module 5 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 • A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the
feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces with Open
Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Open-Trajectory_Surface SWEEP_SURF_OPEN-[Link]

Task 1: Create an open trajectory sweep surface with a closed sketch.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
nl
2. Select Sweep from the
Sweep types drop-down menu in

O
the Shapes group.
3. Click Surface in the

se
dashboard.
4. Select the trajectory from the
U
graphics window.
al

5. Click Create Section from

the dashboard.
rn

6. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
te

.
In

7. Select Center and Point

from the Circle types drop-down
C

menu and sketch the circle.

PT

8. Click One-by-One and edit the

diameter to 5.
r

9. Click OK .
Fo

10. Click Complete Feature .

Module 5 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 11. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
12. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Select the Cap ends check
box.
13. Click Complete Feature .
14. Click Undo from the Quick
Access toolbar.

Task 2: Create an open trajectory sweep surface with an open sketch.

y
nl
1. Start the Sweep and click

O
Surface .
2. On the right side of the
dashboard, click Datum ,
se
U
start the Sketch , and click
Use Previous.
al

3. In the dashboard, click File

System from the Get Data
rn

group.
te

• Select [Link] and click

Open.
In

4. Edit the Scaling factor to 1.

5. Locate the section on the
C

trajectory as shown.
PT

6. Click Accept Changes from

the dashboard.
7. Click OK .
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 17

 8. In the dashboard, click Resume
Feature .
9. Click Create Section .
10. Click Project from the
Sketching group.
• Zoom in on the left surface
end and select the lower edge.
• Click Close.

y
nl
11. Click OK .
12. Orient to the Standard

O
Orientation.

se
U
al

13. Click Complete Feature .

rn
te
In
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 5 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sweep Surfaces with Closed Trajectories
A sweep surface feature consists of a sketched section that
sweeps, or traverses, along a trajectory.

• Components of a sweep
feature:
– Trajectory
♦ Select the trajectory.
♦ Define the start point.

y
– Section

nl
♦ Placed at the
trajectory start point, Figure 1 – Arc Section Sketch Swept

O
denoted by the Along a Closed Trajectory
crosshairs.

se
♦ Closed or open.
♦ If you sketch an open
section for the solid
U
feature type, the
system automatically
al

toggles to surface.
rn
te

Figure 2 – Arc Section Swept Along a

Closed Trajectory and Fill Surface Created
In

Creating Sweeps Surfaces with Closed Trajectories

C

You can create a sweep surface feature to create a constant cross-section

PT

feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep surface feature can also
have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A
sweep surface feature consists of both a trajectory and a section. To switch
r

the sweep feature from a solid to a surface, click Surface in the Sweep
Fo

dashboard.
If your company has legacy data that contains ‘Simple’ sweep
surface features, you get the classic menu manager interface when
redefining them.

Selecting the Trajectory

The trajectory is the path that a section sweeps along. The trajectory must
be selected, rather than sketched. The trajectory can be closed, meaning
that it creates a loop, as shown in Figure.1 and Figure 2. It can have sharp or
tangent corners.
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available:
• Select a previously created external sketch.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 19

• Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include
additional adjacent edges as the trajectory you can press SHIFT while
selecting them.
• Select an intent chain.

Within the Sweep dashboard, you can select the Sketch at the
right end, but this does not make the sketch internal to the sweep.

You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the
location from which the section begins to sweep, and is displayed in the
graphics window with a yellow arrow. You can drag the start point along
the closed loop, or you can press SHIFT to snap the start point to one of

y
the entity endpoints.

nl
Defining the Section

O
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch
the section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for

se
the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The
crosshairs seen in the sketching plane are the intersection of the trajectory
and sketch plane.
U
The sketched section may be either open or closed. If you try to sketch a
al

solid open section, the system automatically toggles the feature creation to
that of a surface. To create the type of surface feature shown in Figure 2, you
rn

can sweep the perimeter shape first and then extrude the trajectory sketch
upward to fill in the middle.
te

Causes of a Sweep Failure

In

A constant section sweep surface feature may fail if one of the following
three situations occur:
C

• A trajectory crosses itself.

PT

• You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the
section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.
• A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and the
r

feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.

Fo

Module 5 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces with Closed
Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Closed-Trajectory_Surface
SWEEP-SURF_CLOSED-[Link]
Task 1: Create a sweep surface with a closed trajectory.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
nl
2. In the ribbon, select Sweep
from the Sweep types drop-down

O
menu in the Shapes group.
3. In the Sweep dashboard, click

se
the Surface icon.
4. Select the trajectory in the
U
graphics window.
5. Press CTRL+SHIFT and drag
al

the start point to snap to the arc

tangent endpoint as shown.
rn
te

6. Right-click and select Sketch.

In

7. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
C

.
PT

8. Click Center and Ends and

sketch the 90 degree arc.
9. Click One-by-One and edit the
r

radius to 4.
Fo

10. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 21

 11. In the Sweep dashboard, click
Complete Feature .

y
nl
Task 2: Create a Fill surface for the center of the sweep.

O
1. Select the trajectory sketch from

se
the model tree.
2. Click Fill from the Surfaces
U
group.
al
rn
te
In
C

3. Click Shading With Edges .

PT

4. Click Shading .
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Parallel Blend Surfaces
A parallel blend surface feature blends sections along a
dimensioned, linear distance.

Components of a blend feature:

• Sections:
– At least two required.
– Toggle section.
– Equal number of entities per
section.

y
– Line up start points.

nl
• Direction.

O
• Depth.

se
U Figure 1 – Blend Sections
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Blend Depths

r PT
Fo

Creating Parallel Blend Surfaces

You create blend surface features when you need to create models
that contain different transitional cross-sections. This means that you
can create a surface that starts as a circular cross-section, but as you
transition along the length of the feature, the surface changes to a square
cross-section. Therefore, blend features can create surfaces that use
different cross-sectional sketches. Parallel blends consist of sections,
direction of feature creation, and depth.

Defining the 2-D Sections

To create a parallel blend surface, there must be at least two sections on the
same sketching plane. Each section, like any sketch, is fully constrained and
dimensioned. When you are ready to create the second or any subsequent

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 23

section, you must toggle the section. In doing so, the existing sketches
become grayed out and temporarily inactive.
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond
between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the blend. You can move the
start point in a sketch by selecting the desired vertex, then right-clicking and
selecting Start Point. Figure 1 displays all three sections as having a start
point at the upper left.
Each section must contain the same number entities (or vertices) per section.
However, there are two exceptions to this rule. First, if the first or last blend
sections are of a single point, they do not need to contain the same number
of entities. Second, if a section does not contain the same number of entities
as the other sections, a number of blend vertex points can be added and

y
counted as entities, to make the same number of entities. For example, a

nl
blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to
a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to

O
create the blend feature.

Defining the Direction of Feature Creation

se
U
You must specify the direction in which the blend sections are projected. You
can flip the direction of feature creation.
al
rn

Defining the Depth of the 2-D Sections

te

The first section created in the parallel blend surface remains on the sketching
plane. Each subsequent section is projected normal to the sketching plane
In

at a specified distance in the direction of feature creation. The following

depth options are available:
C

• Blind – Specify a depth value between projected sections.

PT

• Thru Next – The section is projected up to the next encountered surface.

• Thru All – The section is projected through all surfaces.
• Thru Until – The section is projected up to the specified surface.
r
Fo

• From To – The section is projected between two selected surfaces.

Module 5 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Parallel Blend Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Parallel_Surface [Link]

Task 1: Create a parallel blend surface in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes drop-down menu. Click Blend >

y
Surface.

nl
3. In the menu manager, accept the defaults by clicking Done.
• Click Straight > Open Ends > Done.

O
• Select datum plane FRONT.
• Notice the direction of feature creation is opposite that of a
protrusion.
• Click Okay > Default. se
U
4. In the Sketch dashboard, click
al

Sketch View from the setup

rn

Group.
5. Enable only the following
te

Sketcher Display types: .

In

6. In the ribbon, click Palette

from the Sketching group, and
C

place the blend_section.

• Right-click the location handle
PT

and drag it to the center of the

incoming section.
• Drag the location handle to the
r

reference intersection.
Fo

• In the Rotate Resize

dashboard, change the
angle to 0, scale to 1, and click
Accept Changes .

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 25

 7. Click the background to clear the
selection, then right-click and
select Toggle Section.
8. Add the blend_section from the
Sketcher palette again.
• Right-click the location handle
and drag it to the center of the
incoming section.
• Drag the location handle to the
reference intersection.

y
• In the Rotate Resize
dashboard, change the

nl
angle to 0, scale to 0.5, and

O
click Accept Changes .

9. Click the background to clear the

se
selection, then right-click and
select Toggle Section.
U
10. Add the blend_section from the
Sketcher palette a third time.
al

• Right-click the location handle

and drag it to the center of the
rn

incoming section.
• Drag the location handle to the
te

reference intersection.
In

• In the Rotate Resize

dashboard, change the
angle to 0, scale to 0.75, and
C

click Accept Changes .

PT

11. Click Close in the Sketcher

Palette dialog box.
r

12. Click OK .
Fo

13. Click Blind > Done from the

menu manager.
14. Type 30 as the depth for section
2 and press ENTER. Type 20 as
the depth for section 3 and press
ENTER.
15. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
16. Click OK in the Surface dialog
box.
17. Click Plane Display to
disable their display.

Module 5 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 18. Spin the model and notice that
the feature is “hollow.”

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 27

Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Attributes
You can edit the attributes for a parallel blend surface to achieve
different geometry results.
• Shape attributes:
– Straight
– Smooth
• End attributes:
– Open Ends
– Capped Ends

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Capped Ends
Blend Attribute
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Straight Blend Attribute Figure 3 – Smooth Blend Attribute

r
Fo

Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Attributes

When the sections of a parallel blend are projected normal to the sketching
plane, you can edit the following attributes to achieve different geometry
results.

Shape Attributes
You can define how the different blend sections are connected. The following
two methods are available:
• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in Figure 2. This is the default option.

Module 5 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 • Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as
shown in Figure 3.

End Attributes
The ends of the blend surface feature can be defined in either of the following
ways:
• Open Ends – Can be specified for either an open section or closed section.
The ends of the blend are left open, forming a hollow shape with no
additional surfaces. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, the ends are open.
• Capped Ends – Can only be specified for a closed section. The ends of the

y
blend are capped, forming a closed shape with additional surfaces created
at either end of the blend. In Figure 1, the ends are capped.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface
Attributes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Parallel-Attributes_Surface BLEND_ATTRIBUTES.PRT

Task 1: Edit the attributes of a parallel blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Surface id
232.

nl
3. In the Surface dialog box, select

O
Attributes and click Define.
4. In the menu manager, click

se
Smooth > Done.
5. In the Surface dialog box, click
U
Preview.
al
rn
te
In

6. In the Surface dialog box, select

Attributes and click Define.
C

7. In the menu manager, click

Capped Ends > Done.
PT

8. Click OK in the Surface dialog

box.
9. Spin the model and notice the
r

ends of the blend surface are

Fo

capped.

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Section Tools
Blend section tools help you achieve the desired blend result.

Tools include:
• Blend vertex
• Start point
• Blending to a point

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Different Section

se
U Start Points
al
rn

Figure 2 – Blend using Blend

Vertices
te
In

Figure 3 – Blending to a Point

C
PT

Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Section Tools

r
Fo

The blend surface feature includes three different tools that are beneficial
when you create blend feature sections:
• Blend vertex – Each section of a blend surface must always contain the
same number of entities. For sections that do not have enough geometric
entities, you can add blend vertices. Blend vertices enable vertices to
converge or diverge. In Figure 2, the first blend section has six vertices,
while the second blend section has only four vertices. Consequently, two
blend vertices have been added to the section with only four vertices.
• Start point – As a general rule of thumb, the start points between sections
should correspond to the same vertex location. Typically, the start point is
created on the first location that is selected when creating a section. For
example, if sketching a rectangle, the start point is placed at the first corner
of rectangle creation, although it can be relocated. If the start points do not
line up between sections, the resulting blend surface feature will have
a twist in it, as shown in Figure 1.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 31

• Blending to a point – A blend can start or end as a single point, as shown in
Figure 3. This is the one exception in which blend sections do not have to
contain the same number of entities.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Parallel Blend Surface Section
Tools
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Parallel-Tools_Surface BLEND_SECTION-[Link]

Task 1: Create a 3-section blend surface using a blend vertex and a

Sketcher point.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes

O
drop-down menu. In the Shapes
drop-down menu, select Blend >
Surface and click Done > Done

se
from the menu manager.
3. Select datum plane FRONT as
U
the Sketch plane.
4. In the menu manager, click Flip
al

> Okay to flip the direction of

rn

feature creation.
5. In the menu manager, click Top
te

and select datum plane TOP.

In

6. In the Sketch dashboard, click

Sketch View from the setup
C

Group.
PT

7. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
.
r

8. From the Graphics toolbar,

Fo

selectWireframe from the

Model Display types drop-down
menu.
9. Enable Plane Display .
10. Click Project and select
Chain in the Type dialog box.
• Select the bottom edge.
• Select the left edge.
• Click Accept.
• Click Yes to convert the chain
to a loop.
• Click Close.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 33

 11. Select the lower-left vertex, then
right-click and select Start Point.

12. Right-click and select Toggle

Section.

y
nl
13. Click Centerline and sketch
a vertical centerline at the

O
midpoint.
14. Click Corner Rectangle

se
and sketch a rectangle, starting
at the upper-left and ending at
the lower-right. Dimension it as
U
shown.
al

15. Select the lower-left vertex, then

right-click and select Start Point.
rn

16. Select the upper-left vertex,

te

then right-click and select Blend

Vertex.
In

17. Select the upper-right vertex,

then right-click and select Blend
Vertex.
C
PT

18. Right-click and select Toggle

Section.
r

19. Click Point and create the

Fo

point, snapping to the midpoint

of the lower horizontal line.

Module 5 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 20. Click OK from the sketch
dashboard and click Blind >
Done from the menu manager.
• Type 150 as the first depth
and press ENTER.
• Type 75 as the second depth
and press ENTER.
21. Orient to the Standard
Orientation and click OK.
22. Click Shading .

y
nl
O
23. Spin the model to view it from
the rear.
24. Notice that it is hollow.
se
U
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 35

Understanding Rotational and General Blend
Theory
In addition to creating a parallel blend feature, you can also
create a rotational blend or a general blend.
• Blend options:
– Rotational Blend
– General Blend
• Blend types:

y
– Protrusion

nl
♦ Thin Protrusion
– Cut

O
♦ Thin Cut
– Surface
• 2-D Section:
se
Figure 1 – General Blend Example
U
– Sketched
– Selected
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Rotational Blend Example

In
C

Figure 3 – Using a Blend Vertex

PT

Figure 4 – Blending to a Point

r

Section
Fo

Understanding Rotational and General Blend Theory

In addition to creating a parallel blend feature, the following two blend options
are also available:
• Rotational Blend – Enables you to rotate sections around the Y-axis of a
Sketcher coordinate system.
• General Blend – Enables you to translate sections along the Z-axis of a
Sketcher coordinate system, as well as rotate the sections about the X, Y,
and Z-axes.

Blend Types
The following blend types are available:

Module 5 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 • Protrusion – Enables you to create a blend feature that adds geometry.
You can also create a Thin Protrusion.
• Cut – Enables you to create a blend feature that cuts away geometry. You
can also create a Thin Cut.
• Surface – Enables you to create a blend surface.
Once defined, you cannot toggle a protrusion to a cut, a cut to a surface,
and so on. Because these features are defined using the menu manager,
their blend type cannot be modified.

Defining the 2-D Sections

y
You can create the 2-D section to be used in the blend feature using either
method:

nl
• Sketched section – Enables you to sketch geometry for the section. The

O
following are important characteristics of a sketched section in a rotational
or general blend:

se
– Sketches are positioned relative to a Sketcher coordinate system,
which is required for each section.
U
– Each section is sketched in a separate Sketcher window. This provides
an advantage over parallel blends, which are all sketched in the same
al

window, especially for blends that contain numerous sections.

– You can add or remove sections.
rn

– You can insert new sections between existing sections.

te

– The sections can utilize blend vertices, as shown in Figure 3.

– Sections can be a single Sketcher point, along with the coordinate
In

system, as shown in Figure 4. When a single point is created for a

section and the smooth blend attribute is used, you must specify the
Cap Type that is to be used. The following two options are available:
C

♦ Sharp Cap – Blends to the Sketcher point with lines straight to the
PT

point.
♦ Smooth Cap – Blends to the Sketcher point with lines tangent at the
point.
r

• Selected section – Enables you to select from existing geometry curves

Fo

or edges.
When defining sections for either rotational or general blends, the first section
displays an arrow to denote the start point, just like a parallel blend. However,
all subsequent section start points are denoted with a small circle, as shown
in the upper-left vertex of Figure 3.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 37

Creating Rotational Blend Surfaces
A rotational blend rotates sections about the Y-axis of a Sketcher
coordinate system.

• Section requirements:
– Rotation angle about
Y-axis.
♦ 120° maximum
– Sketched coordinate
system.

y
• System lines up

nl
coordinate systems.
Figure 1 – Viewing the Rotational

O
– Typically sketched Blend Sections
offset from section.

se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Sketched Section

te

Creating Rotational Blend Surfaces

In

A rotational blend rotates sections about the Y-axis of a Sketcher coordinate

C

system. As each new section is created, you must specify its rotation angle.
The rotation angle is defined with respect to the previously created section,
PT

and has a maximum value of 120 degrees per section. When editing the
resultant blend surface, the angle value is displayed with the suffix of the axis
it rotates about. In Figure 1, the middle section is rotated 90 degrees about
r

the Y-axis, so the value is displayed as “90Y”; the left section is rotated 60
Fo

degrees from the middle section, so its angle value is displayed as “60Y.”
Each section must contain a sketched coordinate system. You typically
sketch the section a distance away from the coordinate system. In Figure 2,
the section was offset from the coordinate system a distance of 5 in the X
direction. Creo Parametric then lines up the coordinate systems to place the
sections, and rotates them in the Y-axis by the specified angle value.

Module 5 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Blend Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Rotational_Surface ROTATIONAL_BLEND_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a rotational blend surface in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend > Surface.
3. In the menu manager, click Rotational > Regular Sec > Sketch Sec

y
> Done.

nl
4. In the menu manager, click Smooth > Open > Done.

O
5. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch plane and click Okay.
6. In the menu manager, click Top and select datum plane TOP.

7. Enable only the following

se
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al

8. In the ribbon, click Sketch View

rn

from the setup group.

te

9. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group and
In

place a coordinate system at the

reference intersection.
C

10. Click Corner Rectangle

from the Sketching group and
PT

sketch the rectangle.

11. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
r
Fo

12. If necessary, select the lower-left

vertex, then right-click and select
Start Point.
13. Click OK .

14. Type 90 as the y_axis rotation angle for section 2 and press ENTER.
15. Notice the new Sketcher window.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 39

 16. Click Coordinate System
from the Sketching group and
click to place a coordinate
system.

17. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and create a
vertical and horizontal centerline.
18. Click Corner Rectangle
from the Sketching group and
sketch the rectangle.

y
nl
19. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.

O
20. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select

se
Start Point.
21. Click OK .
U
22. Click Yes to add another section.
al

23. Type 60 as the y_axis rotation angle for section 3 and press ENTER.
rn

24. Click Coordinate System

te

from the Sketching group and

click to place a coordinate
In

system.

25. Click Centerline from the

C

Sketching group and create a

PT

vertical and horizontal centerline.

26. Click Corner Rectangle
from the Sketching group and
sketch the rectangle.
r
Fo

27. Click One-by-One and edit the

dimensions as shown.
28. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select
Start Point.
29. Click OK .

Module 5 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 30. Click No to stop sketching
sections.
31. Click OK in the Surface dialog
box.
32. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select Standard Orientation
from the Orientation drop-down
menu.

33. In the model tree, right-click

Surface id 68 and select Edit.

y
34. Notice the locations of the three

nl
sections.

O
This completes the procedure.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 41

Analyzing Rotational Blend Surface Attributes
You can edit the attributes for a rotational blend surface to
achieve different geometry results.

• Shape attributes:
– Straight
– Smooth
• Type attributes:
– Open

y
– Closed

nl
• End attributes:

O
– Open Ends
– Capped Ends
Figure 1 – Smooth, Closed, Open

se
U Ends Blend Attributes
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Smooth, Open, Capped Figure 3 – Straight, Open, Open

C

Ends Blend Attributes Ends Blend Attributes

PT

Analyzing Rotational Blend Surface Attributes

r

When the sections of a rotational blend are rotated about the Y-axis, you can
Fo

edit the following attributes to achieve different geometry results.

Shape Attributes
You can define how the different blend sections are connected. The following
two methods are available:
• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in Figure 3. The edges of the sections form ruled surfaces. This is the
default option.
• Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as
shown in Figure 2 and Figure 1. The edges of the sections form splined
surfaces.

Module 5 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 Type Attributes
You can define the type of rotational blend surface that is created. The
following two types are available:
• Open – The first and last section of the blend are not connected, as shown
in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
• Closed – The last section of the blend is connected to the first section,
as shown in the Figure 1.

End Attributes
The ends of the blend surface feature can be defined in either of the following

y
ways:

nl
• Open Ends – The ends of the blend are left open, forming a hollow shape

O
without additional surfaces, as shown in Figure 3.
• Capped Ends – The ends of the blend are capped, forming a closed shape

se
with additional surfaces created at either end of the blend, as shown in
Figure 2. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 43

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Rotational Blend Surface
Attributes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Rotational-Attributes_Surface
ROT_BLEND_SURF_ATTRIB.PRT
Task 1: Edit the attributes of a rotational blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Surface id

nl
39.

O
3. In the Surface dialog box, select
Attributes and click Define.

se
4. In the menu manager, click
Straight > Open > Open Ends
> Done.
U
5. In the Surface dialog box, click
Preview.
al
rn

6. In the Surface dialog box, select

Attributes and click Define.
te

7. In the menu manager, click

Smooth > Closed > Open Ends
In

> Done.
8. In the Surface dialog box, click
C

Preview.
PT

9. In the Surface dialog box, select

Attributes and click Define.
r
Fo

10. In the menu manager, click

Smooth > Open > Capped
Ends > Done.
11. In the Surface dialog box, click
OK.

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Creating General Blend Surfaces
A general blend rotates sections about the X, Y, and Z-axes of a
Sketcher coordinate system and translates sections along the
Z-axis.

• Section requirements:
• System lines up
coordinate systems:
– Typically sketched at
center of section.

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Viewing the General
Blend Sections
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Sketched Section

C
PT

Creating General Blend Surfaces

A general blend translates sections along the Z-axis of a Sketcher coordinate
r

system. The distance between each section can be different. The blend
Fo

also rotates sections about the X, Y, and Z-axes of the Sketcher coordinate
system. As each new section is created, you must specify its X, Y, and Z
rotation angles. The rotation angles are defined with respect to the previously
created section, and each angle has a maximum value of 120 degrees per
axis per section. When editing the resultant blend surface, the angle values
are displayed with the suffix of the axes they rotate about. For example,
in Figure 1, the middle section is rotated 20 degrees about the X-axis, 0
degrees about the Y-axis, and 0 degrees about the Z-axis. Therefore, the
values displayed are ”20X,” 0Y,” and “0Z.”
Each section must contain a sketched coordinate system. You typically
sketch the section with the coordinate system located at the center. In Figure
2, the section was sketched symmetrical about the centerline that passes
vertically through the sketched coordinate system. Creo Parametric then
lines up the coordinate systems to place the sections, rotates them in the X,
Y, and Z-axes, and translates them along the Z-axis.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 45

PROCEDURE - Creating General Blend Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\General_Surface GENERAL_BLEND_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a general blend surface in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend > Surface.
3. In the menu manager, click General > Regular Sec > Sketch Sec

y
> Done.

nl
4. In the menu manager, click Smooth > Open Ends > Done.

O
5. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch plane and click Okay.
6. In the menu manager, click Top and select datum plane TOP.

7. Enable only the following

se
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al

8. In the ribbon, click Sketch View

rn

from setup group.

te

9. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group and
In

place the coordinate system.

10. Click Centerline from the

C

Sketching group and sketch a

vertical centerline.
PT

11. Click Corner Rectangle

from the Sketching group and
r
Fo

sketch a rectangle symmetric

about the centerline.
12. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
13. If necessary, select the lower-left
vertex, then right-click and select
Start Point.
14. Click OK .

Module 5 | Page 46 © 2011 PTC

 15. Type 20 as the x_axis angle and
press ENTER. Type 0 as the
y_axis angle and press ENTER.
Type 0 as the z_axis angle and
press ENTER.

16. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group and
click to place a coordinate
system in the new sketcher
window.

y
17. Click Centerline from the

nl
Sketching group and sketch
both a vertical and horizontal

O
centerline.

se
18. Click Corner Rectangle from
the Sketching group and sketch
a rectangle that is symmetric
U
about the vertical centerline by
starting at the lower left.
al

19. Click One-by-One and edit the

rn

dimensions as shown.
20. Click OK .
te
In

21. Click Yes to continue.

C

22. Type 0 as the x_axis angle and

press ENTER. Type 20 as the
PT

y_axis angle and press ENTER.

Type 10 as the z_axis angle and
press ENTER.
r
Fo

23. Click Coordinate System

from the Sketching group and
place a coordinate system.

24. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and create
both a vertical and horizontal
centerline.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 47

 25. Click Corner Rectangle from
the Sketching group and sketch
a rectangle that is symmetric
about the vertical centerline by
starting at the lower left.
26. Click One-by-One and edit the
dimensions as shown.
27. Click OK .

28. Click No to stop sketching

y
sections.

nl
29. Type 10 for the section 2 depth
and press ENTER. Type 7 for

O
the section 3 depth and press
ENTER.

se
30. Click OK in the Surface dialog
box.
U
31. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select Standard Orientation
al

from the Orientation drop-down

menu.
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 48 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing General Blend Surface Attributes
You can edit the attributes for a general blend surface to achieve
different geometry results.
• Shape attributes:
– Straight
– Smooth
• End attributes:
– Open Ends
– Capped Ends

y
nl
O
se
U
al

Figure 1 – Smooth, Capped Figure 2 – Straight, Open Ends

rn

Ends Blend Attributes Blend Attributes

te

Analyzing General Blend Surface Attributes

In

When the sections of a general blend are connected, you can edit the
following attributes to achieve different geometry results.
C
PT

Shape Attributes
You can define how the different blend sections are connected. The following
r

two methods are available:

Fo

• Straight – The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in Figure 2. The edges of the sections form ruled surfaces. This is the
default option.
• Smooth – The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as
shown in Figure 1. The edges of the sections form splined surfaces.
End Attributes
The ends of the blend surface feature can be defined in either of the following
ways:
• Open Ends – The ends of the blend are left open, forming a hollow shape
without additional surfaces, as shown in Figure 2.
• Capped Ends – The ends of the blend are capped, forming a closed shape
with additional surfaces created at either end of the blend, as shown in
Figure 1.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 49

PROCEDURE - Analyzing General Blend Surface
Attributes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\General-Attributes_Surface GEN_BLEND_SURF_ATTRIB.PRT

Task 1: Edit the attributes of a general blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Surface id

nl
39.

O
3. In the Surface dialog box, select
Attributes and click Define.

se
4. In the menu manager, click
Straight > Open Ends > Done.
U
5. In the Surface dialog box, click
Preview.
al
rn
te
In

6. In the Surface dialog box, select

Attributes and click Define.
C

7. In the menu manager, click

Smooth > Capped Ends >
PT

Done.
8. In the Surface dialog box, click
OK.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 5 | Page 50 © 2011 PTC

 Defining Rotational and General Blend Surface
Tangency
The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the
surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of another feature.

• For smooth blends only.

• Can specify tangency for the first
and/or last blend sections.
• You must specify a tangent surface

y
for each section segment.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Specifying Adjacent
Tangent Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Blends Before Tangency Figure 3 – Blends After Tangency

Fo

Defining Rotational and General Blend Surface Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the
blend feature and the surfaces of another feature. You can define tangency
only for blends created using the Smooth blend attribute.
You can define tangency for the first and/or last section of a blend. When
defining tangency, each segment of the section highlights, as shown in Figure
1. You must then select the adjacent surface.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 51

PROCEDURE - Defining Rotational and General Blend
Surface Tangency
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Tangency_Surface ROT-GEN_BLEND-TAN_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Define tangency at one end of a rotational blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of

y
ROT_BLEND.

nl
3. In the Surface dialog box, select
Tangency and click Define.

O
4. In the message window, click
Yes to define tangency at the
first end.
se
U
5. Select the bottom, adjacent
surface to the edge entity.
al
rn
te
In

6. Select the right, adjacent surface

to the edge entity.
C
r PT
Fo

7. Select the top, adjacent surface

to the edge entity.

8. Select the left, adjacent surface

to the edge entity.

Module 5 | Page 52 © 2011 PTC

 9. In the message window, click
No to not define tangency at the
other end.
10. In the Surface dialog box, click
OK.

Task 2: Define tangency at one end of a general blend surface.

1. Edit the definition of

y
GEN_BLEND.

nl
2. In the Surface dialog box, select
Tangency and click Define.

O
3. In the message window, click
Yes to define tangency at the
first end.
se
U
4. Select the bottom, adjacent
surface to the edge entity.
al
rn
te
In

5. Select the right, adjacent surface

to the edge entity.
C
r PT

6. Select the top, adjacent surface

Fo

to the edge entity.

7. Select the left, adjacent surface

to the edge entity.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 53

 8. In the message window, click
No to not define tangency at the
other end.
9. In the Surface dialog box, click
OK.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 54 © 2011 PTC

 Selecting Sections for Rotational and General
Blend Surfaces
In addition to sketching sections, you can also select geometry
for the sections of rotational and general blend surface features.

• No Sketcher coordinate system

required
• Pick Curve options:
– Curve/Edge

y
– Loop

nl
– Chain
• Blend Vertex

O
• Start Point
• Section Info
• Delete
se
U
• Undo/Redo Figure 1 – Completed Blend
Feature
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Modifying the Start Point Figure 3 – Selecting Entities

Selecting Sections for Rotational and General Blend Surfaces

r
Fo

In addition to sketching sections, you can also select geometry for the
sections of rotational and general blend surface features. Unlike sketching
the geometry for a section, a Sketcher coordinate system is not required.
Selecting geometry for blend sections is similar to using the Project
functionality because it enables you to pick geometry from existing curves or
edges using the following options:
• Curve/Edge – Enables you to select geometry edges one at a time.
• Loop – Enables you to select a loop of edges or entities. You can select a
surface or face and the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If
more than one loop exists, you must select the desired one.
• Chain – Enables you to select entities from a chain of edges or entities.
When two edges from the same surface or face are selected, you must
specify which chain of geometry you wish to be created. Figure 3 displays
one possible chain selection from the selected entities.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 55

Additional options available when selecting geometry for blend sections
include:
• Blend Vertex – Enables you to specify a blend vertex to add blend vertices
where needed.
• Start Point – Enables you to change the start point location in the section.
• Sec Info – Enables you to get information for selected entities. Options
include:
– Entity – Get information about an entity.
– Intersection Point – Get information about the intersection of two
entities.
– Tangent Point – Get information about an entity at the point of tangency.

y
– References – Get reference information about the section.

nl
– Angle – Measures the angle between selected entities.

O
– Distance – Measures the distance between two parallel lines, two
points, or a point and line.

se
– Curvature Display – Displays curvature of splines in the section.
• Delete – Enables you to delete selected entities from the section.
U
• Undo/Redo – Enables you to undo or redo Sketcher commands.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 56 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Selecting Sections for Rotational and
General Blend Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Blend\Select-Section_Surface SEL-SEC_BLEND_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a general blend surface by selecting the blend sections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes drop-down menu. In the Shapes
drop-down menu, select Blend > Surface.

nl
3. In the menu manager, click General > Regular Sec > Select Sec

O
> Done.
4. In the menu manager, click Smooth > Open Ends > Done.

5. In the menu manager, click Pick

Curve > Sel Chain. se
U
6. Select the front, left vertical edge
al

of the large “U” shape.

7. Press CTRL and select the front,
rn

right vertical edge of the large

“U” shape.
te

8. Click Accept > Done/Return

from the menu manager.
In

9. Notice the start point is at the

upper-left vertex.
C

10. Click Done from the menu

PT

manager.
r
Fo

11. In the menu manager, click Pick

Curve > Sel Chain.
12. Select the rear, right vertical
edge of the small “U” shape.
13. Press CTRL and select the rear,
left vertical edge of the small “U”
shape.
14. Click Accept from the menu
manager.

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 57

 15. Click Start Point from the menu
manager and select the rear,
upper-left vertex as the new start
point.

16. Click Done from the menu

manager.
17. Click No to stop selecting

y
sections.

nl
18. In the Surface dialog box, click
Preview.

O
19. Orient to the Standard

se
Orientation.
20. Notice that the resulting blend
surface is non-tangent.
U
al

21. In the Surface dialog box, select

rn

Tangency and click Define.

te

22. In the message window, click

Yes to specify tangency at the
In

first end.
23. Select the five surfaces adjacent
to the corresponding highlighted
C

edges on the large “U” surface.

PT

24. In the message window, click

Yes to specify tangency at the
other end.
r
Fo

25. Select the five surfaces adjacent

to the corresponding highlighted
edges on the small “U” surface.

Module 5 | Page 58 © 2011 PTC

 26. Click OK in the Surface dialog
box.

y
nl
O
se
This completes the procedure.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 5 | Page 59

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5 | Page 60 © 2011 PTC

 Module 6

y
Boundary Blend Surfaces

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Surfaces by boundaries are among the most powerful and flexible surfaces
to capture design intent. You use them while creating continuous surface
features. As the name suggests, the surfaces are created with the boundary
U
edges defined with curves or edges. You can apply edge boundary conditions
for aligning the shape of the surface with the adjoining geometry. You can
al

modify the structure of surfaces by modifying constraint options that define

the shape of the surfaces or the surfaces directly.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Understand boundary curve concepts.

• Create boundary blends in one and two directions.
C

• Analyze blended surface boundary conditions.

PT

• Analyze blended surface constraint options.

• Analyze blended surface control points.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 1

Understanding Boundary Curve Concepts
You can create a surface by defining its boundaries.

• Select combinations of:

– Datum curves.
– Datum points.
– Model edges.
• Select multiple boundaries:
– Press CTRL to select multiple
boundaries.

y
– Press SHIFT to select

nl
multiple curves/edges within a
boundary.

O
se
Figure 1 – Set of Datum Curves
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Selecting Curves Figure 3 – Previewing Completed

for Surface Surface
r
Fo

Understanding Boundary Curve Concepts

You can create a surface by defining its boundaries. You can select
combinations of the following as boundaries:
• Datum curves
• Datum points
• Model edges, both of surfaces and solids
In the figures, both datum curves and the surface edges have been selected
to create the resultant boundary surface.
Consider that any resulting surface by boundaries is only as good as the
underlying curves that define it. Therefore, if the curves are not tangent, the
resulting boundary surface will likely not be able to be created tangent, either.

Module 6 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Selecting Multiple Boundaries
Press CTRL to select multiple boundaries or to start selecting the next
boundary. Use SHIFT to select multiple curves or edges within a boundary.

Best Practices
When both are in a coincident location, it is preferable to select an edge of a
surface versus a curve for a boundary when possible. This enables you to
set up boundary conditions to the adjacent surface.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 3

Creating Boundary Blends in One Direction
You can create a boundary blend surface by selecting two or
more curves flowing in the same direction.

• The curves need not form a closed

loop.
• Curves are connected in the order
selected.
– First and last define boundaries
– Intermediate provide additional

y
shape control

nl
• Curves tab.
– Select/Delete curves

O
– Reorder curves
– Close Bend Figure 1 – Selecting the First Curve

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Selecting a Second Curve Figure 3 – Selecting the Third Curve

C

Creating Boundary Blends in One Direction

PT

You can create a boundary blend surface by selecting two or more curves
flowing in the same direction. The curves do not have to form a closed loop.
By default, the curves are connected in the order selected, and you can
r
Fo

select datum curves or model edges. The order of curve selection is denoted
in the graphics window with the numbers 1, 2, 3, and so on.
The first and last curves selected define the boundaries of the resulting
surface. Any intermediate curves provide additional shape control for the
surface.

Curves Tab Options and Operations

Within the Boundary Blend tool, you can select the Curves tab in the
dashboard. The following options and operations are available:
• Select or delete curves – You can select a curve to highlight it in the
graphics window, or right-click to remove it from the list of selected curves.
• Reorder curves – You can connect the curves in a different order than how
they were selected.

Module 6 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 • Close Blend – Connects the last curve back to the first curve. Essentially,
this check box option forms a closed loop surface by blending the last curve
back to the first curve. This option is only applicable to single direction
curves where the other collector is empty.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating Boundary Blends in One
Direction
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Boundary-Blend_1-Direction

boundary_1_dir.prt

Task 1: Create a boundary blend in one direction.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
nl
2. In the ribbon, select the Model
tab. Start the Boundary Blend

O
from the Surfaces group.
3. Select the front curve.

4. Press CTRL and select the

se
U
middle curve.
al
rn
te

5. Press CTRL and select the left

portion of the rear curve.
In
C
r PT
Fo

6. Press SHIFT to continue building

the curve and select the right
portion of the rear curve.

Module 6 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 7. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Curves
tab.
8. Notice the options that are
available.

9. Click Complete Feature

Boundary Blend dashboard.

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 7

Creating Boundary Blends in Two Directions
A boundary blend created in two directions typically consists of
four or more curves, with two or more curves in one direction
and two or more curves in a second direction.
• The curves must form a closed
loop.
• You can create a triangle surface:
– Two curves in first direction.
– One curve in second direction.

y
• You can use a datum point or

nl
vertex in place of first or last chain.
• Curves tab:

O
– Select/Delete curves
– Reorder curves Figure 1 – Selecting Curves in

se
U the First Direction
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Selecting Curves in Figure 3 – Previewing the

the Second Direction Complete Surface
PT

Creating Boundary Blends in Two Directions

r

A boundary blend created in two directions typically consists of four or more

Fo

curves, with two or more curves in one direction and two or more curves in a
second direction. The curves must form a closed loop. However, they can
extend past each other and do not have to be trimmed.
You can also create a boundary blend in the shape of a triangle. This is
done by selecting two curves in the first direction, and one curve in the
second direction.
If desired, you can select a datum point or vertex as a “curve” in place of the
first or last selected curve chain in each direction.

Curves Tab Options and Operations

Within the Boundary Blend tool, you can select the Curves tab in the
dashboard. The following options and operations are available:
• Select or delete curves – You can select a curve to highlight it in the
graphics window, or right-click to remove it from the list of selected curves.

Module 6 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 • Reorder curves – You can connect the curves in a different order than how
they were selected.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Boundary Blends in Two
Directions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Boundary-Blend_2-Direction
BOUNDARY_2_DIR.PRT
Task 1: Create a boundary blend in two directions.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the ribbon, select the Model

nl
tab. Start the Boundary Blend

O
from the Surfaces group.
3. Select the front curve.

se
U
4. Press CTRL and select the
middle curve.
al
rn
te
In

5. Press CTRL and select the left

portion of the rear curve.
C
r PT
Fo

6. Press SHIFT to continue building

the curve and select the right
portion of the rear curve.

Module 6 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 7. Right-click and select Second
Direction Curves.
8. Select the Curves tab from
the dashboard and notice the
options.
9. Select the left curve.

10. Press CTRL and select the

y
middle curve.

nl
O
se
U
al

11. Press CTRL and select the right

curve.
rn
te
In
C
PT

12. Click Complete Feature

Boundary Blend.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 11

Analyzing Blended Surface Boundary Conditions
You can control the alignment of the boundary blend edges with
adjacent geometry.

• Boundary conditions include:

– Free
– Tangent
– Curvature
– Normal

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Curvature Boundary Figure 2 – Free Boundary Condition
al

Condition
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Normal Boundary Figure 4 – Tangent Boundary

PT

Condition Condition
r

Analyzing Blended Surface Boundary Conditions

Fo

You can control the alignment of the boundary blend edges with adjacent
geometry. Changing the boundary condition can affect the shape of the
resulting surface. The following boundary conditions are available:
• Free – There are no implied conditions along the surface boundary. The
symbol displays as a dashed line.
• Tangent – The boundary surface changes shape to be tangent along the
surface boundary. The symbol displays as a solid line.
• Curvature – The boundary surface changes shape to be
curvature-continuous along the surface boundary. The symbol displays
as a double line.
• Normal – The boundary surface changes shape to be normal
(perpendicular) to the surface boundary or datum plane reference. The
symbol displays as a right angle.

Module 6 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blended Surface Boundary
Conditions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Boundary_Conditions
BOUND_CONDITIONS.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the boundary conditions of a boundary blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Boundary

nl
Blend 2.

O
3. Notice the top curve is number 1
and the bottom curve is number
2.
4. Notice that both boundary
handles are dashes, which se
U
indicates the Free tangent
condition.
al

5. In the Boundary Blend

rn

dashboard, select the

Constraints tab.
te

• Edit the Condition for the

first boundary from Free to
In

Tangent.
6. Notice that the symbol shape in
C

the boundary handle updates to

PT

a line.
7. Notice that the surface shape
changes.
r
Fo

8. Right-click the tangent boundary

handle and select Normal.
9. Notice that the symbol shape in
the boundary handle updates to
a right angle.
10. Notice that the surface shape
changes.
11. Notice that the Condition in the
dashboard updates to Normal.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 13

 12. Right-click the normal boundary
handle and select Curvature.
13. Notice that the symbol shape in
the boundary handle updates to
a double line.
14. Notice that the surface shape
changes.
15. Notice that the Condition in the
dashboard updates to Curvature.

y
16. Click Complete Feature

nl
Boundary Blend Dashboard.

O
se
U
17. Spin the model and observe the
surface.
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 6 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Blended Surface Constraint Options
When creating a boundary blend surface, there are multiple
constraint options available.

• Constraint options include:

– Boundary length handles
– Tangency handles
– Add inner edge tangency
– Add side curve influence

y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Adjusting Tangency Handles

se
U
Figure 2 – Adjusting Boundary
al

Length Handles
rn

Figure 3 – Adding Side Curve Influence

te
In

Analyzing Blended Surface Constraint Options

C

When creating a boundary blend surface, there are multiple constraint

options available, including the following:
PT

Boundary Length Handles

The boundary length handles are used to adjust how much of the boundary
r

to use. You can drag the handles or type a value, and the value can be either
Fo

positive or negative. Positive values cause the boundary to be extended

beyond the end of the adjacent boundary. In Figure 2, the left boundary
length handle has been modified to a negative value, while the right boundary
length handle has been modified to a positive value.

Tangency Handles
You can display drag handles to control the boundary stretch factor for
boundaries set to tangent or curvature-continuous. You can specify a different
boundary stretch factor for each qualifying boundary. Figure 1 displays how
modifying the tangency handle stretch factor influences the surface shape.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 15

Adding Inner Edge Tangency
Adding inner edge tangency sets the tangent inner edge condition for one or
both directions of a blended surface. This condition applies only to surfaces
with multi-segment boundaries. You can create a blended surface with
patches that are tangent across inner edges. In some cases, when geometry
is complex, dihedral angles at inner edges may deviate from zero.

Adding Side Curve Influence

In a one-directional blended surface, for boundary conditions specified as
Tangent or Curvature, adding side curve influence makes the side edges
of the blended surface tangent to the side edges of the references. You

y
can add side curve influence independently for each qualifying boundary

nl
condition. In Figure 3, the side curve influence has been added for both
boundary conditions.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 6 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blended Surface Constraint
Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Boundary_Constraints
CONSTRAINT_OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Analyze the constraint options of a boundary blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Boundary

nl
Blend 1.

O
3. Drag each of the handles of the
upper boundary to -10.

se
4. Double-click each -10 value and
edit it to 0.
U
5. Right-click the boundary
condition handle and select
Tangent.
al
rn

6. Select the Constraints tab from

the Boundary Blend dashboard.
te

• Select the Display drag

handles check box.
In

• Select the Direction 1-First

chain Boundary.
C

7. Drag the first chain handle from

1 to 1.80.
PT

8. Notice the difference in the

shape of the surface.
r
Fo

You can drag or edit the

value to a negative value.
This causes the surface to
be tangent coming from the
opposite direction.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 17

 9. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Direction
1-Last chain boundary.
10. Drag the last chain handle from
1 to 1.80.

y
nl
11. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Direction

O
1-First chain boundary again.
• Select the Add side curve

se
influence check box.
12. Notice the difference in the
U
surface shape.
al
rn
te

13. In the Boundary Blend

dashboard, select the Direction
In

1-Last chain boundary again.

• Select the Add side curve
C

influence check box.

PT

14. Notice the difference in the

surface shape.
r
Fo

Module 6 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 15. Click Complete Feature from
the Boundary Blend Group.

y
nl
O
se
This completes the procedure.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 19

Analyzing Blended Surface Control Points
You can add control points to help shape a surface by mapping
locations on input curves.
• Control point fit options:
– Natural
– Arclength
– Piece to piece
– Point to point
– Developable

y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Selecting Control Points
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Resultant Surface Figure 3 – Alternate Resultant

Geometry Surface Geometry
r
Fo

Analyzing Blended Surface Control Points

You can add control point sets to help shape a surface by mapping locations
on input curves. Each set contains selected control points which are then
connected to help influence the resulting surface shape. Joining different
control points causes the resultant surface geometry to differ. For example,
different control points were joined to create the two different surface
geometry results shown in the lower figures. You can add new sets of control
points in the Sets column of the Control Points tab in the dashboard.
Control Point Fit Options
The following types of fit options are available for joining the control points:
• Natural – Blends the surface using the general blending routine and resets
the parameters for input curves using the same routine to obtain the best
approximation for the surface.

Module 6 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 • Arclength – Minimal adjustments are made to the original curves. Curves
are blended using the general blending routine except that curves are
divided into equal pieces and blended piece-by-piece.
• Piece to piece – Blends the surface piece-by-piece. Curve chains or
composite curves are connected.
• Point to point – Blends the surface point-by-point. Point 1 in the first curve
is connected to point 1 in the second curve, and so forth.
• Developable – If two tangent curves in one direction are selected, you can
toggle to determine whether you want the developable option.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blended Surface Control
Points

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Control_Points CONTROL_POINTS.PRT

Task 1: Add control points to a boundary blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select Boundary Blend 1 from
the model tree.

nl
3. Notice the groups of double lines

O
in the surface; four vertical pairs
and one horizontal pair.

se
U
4. Edit the definition of Boundary
Blend 1.
al

5. In the Boundary Blend

rn

dashboard, select the Control

Points tab.
te

• Verify that First Direction is

specified.
In

• Verify that the Fit is Natural.

• Select Undefined for Chain 1.
C

6. Notice the Green Xs.

PT

7. Select the X for the first vertical

double line, second from the left.
r
Fo

Module 6 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 8. Select the corresponding X at
the top of the first double line.

y
9. Repeat this procedure for the
other three vertical double line

nl
pairs.

O
10. Notice that each double line
is replaced with a single line
connecting the selected Xs.

se
U
11. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Second
al

option for Direction.

rn

• Verify that the Fit is Natural.

• Select Undefined for Chain 1.
te

12. Again, notice the Green Xs.

In

13. Select the left X for the horizontal

C

double line.
r PT
Fo

14. Select the corresponding Xs for

the other two locations.
Notice that the double line
is replaced with a single line
connecting the selected Xs.

© 2011 PTC Module 6 | Page 23

 15. Click Complete Feature from
the Boundary Blend dashboard.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 6 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Module 7

y
Additional Boundary Surfaces

nl
O
Module Overview

se
In this module, you will learn how to create additional types of surfaces that
utilize boundaries, as well as additional options within the boundary blend
tool. Some of these options use solids or surfaces as boundaries in place of
U
edges or curves, and in turn can be used to create solid or surface features.
al

Objectives
rn

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Create conic surfaces from boundaries.
te

• Create approximate blended surfaces.

In

• Analyze the options available for approximate blended surfaces.

• Create N-Sided surfaces.
C

• Create a blend tangent to surfaces.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 1

Creating Conic Surfaces from Boundaries
Conics are useful for creating smooth transitions between
surfaces. You can create a conic surface using boundary curves.

Elements of a conic surface:

• Boundaries
• Reference curve
– Shoulder curve
– Tangent curve

y
• RHO parameter

nl
– 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical

O
– 0.5 = Parabolic
– > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic

se
– √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse Figure 1 – Conics with Shoulder
Curves, RHO = 0.35 and 0.75
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Conics with Tangent

Curves, RHO = 0.5 and 0.8
r
Fo

Creating Conic Surfaces from Boundaries

Conics are useful for creating smooth transitions between surfaces. Three
basic methods can be used to create a conic surface:
• You can sketch a conic and use it for a surface feature.
• You can create a round with a conic profile option.
• You can create a conic surface using boundary curves. This topic covers
this method.
You can create a conic surface by selecting boundaries, a reference curve,
and specifying a RHO value. The reference curve is specified as either a
shoulder curve or a tangent curve.
• For a shoulder curve, the curve defines the apex location of the conic
shape. The surface passes through a shoulder curve, as shown in Figure 1.

Module 7 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • For a tangent curve, the curve defines the location for the conic's tangents
to pass through. The surface does not pass through a tangent curve, as
shown in Figure 2.

Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic to create
elliptical, parabolic, or hyperbolic shapes. Higher RHO values create a more
peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values create a more flat conic shape.
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
• 0.5 = Parabolic

y
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic

nl
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Conic Surfaces from Boundaries
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Conic

[Link]

Task 1: Create a conic surface that passes through a shoulder curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select File > Options >

y
Customize Ribbon.

nl
• In the Choose commands
from: drop-down list, select

O
commands not in the ribbon.
• In the field, select Conic

se
Surface and N-sided Patch.
• In the Customize ribbon, select
U
the New Tab.
• Click the Add Button to add
al

Conic Surface and N-sided

Patch in the New tab.
rn

• Click OK in the Creo

Parametric option window.
te

3. In the ribbon, select New Tab.

In

In the New Tab, select Conic

Surface and N-sided Patch.
C

4. In the menu manager, click

Conic Surf > Shouldr Crv >
PT

Done.
5. Select the left and right curves.
r

6. In the menu manager, click

Fo

Shouldr Crv.
7. Select the middle curve.
8. Click Done Curves from the
menu manager.
9. Type 0.35 for the rho value and
press ENTER.
10. Click OK in the Surface dialog
box.
11. Notice that the surface passes
through the middle curve.

Module 7 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 12. Right-click the Surface id and
select Edit.
13. Type 0.75 for the rho value and
press ENTER.

14. Click Regenerate from the

customize quick access toolbar.
15. Right-click the Surface id and
select Hide.

Task 2: Create a conic surface using a tangent curve.

y
nl
1. In the ribbon, select Conic

O
Surface and N-sided Patch.
2. In the menu manager, click

se
Conic Surf > Tangent Crv >
Done.
U
3. Select the left and right curves.
al

4. In the menu manager, click

Tangent Crv.
rn

5. Select the middle curve.

6. Click Done Curves from the
te

menu manager.
In

7. Type 0.50 for the rho value and

press ENTER.
C

8. Click OK in the Surface dialog

box.
PT

9. Notice that the surface does not

pass through the middle curve.
r

10. Right-click the Surface id and

Fo

select Edit.
11. Type 0.80 for the rho value and
press ENTER.

12. Click Regenerate from the

customize quick access toolbar.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 5

Creating Approximate Blended Surfaces
You can specify additional curves that influence the shape of a
boundary blend surface.

• Influencing curves:
– You can select any number.
– Need not connect with
boundary curves.
– Can be a distance away.

y
– Resulting surface does not
pass through them.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Original Surface, No
U Influencing Curves
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Selecting Influencing

Curves Figure 3 – Surface with Influence
r

Creating Approximate Blended Surfaces

Fo

You can specify additional curves that influence the shape of a boundary
blend surface. This option enables you to alter the shape of a boundary
surface based on visual requirements using influencing curves. You can
select any number of influencing curves. In figure 2, three curves are being
selected as influencing curves. The influencing curves do not have to
connect with other boundary curves, and can be some distance away. The
resulting surface then approximates the shape of the influencing curves, but
the surface does not pass through them. You can view how the influencing
curves have altered the resultant surface between figure 1 and figure 3.

Module 7 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Approximate Blended Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Approximate APPROX_BLEND.PRT

Task 1: Create a boundary blend that contains influencing curves.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, start the Boundary
Blend from the Surfaces

y
Group.

nl
3. Press CTRL and select the three

O
“vertical” curves, starting from
the left.

se
U
4. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Options
al

tab.
rn

• Click in the Influencing curves

collector.
te

• Press CTRL and select the

three “horizontal” curves,
In

starting from the bottom.

C
PT

5. Click Complete Feature from

the Boundary Blend dashboard.
r
Fo

6. Notice that the surface passes

through the first three curves.
7. Notice that the approximate
curves have influenced the
shape of the surface without
touching.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 7

Analyzing Approximate Blended Surface Options
For a boundary blend surface using influencing curves, you can
specify a smoothness parameter and the number of surface
patches.

• Smoothness
– 1 = Flattest
– 0 = Most curved
• Patches in direction

y
– Vary first and second directions
independently.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Varying Smoothness
Option
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Varying Patches in

PT

Direction Option
r

Analyzing Approximate Blended Surface Options

Fo

For a boundary blend surface using influencing curves, you can specify a
smoothness parameter and the number of surface patches.

The Smoothness Parameter Option

The smoothness parameter option controls the surface roughness,
irregularities, or projections. Smoothness values can vary from 0 to 1, where
1 is the smoothest, or flattest, and 0 is the roughest, or most curved. In figure
1, the surface in the top image has a higher smoothness value (close to
1), whereas the surface in the bottom image has a low smoothness value
(close to 0).

Module 7 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 The Patches in Direction Option
The Patches in direction option controls the number of patches along the U
and V-directions used to form the resultant surface. You can specify both first
and second direction independently. The higher the U and V values, the
more UV lines are created on the surface, and therefore the more detailed
the surface can be. In figure 2, the surface in the top image has a lower
number of patches defined in both directions, whereas the bottom image has
a higher number of patches defined in both directions.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Approximate Blended Surface
Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces APPROX_OPTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Modify the Smoothness and Patches in direction options for a

boundary blend.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Boundary

nl
Blend 1.

O
3. Right-click and select
Influencing Curves.

se
4. Select the spline curve.
5. Click Preview Feature .
U
6. Click Resume Feature .
al

7. In the Boundary Blend

rn

dashboard, select the Options

tab.
te

• Edit the Smoothness to 0.8.

8. Click Preview Feature .
In

9. Click Resume Feature .

C

10. In the Boundary Blend

PT

dashboard, select the Options

tab.
• Edit the Smoothness to 0.2.
r

11. Click Preview Feature .

Fo

12. Click Resume Feature .

13. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Options
tab.
• Edit the number of Patches
in both the First and Second
direction to 10.
14. Click Preview Feature .

Module 7 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 15. Click Resume Feature .
16. In the Boundary Blend
dashboard, select the Options
tab.
• Edit the number of Patches
in both the First and Second
direction to 20.
17. Click Complete Feature from
the Boundary Blend dashboard.

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 11

Creating N-Sided Surfaces
The N-Sided surface option enables you to create a boundary
surface from more than four boundaries.

• Shape is dependent upon the

boundaries.
• Boundary conditions:
– Free
– Tangent

y
– Normal

nl
O
Figure 1 – Original Curve
Boundaries

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Completed N-Sided

C

Figure 2 – Selecting Boundaries Surface

PT

Creating N-Sided Surfaces

r

The N-Sided surface option enables you to create a boundary surface from
Fo

more than four boundaries. In the figures, a total of five boundaries are
specified for the resulting surface. You can specify the following boundary
conditions:
• Free – Contains no tangent conditions.
• Tangent – Surface is tangent to the reference surface.
• Normal – Surface is perpendicular to the reference surface.
The shape of the n-sided surface is dependent upon the boundaries to be
patched. The n-sided patch may not produce a smooth surface if any of
the following three conditions exists:
• The boundaries have inflections.
• The angles between the boundaries are very large or very small.
• The boundaries consist of alternating long and short segments.

Module 7 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 If the n-sided patch does not produce a smooth surface, you can construct
additional curves enabling you to create four-sided boundary blends or a
series of n-sided patches on a smaller number of boundary curves.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Creating N-Sided Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\N-Sided [Link]

Task 1: Create an N-sided boundary blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select File > Options >
Customize Ribbon.

y
• In the Choose commands

nl
from: drop-down list, select
commands not in the ribbon.

O
• Select Conic Surface and
N-sided Patch.
• In the Customize ribbon, select
the New Tab.
se
U
• Click the Add Button to add
Conic Surface and N-sided
al

Patch in the New tab.

• Click OK in the Creo
rn

Parametric option window.

te

3. In the ribbon, select New Tab.

In the New tab, Select Conic
In

Surface and N-sided Patch.

4. In the menu manager, click
N-Sided Surf > Done.
C

5. Select the edge of the surface.

PT

6. Press CTRL and select the

other four curves, moving in a
r

counter-clockwise direction.
Fo

7. In the menu manager, click

Done.

Module 7 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 8. In the Surface dialog box, select
Bndry Conds and click Define.
9. In the menu manager, cursor
over each of the Boundary #.
Locate the Boundary # of the
surface edge and select it.

Cursor over each Boundary

# in the menu manager.
This causes each curve to
become whited out. You can

y
then cursor back over each

nl
Boundary # to locate the
correct one.

O
10. In the menu manager, click

se
Tangent as the boundary
condition and click Done. U
11. Click OK in the Boundary #
dialog box.
al

12. Locate the Boundary # for the

rn

lower-right curve, and select it

from the menu manager.
te

• Click Normal as the boundary

condition and click Done.
In

• Click OK in the Boundary #

dialog box.
C

13. Click Done from the menu

manager.
PT

14. Click OK in the Surface: N-sided

dialog box.
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 15

Creating a Blend Tangent to Surfaces
The blend tangent to surfaces option enables you to create a
surface blending from an edge or curve to tangent surfaces.

• Three basic tangent draft options:

– Curve-driven
– Constant-angle outside a draft
surface
– Constant-angle inside a draft surface

y
• References

nl
– Draft Line
– Reference Surfaces

O
– Draft Parameters Figure 1 – Constant Angle
• Additional Options Tangent Draft Surface
– Closing Surfaces
– Spine Curves se
U
– Cap Angle
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Curve-Driven
Tangent Drafts
PT

Creating a Blend Tangent to Surfaces

r

The blend tangent to surfaces option enables you to create a surface blending
Fo

from an edge or curve to tangent surfaces. This option is useful for either of
the following circumstances:
• Creating drafts on models that are already rounded, a case in which draft
features often are not able to be created.
• Joining surfaces on a model with complex shapes.
You may need to create a parting surface and a reference curve such as a
draft line, before using the Blend Tangent to Surfaces functionality.

Understanding the Blend Tangent to Surfaces Options

There are three basic options available when create a blend tangent to
surface:

Module 7 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 • Curve-driven tangent draft surface – Creates a surface
on one or both sides of a parting surface between a
reference curve (such as a parting curve or a sketched
curve) and selected surfaces of the reference part,
tangent to these surfaces. The reference curve must lie
outside the reference part.

• Constant-angle tangent draft outside a draft surface

– Creates a surface by following the trajectory of the
reference curve and creating surfaces at a specified
constant angle to the pull direction. Use this feature to
add tangent draft to surfaces that cannot be drafted with
the regular Draft feature. You can also use this feature

y
to add tangent drafts to a rib with rounded edges and

nl
preserve tangency to the reference part.

O
• Constant-angle tangent draft inside a draft surface –
Creates a surface with a constant draft angle inside the

se
draft surface. This surface is created on one or both
sides of a reference curve (such as a draft curve or a
silhouette curve) at a specified angle to the reference
U
part surfaces, and provides a rounded transition between
the draft surfaces and the adjacent surfaces of the
al

reference part.
rn

For these options, you can define the direction as one-sided or two-sided,
and you must also specify the pull direction reference.
te

References
In

You can also define the following references:

C

• Draft Line – You select the draft line for the feature.
PT

• Reference Surfaces – You can specify the tangent surfaces manually or

let the system do it automatically. Optionally, you can also specify the
parting surface reference.
r

• Draft Parameters – You can specify both the Draft Angle and the Draft
Fo

Radius where the draft meets the model.

Additional Options
You can also specify the following additional options:
• Closing Surfaces – Enables you to trim or, in some cases, extend the
tangent draft up to selected surfaces. Use this element when adjacent
surfaces are located at an angle to the surface being drafted. Note that a
closing surface must always be a solid surface. A datum plane or a surface
geometry cannot be a closing surface.
• Spine Curves – Enables you to specify an additional curve that controls the
orientation of normals to the sectioning plane. Use this element if using the
reference curve alone results in the geometry intersecting itself.
• Cap Angle – Available for one-sided curve-driven tangent drafts only. This
element controls the draft angle for additional planes that are automatically

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 17

 created when a draft line does not extend to the surface borders and you
have not specified the closing surfaces. If you do not specify a value, Creo
Parametric uses a zero angle.
You can also edit the reference curve by using the Curves tabbed page in the
Tangent Surface dialog box. Select the reference curve segments to include
in the draft line or exclude from the draft line. Use this functionality when
Creo Parametric has trouble creating the tangent draft, for example, when
the reference curve intersects itself.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Blend Tangent to Surfaces
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Boundary Surfaces\Blend_Tangent-Surfaces

[Link]

Task 1: Create blends tangent to surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Surfaces

y
drop-down menu from the model

nl
tab. Select Blend Tangent To
Surfaces from the surfaces

O
drop-down menu.
3. Select the top surface.
4. In the menu manager, click Flip
> Okay to flip the arrow down. se
U
5. In the Tangent Surface dialog
al

box, select One Sided for

Direction.
rn

• Under the Basic Options

section, select the middle
te

graphic to create a constant

draft angle tangent draft.
In

• Select the References tab.

6. Click Tangent Chain in the
C

menu manager.
PT

• Select the lower edge of the

uppermost round.
• Click Done.
r
Fo

7. In the Tangent Surface dialog

box, edit the Draft Angle to 5.
• Edit the Draft Radius to 8.
• Click Apply Changes .

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 19

 8. Select the Blend Tangent To
Surfaces from the surfaces
drop-down menu.
9. Select the lower main surface.
10. Flip the arrow up if necessary,
and click Okay from the menu
manager.

11. In the Tangent Surface dialog

y
box, select One Sided.

nl
• Select the left graphic to create

O
a curve-driven tangent draft.
• Select the References tab.

se
12. Click Curve Chain in the menu
manager.
U
• Select a segment of the circle
curve.
al

• Click Select All > Done.

rn

13. In the References tab, click

Select Surfaces to define
te

Tangent To references.
• Press CTRL and select the
In

two halves of the round on the

large cylinder.
C

• Click OK in the Select dialog

box.
PT

14. Click Apply Changes .

r
Fo

15. Select the Blend Tangent To Surfaces from the surfaces drop-down
menu.
16. Select the lower main surface.
17. Flip the arrow up if necessary, and click Okay from the menu manager.

Module 7 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 18. In the Tangent Surface dialog
box, select One Sided.
• Select the left graphic to create
a curve-driven tangent draft.
• Select the References tab.
19. Click Curve Chain in the menu
manager.
• Select a segment of the rib
curve.
• Click Select All > Done.

y
nl
20. Click Apply Changes .

O
se
U
al

21. With the surface still selected,

rn

start the Pattern from the

Editing Group.
te

22. Click Complete Feature to

complete the reference pattern.
In
C
r PT

This completes the procedure.

Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 7 | Page 21

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Module 8

y
Sweep Surfaces with Variable Sections

nl
O
Module Overview

se
A sweep with a variable section is one of the most powerful features in Creo
Parametric, considering the variety and complexity of geometry it can be
used to create. A sweep utilizes a single section that can be constant or
U
variable, which is swept along one or more trajectories. The section can vary
its shape and orientation as it gets pulled in different directions along different
al

trajectories. In addition, section dimensions can be varied along the length of

the sweep by using relations and a datum graph if desired.
rn

In this module, you will learn how to use sweeps with variable sections to
te

create surface geometry, as well as the many options to control the section
orientation and tangency.
In

Objectives
C

After completing this module, you will be able to:

PT

• Understand the theory behind sweeps.

• Create sweeps using a constant section.
• Create sweeps using normal to trajectory section plane control.
r

• Create sweeps using constant normal direction section plane control.

Fo

• Create sweeps using normal to projection section plane control.

• Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a sweep.
• Create sweeps using multiple trajectories.
• Create sweeps using tangent trajectories.
• Analyze the different options and rules for a sweep.
• Use trajpar and evalgraph in the creation of sweeps.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 1

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections
A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that
can change shape and orientation along the feature.
• Create a solid or a surface feature.
• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Section
♦ Constant or variable.
♦ Sits on an x-y-z frame.

y
– Trajectories

nl
♦ Use one or more.

O
♦ Section attached to Origin
trajectory.

se
♦ Section sweeps along Origin
trajectory length. Figure 1 – Creating a Sweep
with a Variable Section
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Completed Feature

r

Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections

Fo

A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change
shape and orientation along the feature. With the Sweep feature, you can
create a solid or surface feature. You add or remove material while sweeping
a section along one or more selected trajectories, by controlling the section’s
orientation, rotation, and geometry. You can create a sweep using a constant
section or a variable section.
The main components of the sweep tool are the section and trajectories. The
sketched section sits on an x-y-z frame that is attached to the Origin trajectory
and moves along its length to create geometry. The Origin trajectory is the
first selected trajectory. The Origin trajectory, along with the other trajectories
and other references such as the planes, axes, edges, or an axis of the
coordinate system define the orientation of the section along the sweep. In
Figure 1 and Figure 2, the curved datum curve is the Origin trajectory that the
rectangular section sweeps along.

Module 8 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 The frame is essentially a coordinate system that slides along the origin
trajectory and carries with itself the section to be swept. Axes of the
coordinate system are defined by auxiliary trajectories and other references.
The frame is important because it determines the orientation of the sketch as it
is being moved along the origin trajectory. The frame is oriented by additional
constraints and references. The system places the sketched section in a
specified orientation with respect to these references and attaches it to a
frame that moves along the origin trajectory and sweeps the section.

Best Practices
A good way to understand sweeps with variable sections is to think of yourself
on a roller coaster holding a picture frame. The Origin trajectory is the track

y
of the roller coaster. The frame you are holding is the frame referred to in this

nl
topic. While you ride the roller coaster, you are moving along on the track, but
you can point and reorient the frame to a different direction while doing so.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 3

Creating Sweep Surfaces using a Constant
Section
A sweep surface with a constant section does not change its
shape as it is being swept along the trajectories.

• The orientation of the frame can

change.
• Cap ends.
– Closed sections only.

y
• Sketch placement point.

nl
– Specify a different point on
Origin trajectory.

O
– Does not affect the start point
of sweep.

se
Figure 1 – Constant Section Sketch
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Constant Section Figure 3 – Constant Section

C

without Ends Capped with Ends Capped

PT

Creating Sweep Surfaces using a Constant Section

r

When a sketched section sweeps along the Origin trajectory, the section
Fo

geometry can vary and change shape based on how the sketch is
constrained, dimensioned, and so on. The references to which the sketch is
constrained can even change the shape of the section. The section shape
can be variable because the sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory
and updates its shape accordingly.

You can, however, create a sweep that uses a constant section. A constant
section sweep does not change its shape as it is being swept along the
trajectories; only the orientation of the frame on which the section lies
changes. If the Origin trajectory contains entities that are non-tangent, you
must use a constant section.

When creating a sweep surface, you can decide whether to cap the ends of
the surface using the Cap ends option. The Cap ends option, when enabled,
creates planar surfaces at the end of the sweep, merging them with the
surface. In Figure 2, the ends of the resultant surface are not capped, so you

Module 8 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 can “see inside” the surface. In Figure 3, the ends of the surface have been
capped. The Cap ends option is only available for closed sections.

You can also specify a different Sketch placement point. The Sketch
placement point option enables you to specify the point on the Origin
trajectory where you want to sketch the section. The start point of the sweep
is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default location
where you sketch the section if the Sketch placement point is empty.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces using a
Constant Section

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Constant-Section_Surface
CONSTANT_SECTION_SURF.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep surface using a constant section.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
nl
2. Start the Sweep from the
Shapes group.

O
3. Select the curve.

se
U
al

4. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon, notice that Constant Section

rn

is already selected.
te

5. Click Create Section .

In

6. Notice that the default feature

to be created is a solid. In the
Sweep tab, click Surface to
C

create the sweep as a surface.

PT

7. Click Create Section .

8. Click Sketch View from the

r

Graphics toolbar.
Fo

9. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
.

10. Click Center and Point and

sketch a circle at the references
intersection.
11. Click One-by-One and edit the
circle diameter to 2.

Module 8 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click OK .
13. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
14. Notice the surface ends are not
capped.

15. Select the Options tab.

y
16. Select the Cap ends check box.

nl
17. Click Complete Feature .

O
This completes the procedure. se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 7

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal to
Trajectory
The moving frame of a variable section sweep surface is always
normal to a specified trajectory when the Normal To Trajectory
option is specified.
• Normal To Trajectory
– Frame is normal to the Origin
trajectory by default.
– Frame can be normal to any

y
additional trajectory.

nl
♦ Select N check box for that
trajectory.

O
• X direction reference at start.

se
– Sets initial X-orientation of
frame. Figure 1 – Section Normal to
Origin Trajectory
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Section Normal to Figure 3 – Section Normal to Origin

Fo

Chain 1 Trajectory Trajectory, Different X Direction

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal to Trajectory

When the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, the moving
frame is always normal to the specified trajectory. As shown in Figure 1,
the frame is created normal to the Origin trajectory by default, but it can be
normal to any additional trajectory. To switch the trajectory the frame is
normal to, simply select the N check box in the dashboard for that trajectory.
In Figure 1, the frame is normal to the Origin trajectory. In Figure 2, the frame
is normal to the Chain 1 trajectory, and the geometry changes as a result.
Specifying the X Direction Reference at Start
Specifying the X direction reference at start sets the initial X-orientation of
the frame the sketch is created on. The reference specifies the positive X

Module 8 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 for the sketch view. Specifying the X direction reference at start is similar to
specifying the Sketch Orientation Reference for a Sketch Orientation direction
that is always set to Right. In Figure 1, the X direction reference is the right
model surface highlighted in cyan. In Figure 3, the X direction reference
has been changed to the right chamfer surface. As a result, the frame has
rotated slightly to face the new reference, as has the sketched geometry.
Note that if you do not assign an X direction reference at start, the system
assigns a default direction.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal
to Trajectory

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Normal-to-Trajectory_Surface NORM_TRAJ_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep surface normal to trajectory.

1. Start the Sweep from the

y
Shapes group.

nl
2. In the dashboard, click Surface
, if necessary.

O
3. Select the left curve as the origin
trajectory.
4. Notice that the highlighted
trajectory where the yellow arrow se
U
indicates the start.
al

5. In the dashboard, click Create

rn

Section .
te

6. Click Sketch View . Notice

the default sketch orientation.
In

7. Click Cancel and click Yes

to quit Sketcher.
C

8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

PT

Standard Orientation.

9. In the dashboard, select the

References tab.
r
Fo

• Click in the X direction

reference at start collector
and select the right side of the
model.
10. In the dashboard, click Create
Section .

11. Click Sketch View . Notice

both the orientation and the
crosshairs at the sweep origin.

Module 8 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 12. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
.
13. Click Center and Ends and
sketch the 180 degree arc to the
left of the vertical reference.
14. Click 3-Point / Tangent End
and sketch an arc tangent to the
previous arc, snapping to the
horizontal reference.

y
15. Click One-by-One and edit the

nl
180 degree arc radius to 14 and
the tangent arc radius to 32.

O
16. Click OK and orient to the

se
Standard Orientation.
17. Notice the sweep shape.
U
18. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,
select the References tab, press
al

CTRL, and select the curve on

the right as a second trajectory.
rn

• Select the N check box to set

Chain 1 normal.
te
In

19. Click Create Section . Click

C

Sketch View and notice

that the Sketch is the same
PT

except that the Sketch plane is

reoriented.
20. Click Cancel , click Yes,
r

and orient to the Standard

Fo

Orientation.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 11

 21. Select the References tab and
select the N check box to set
Origin back to normal.
• Click in the X direction
reference at start collector
and select the right side
chamfer surface.
22. Notice the sweep shape and
click Complete Feature .

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sweep Surfaces using Constant Normal
Direction
When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is
used, the Z-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified
direction.

• The section becomes

parallel to the specified
reference.

y
• Geometry updates if the
reference is modified.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Section Normal to Trajectory
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Constant Normal Figure 3 – Constant Normal Direction

PT

Direction Set to Datum Plane Reference Modified

r

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Constant Normal Direction

Fo

When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the
Z-axis, or section normal, of the moving frame is parallel to a specified
direction. This means the section becomes parallel to the specified reference.
The direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references.

In Figure 1, the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, so the

geometry and sketch plane are normal to the Origin trajectory. In Figure 2, the
Constant Normal Direction Section plane control has been specified, and the
datum plane has been specified as the reference. Consequently, the Z-axis
of the frame has become normal to the datum plane, and thus the geometry
has updated. In Figure 3, the datum plane angle has been flipped, and you
can view that the variable section sweep geometry has updated as well.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces using Constant
Normal Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Constant-Normal-Direction_Surface
CONSTANT_NORMAL_SURF.PRT
Task 1: Create a variable section sweep surface using constant normal
direction section plane control.

y
1. Enable only the following Datum

nl
Display types: .

O
2. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.

se
3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
U
al

4. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,

rn

click Create Section . Click

Sketch View . Notice the
te

sketch orientation.
In

5. Click OK and orient to the

Standard Orientation.
C
PT

6. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,

select the References tab.
r
Fo

• Edit the Section plane control

to Constant Normal Direction
and select datum plane
NORM.
7. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
8. Notice that the geometry has
updated and the section is now
parallel to the datum plane
NORM.

Module 8 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 9. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,
click Create Section , then
click Sketch View and notice
the new sketch orientation.
10. Click OK .
11. Click Complete Feature
and orient to the Standard
Orientation.

12. Select datum plane NORM, then

y
right-click and select Edit.

nl
• Edit the angle value to -35 and

O
click Regenerate .
13. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
14. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation. se
U
15. Notice that the geometry has
updated.
al

16. Click Complete Feature .

rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 15

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal to
Projection
When the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used,
there are two levels of control provided for the moving frame.

• Y-axis of the moving frame is

normal to specified direction.
• Z-axis is normal to the projection
of the Origin trajectory along the
specified direction.

y
• You must specify the direction.

nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Normal to Projection
Diagram
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Y-axis of Moving Frame

PT

Normal to Direction Reference Figure 3 – Z-axis Normal to

Projection of Origin Trajectory
r
Fo

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal to Projection

When the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used, the Y-axis of
the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction, and the Z-axis is normal
to the projection of the Origin trajectory along the specified direction. The
direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references.

In Figure 2, the Direction reference specified is the datum plane. The Y-axis
of the frame is normal to the datum plane. If the datum plane were rotated,
the Y-axis of the frame would also rotate, to remain normal. The resulting
geometry would rotate as well.

In Figure 3, the Direction reference is still the same datum plane. In this
particular view, the projection of the Origin trajectory onto this datum plane
is directly on top of the Origin trajectory. You can view that the Z-axis of the
frame remains tangent to this projection along the entire sweep length.

Module 8 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces using Normal
to Projection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Normal-to-Projection_Surface NORM_PROJ_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep surface normal to projection.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. In the model tree, select

O
ORIGIN_TRAJ to view it.
3. Right-click PROJECT_SAMPLE

se
and select Unhide.
U
Curve PROJECT_SAMPLE
is shown in the plane for
al

visual reference only.

rn

4. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

5. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,
te

select the References tab.

In

• Notice the available options.

• Edit the Section plane control
C

to Normal To Projection and

select datum plane DTM1.
PT

6. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
7. Notice the sweep curves in this
r

view.
Fo

8. Orient to the RIGHT view

orientation.
9. Notice that the sweep's Z-axis is
tangent to the projection of the
origin trajectory in this view.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 17

 10. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,
click Create Section . Select
Sketch View and notice the
sketch orientation.
11. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation.

y
nl
12. Select the References tab and

O
click Flip to flip the direction.

13. Click Create Section .

Select Sketch View and
notice the sketch orientation. se
U
al
rn
te

14. Click OK and orient to the

In

Standard Orientation.
15. Click Complete Feature .
C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a
Sweep Surface
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame
rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along
the sweep surface.

• Automatic
– Section plane automatically
oriented in XY direction.
• Normal To Surface

y
– Y-axis of section plane normal to

nl
surface on which Origin trajectory
lies.

O
• X-Trajectory

se
– X-axis of section plane “points” to
specified X-Trajectory. U
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control

r
Fo

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Sweep Surface

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the
sketch plane's normal is controlled along the variable section sweep surface.
There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control:

• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction.

Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the
swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an
Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation
at the start of the sweep. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis
direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that have
a straight segment at the start. In Figure 1, the X direction reference at
start is the right surface of the base feature. Consequently, the X-axis of
the frame faces this X direction reference at start along the entire sweep.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 19

• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section plane is normal to the
surface on which the Origin trajectory lies. This is the default option when
the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on surface, one-sided edge of a
surface, two-sided edge of a surface or solid edge, curve created though
intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. The Next option enables
you to move to the next normal surface. In Figure 2, the left image normal
surface is the back surface, whereas in the right image the right surface is
the normal surface.
• X-Trajectory – The X-axis of the section plane passes through the
intersection point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along
the sweep. In Figure 3, the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as
X-Trajectory. The X-axis of the section plane passes through the specified
X-Trajectory, where the Chain 1 trajectory is the X-Trajectory, along the

y
entire sweep. Notice that the geometry twists according to the Chain

nl
1 trajectory.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control
in a Sweep Surface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Horizontal-Vertical-Control_Surface
HORIZ_VERT_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a variable section

sweep surface.

y
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

O
3. In the Sweep tab of the ribbon,
select the References tab and
view the current settings.
4. Notice the two trajectories
selected. se
U
al
rn

5. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
te
In
C
PT

6. Orient to the RIGHT view

r

orientation.
Fo

7. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 21

 8. In the References tab, right-click
the X direction reference at start
and select Remove.

9. Edit the Horizontal/Vertical

y
control to Normal To Surface.

nl
10. Click Next four times to view the
possibilities.

O
se
U
11. In the References tab, select the
al

X check box for Chain 1.

rn

12. Click Complete Feature .

te
In
C
PT

13. Select START from the model

tree, press CTRL, and select
r

END.
Fo

14. Notice that the X-direction of the

Sketch follows the X-trajectory to
reorient the sketch.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Sweep Surfaces Utilizing Multiple
Trajectories
You can create variable section sweep surfaces using multiple
trajectories.

• Each additional trajectory creates

a reference point in Sketcher.
• Reference points move along the
trajectories.
• Different geometry effects

y
are possible depending on

nl
dimensioning scheme.

O
se
Figure 1 – Section Dimensioned
to One Trajectory
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Section Dimensioned Figure 3 – Section Constrained

r

to Two Trajectories to Second Trajectory

Fo

Creating Sweep Surfaces Utilizing Multiple Trajectories

You can create variable section sweep surfaces using multiple trajectories.
Each additional trajectory defined creates a reference point in Sketcher for
the section. The reference points move along each of the trajectories as
the sweep is created. If the sketch is constrained or dimensioned to these
trajectory reference points, the section gets stretched or pulled by these
trajectories to change its shape. Depending on exactly how the section is
constrained or dimensioned to the reference points, different geometry effects
are possible from the same section and trajectory.
In Figure 1, the section is constrained and dimensioned only to one of the
two trajectories and results in the geometry shown. In Figure 2, the section
is constrained and dimensioned to both trajectories. The arc endpoint is

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 23

dimensioned along the X-axis to the additional trajectory reference. The
resulting geometry is pulled only in the X-axis by the additional trajectory. In
Figure 3, the arc endpoint is constrained coincident to the additional trajectory
reference. Hence, the resulting geometry is pulled in both the X and Y axes.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces Utilizing
Multiple Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Multiple-Trajectory_Surface MULT_TRAJ_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a variable section sweep surface using multiple trajectories.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

nl
3. Notice that there are two trajectories selected.

O
4. In the dashboard, click Create Section .

5. Enable only the following

Sketcher Display types:
. se
U
6. Select Sketch View .
al

7. Click Normal and dimension

rn

the right arc endpoint to the

additional trajectory point.
te

8. Select the 32.00 dimension

and click Delete in the Resolve
In

Sketch dialog box. Type 8 as the

value and press ENTER.
C

9. Click OK and orient to the

PT

RIGHT view. Notice that the

additional trajectory does not pull
the Sketch to the right.
r

10. Orient to the FRONT view

Fo

orientation and notice that the

additional trajectory does pull the
Sketch in this view.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 25

 11. Click Create Section .
12. Press CTRL, select the right
arc endpoint and the additional
trajectory point, and then
right-click and select Coincident.
13. Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box twice to delete
the 8.00 dimension and Point On
Entity constraint.

y
nl
14. Click OK and orient to the
RIGHT view. Notice that the

O
additional trajectory pulls the
Sketch to the right.

se
15. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation and notice that the
additional trajectory also pulls
U
the Sketch in this view.
al
rn
te

16. Click Create Section then

click Sketch View .
In

17. Click Point and place a

C

Sketcher point on the left arc

midpoint.
PT

18. Click Normal and dimension

from the left midpoint to the
additional trajectory point.
r
Fo

19. Select the 16.00 dimension

and click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box. Type 72 as
the value and press ENTER.

Module 8 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 20. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation.
21. Click Complete Feature .
22. Right-click Sweep 1 and select
Suppress.
• Click OK.

y
23. Right-click TRAJ_1 and select

nl
Hide.
24. Press CTRL, select TRAJ_2 and

O
TRAJ_3, then right-click and
select Unhide.
25. De-select all geometry.
se
U
26. Start the Sweep , select
Surface , and select the
al

middle curve as the Origin.

27. Press CTRL and select the left
rn

and right curves.

te

28. Click Create Section , then

In

click Sketch View .

29. Click Corner Rectangle

C

and sketch a rectangle using the

PT

reference points as three of four

vertices.

30. Click Delete Segment and

r

delete the bottom line segment.

Fo

31. Click OK and orient to the

Standard Orientation.
32. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 27

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Tangent
Trajectories
You can specify trajectories to be Tangent Trajectories.

• Enable tangency for a trajectory:

– Select the T check box.
– Use the Tangency tab.
• Centerline appears in Sketcher
for each tangent trajectory.

y
• Available options:

nl
– None
– Side 1/Side 2

O
– Selected
Figure 1 – References and

se Tangency Tabs
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Viewing Tangent Figure 3 – Resultant Tangent

Centerlines Geometry
r

Creating Sweep Surfaces using Tangent Trajectories

Fo

You can specify trajectories to be Tangent Trajectories, which are useful for
cases in which you want the surfaces of the sweep to be tangent with existing
geometry. You can specify a trajectory to be tangent either by selecting the T
check box in the References tab, or by using the Tangency tab.

For each tangent trajectory specified, a centerline appears in Sketcher. This

centerline pivots as necessary along the trajectory to maintain the tangency.
Therefore, any geometry constrained to the centerline remains tangent as
well along the sweep. In Figure 2, there is a tangent centerline at each
tangent trajectory.

You can specify a tangent trajectory to be tangent to a surface or to the

surfaces of solid geometry. If you specify a solid geometry edge as the
tangent trajectory, the system enables you to specify to which of the adjacent

Module 8 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 surfaces the resulting geometry will be tangent. The following tangent options
are available in the dashboard's Tangency tab:

• None – Removes the tangency from the trajectory.

• Side 1 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on side
1 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within the
Tangency tab.
• Side 2 – Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on side
2 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within the
Tangency tab.
• Selected – Enables you to manually specify surfaces for the tangent
centerlines in the sweep section.

y
In the References tab there are two different T check boxes for each tangent

nl
trajectory. Toggling the selected check box switches the tangency from Side
1 to Side 2, and vice versa. De-selecting the T check box in the References

O
tab is the same as selecting None from the References drop-down list in
the Tangency tab.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweep Surfaces using Tangent
Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Tangent-Trajectory_Surface TANGENT_TRAJ_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create variable section sweep surfaces with tangent trajectories.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

nl
3. Notice the Origin trajectory and

O
two additional trajectories.
4. Click Complete Feature .

se
U
al

5. Start the Sweep , then click

rn

Surface .
6. Select the curve as the Origin.
te

7. Press CTRL and select the

In

upper-right and upper-left

surface edges.
C

You are selecting edges,

PT

not curves, so you can set

up tangency to the adjacent
surfaces.
r
Fo

8. In the Sweep tab, select the

References tab.
• Select the T check box for both
Chain 1 and Chain 2.

Module 8 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 9. Select the Tangency tab.
• Select Chain 1 and Chain
2, to ensure they reference
the RIGHT_SURF and
LEFT_SURF, respectively.

y
nl
O
10. Select the References tab.

se
• Edit the Section plane control
to Constant Normal Direction
U
and select datum plane
FRONT.
al
rn
te
In
C

11. Click Create Section .

PT

12. Notice the angles centerlines.

These change in angle to remain
tangent as the section is swept.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 31

 13. Click Conic and sketch the
conic, tangent to both the left
and right edges.
14. Edit the RHO dimension to 0.35.
15. Click OK .

y
nl
O
16. Click Complete Feature .

se
U
al
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Sweep Surface Trajectory Options and
Rules
A sweep surface has several trajectory options and rules.
• Trajectory options:
– Flip trajectory direction
– Trajectory handles
♦ Dragging
♦ Extend To

y
♦ Trim At

nl
• Rules
– Tangency

O
– Trajectory requirements

se
U
Figure 1 – Trajectory Start
Point on Left
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Figure 2 – Trajectory Start Figure 3 – Trajectory Both

Point on Right Trimmed and Extended

Analyzing Sweep Surface Trajectory Options and Rules

The following trajectory options are available when creating a variable section
sweep surface:
• Flip trajectory direction – You can click the arrow on the trajectory to flip
the start point of the sweep to the opposite end. The section is sketched
at the indicated start point on the trajectory. In Figure 1, the start point
is located on the left end of the trajectory. Consequently, the section is
sketched from the left side. Conversely, in Figure 2, the start point is
located on the right end of the trajectory, resulting in the section being
sketched from the right side.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 33

• Trajectory handles – You can perform several operations on the trajectory
handles to cause different resultant geometry. The following three options
are available:
– Dragging – You can drag the trajectory end handles to shorten or
lengthen the trajectory. When you shorten the trajectory, the T value at
the end becomes a negative value, and if you lengthen the trajectory,
the T value at the end becomes positive.
– Extend To – Extends the sweep along the current trajectory to a selected
reference. In Figure 2, the right endpoint of the trajectory has been
extended to datum plane OFFSET.
– Trim At – Trims the trajectory at a selected reference location. In Figure
3, the left endpoint of the trajectory has been trimmed at datum point

y
PNT0.

nl
To “reset” the trajectory back to the original curve length you can simply
re-select the curve.

O
Analyzing Sweep Surface Rules
se
U
The following are rules regarding tangency for variable section sweep
surfaces:
al
rn

• When using the Variable section option Variable Section , all entities
within the trajectory must be tangent.
te

• You can use the Constant section option Constant Section for
In

non-tangent trajectories.
• When using the Normal To Projection Section plane control, the projection
C

of entities on the reference must be tangent as viewed in the reference

direction.
PT

The following are rules regarding trajectory requirements for sweep surfaces:
• An X-Trajectory cannot intersect the origin trajectory, except at the
r

endpoints.
Fo

• All trajectories must intersect the moving frame of the sweep, at least for
the desired length of the sweep.
• When using trajectories of different lengths, the shortest trajectory sets the
length of the sweep.

Module 8 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweep Surface Trajectory
Options and Rules

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Options-Rules_Surface OPTIONS_RULES_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Experiment with the various trajectory options and rules for a
variable section sweep surface.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. Start the Sweep then select

O
Surface .
3. Select the center curve as the
Origin.
4. Notice that the start point is on se
U
the left.
al

5. Click the arrow to flip the start

point to the right.
rn

6. Right-click and select Sketch.

te

7. Press CTRL+D to orient to the

Standard Orientation.
In

8. Notice the crosshairs on the

right.
C
PT

9. Click Center and Point and

sketch a circle with center at the
crosshairs.
r

10. Click One-by-One and edit the

Fo

diameter to 40.
11. Click OK .

12. In the graphics window, click the

arrow to flip the start point to the
left.
13. Right-click and select Sketch.
14. Press CTRL+D to orient to
the Standard Orientation and
notice that the Sketch and
crosshairs are now on the left.
15. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 35

 16. Orient to the FRONT view
orientation.
17. Drag the left handle to -15.

18. Right-click the left handle and

select Trim At.

y
19. Select datum point PNT0.

nl
O
20. Right-click the right handle and
se
U
select Extend To.
21. Select datum plane OFFSET.
al
rn
te
In

22. Re-select the center curve as the

Origin.
C

23. Notice that it returns to the

default length.
PT

24. Press CTRL and select the upper

curve.
25. Select the References tab and
r

select the N check box for Chain

Fo

1.
26. Notice the section is normal to
this Chain 1 trajectory.

27. Press CTRL and select the lower

curve as an additional trajectory.
28. Notice that the sweep is limited
to the shortened trajectory.
29. Click Complete Feature .
30. Disable all Datum Display types.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 Using Trajpar with Surface Features
Trajpar stands for “trajectory parameter.”

• Value ranges from 0 to 1.

• Used in Section relations.
• Make dimensions increase/
decrease along a length according
to a formula.
Figure 1 – Sweep with No Relations

y
nl
O
Figure 2 – Using Trajpar to
seFigure 3 – Using Trajpar with
U
Vary Slope a Sine Wave
al

Using Trajpar with Surface Features

rn

Trajpar stands for “trajectory parameter.” Its value ranges from 0 to 1 and can
te

be used with sweeps with variable sections, helical sweeps, and composite
curves.
In

In the context of a sweep, trajpar is a percentage along the sweep. At the

start point of the sweep, its value is 0. At the midpoint of the sweep, its value
C

is 0.5, and at the end of the sweep its value is 1. You can reference the
trajpar variable in section relations for a sweep to control section dimensions
PT

along the sweep length. For example, you can make dimensions increase
or decrease along the length according to a formula. Dimensions can even
be driven to zero.
r
Fo

Consider the figures:

• Figure 1 displays a “default” variable section sweep feature that contains

no relations. The section is constant along the entire sweep length.
• Figure 2 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Section
relation for slope using trajpar in the following equation:
– sd3 = trajpar * 20 + 10, where sd3 is the section's width.
Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the section's width varies from 0 to 20,
plus 10, or therefore varies from 10 to 30 along the sweep length.
• Figure 3 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher
relation for a sine wave using trajpar in the following equation:
– sd3 = 20 + (5 * sin(trajpar * 360 * 4)), where sd3 is the section's width.
Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the sine wave starts at 0 and has a
magnitude of 5 with 4 cycles, plus 20.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 37

PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar with Surface Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Trajpar_Surface TRAJPAR_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Use trajpar to vary the section of a variable section sweep surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Notice the sweep section does
not vary.

y
3. There are currently no relations

nl
in this model.

O
4. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
5. Right-click and select Sketch.

6. Select Sketch View . se

U
7. Select the Tools tab, then click
Relations in the ribbon.
al

• Notice that dimensions display

rn

is an sd# syntax.
• Identify the length dimension
te

number as sd3.
• In the Relations dialog box,
In

type /* Relation for Slope and

press ENTER.
C

• Type sd3=trajpar*20+10.
PT

The length dimension varies

from 0–20, plus 10, or
therefore 10–30.
r
Fo

8. Click OK in the Relations dialog

box and click OK from the
Sketch tab in the ribbon.
9. Click Complete Feature .
10. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

Module 8 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Use trajpar to make a sine wave section for a variable section
sweep surface.

1. Select the Tools tab, then click

Relations in the ribbon.
2. In the Relations dialog box, edit
the Look In from Part to Section.
• Select the sweep feature.
• Comment out the previous
relation by preceding the

y
equation with /*.

nl
• Create a new line, type /*
Relation for Sine wave, and

O
press ENTER.
• Type sd3=20+(5*sin(trajpar*

se
360*4)). U
In this equation, the value
of 20 represents the starting
al

value of the dimension. The

value of 5 represents the
rn

amplitude of the sine wave.

The value of 360 evaluates
te

the full length of the sine

wave. Multiplying trajpar by
In

the value of 4 then yields

4 sine waves through the
length of the sweep.
C
PT

3. Click OK in the Relations dialog

box and click Regenerate .
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 39

Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Sweep
Surface Features
The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum
graph, given the graph name and an x-value.

• EVALGRAPH returns Y-value.

• Trajpar provides the X-value.
• Syntax example:
– sd# = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1",

y
trajpar*100)/2

nl
O
se
U
al

Figure 1 – Original Sketch Swept

Along Trajectory
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Updated Geometry

Figure 2 – Datum Graph using Datum Graph and Trajpar
r
Fo

Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Sweep Surface Features

In addition to the trajpar variable, you can also use the EVALGRAPH function
in a relation. The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum
graph, given the graph name and an x-value. You can combine usage of
the EVALGRAPH function with the trajpar percentage variable to effectively
move along the x-axis of the graph and return the associated y values. In
Figure 1, a section is swept along a trajectory. The section height is then
governed by a relation that uses trajpar and the graph in Figure 2 to produce
the result in Figure 3.

The following syntax should be used in a relation when you want to use the
EVALGRAPH function:

• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("graphname", trajpar*width_of_graph)*vert_scale

Module 8 | Page 40 © 2011 PTC

 The variables are defined as follows:

• sd# – The Sketcher dimension you wish to vary based on the graph.
• “graphname” – The name of the graph feature as it displays in the model
tree.
• width_of_graph – The total X-distance in the graph feature. In Figure 2,
the width of the graph is 100.
• vert_scale – An additional scaling factor that can be applied to increase
the Y-value of the graph feature.
The following are examples of relations created using trajpar with
EVALGRAPH:

y
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar * 100) / 2

nl
In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width

O
of the graph is 100, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the graph is
such that it halves the resultant value.

se
• sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar *360) / 10
In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width
of the graph is 360 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the
U
graph is such that it divides the resultant value by 10.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 41

PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with
Sweep Surface Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Trajpar-Graphs_Surface TRAJPAR_GRAPH_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Use datum graphs and trajpar to modify the geometry of a variable
section sweep surface.

y
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl
2. Edit the definition of GRAPH1
and click Done from the menu

O
manager.
3. Press ENTER to accept the
name for the feature.
4. Observe the Sketch. se
U
5. Click OK .
al

6. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.

rn

7. Notice the section is swept along

a single trajectory.
te

8. Right-click and select Sketch,

In

then select Sketch View .

9. Notice that the section is
C

controlled by two dimensions

only.
PT

10. Select the 25 dimension, then

r

right-click and select Modify.

Fo

11. In the Modify Dimensions dialog

box, drag the Sensitivity handle
all the way to the right.
• Drag the dimension from
approximately 0 to 30.
• This range is what the trajpar
relation will be doing.
• Click Quit Modification .

Module 8 | Page 42 © 2011 PTC

 12. Select the Tools tab, then click
Relations in the ribbon.
• Notice the height dimension
number as sd9.
• Type /* Relation to govern
height according to graph
and press ENTER.
• Type sd9 = EVALGRAPH
("GRAPH1", trajpar * 100) / 2.

y
13. Click OK in the Relations dialog

nl
box and notice that the Sketch
updates.

O
14. Also notice the message in the
message window.

se
U
al
rn

15. Click OK from the Sketch tab

and click Complete Feature .
te

16. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.
In

17. Notice that the relation has

driven surfaces to zero.
C

18. Edit the definition of GRAPH1

PT

and click Done from the menu

manager.
19. Press ENTER to accept the
r

name for the feature.

Fo

20. Modify the horizontal dimensions

to 30, 40, 90, and 100.
21. Click OK .

22. Notice that the geometry has

updated.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 8 | Page 43

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8 | Page 44 © 2011 PTC

 Module 9

y
Helical Sweeps

nl
O
Module Overview

se
The helical sweep feature enables you to create geometry by sweeping a
section along a helix, based on a pitch value. These sweeps are commonly
used to create solid springs or threads; however, they can also be used to
U
create helical swept surfaces, which may be used as construction or reference
geometry for other surfaces, or used in the creation of datum curves.
al
rn

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
te

• Understand the theory behind helical sweeps.

In

• Utilize helical sweeps for surfaces.

• Analyze helical sweep surface profile and pitch variations.
C

• Utilize variable sections in helical sweep surfaces.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 1

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory
Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other
helical geometry.

• Can be protrusions, cuts, or

surfaces.
• Helical sweep components:
– Sketch profile
– Sketch section
– Pitch values

y
nl
• Helical sweep options:
– Pitch points

O
– Section orientation
– Variable section Figure 1 – Threads Cut Into
– Helix direction
se a Part Model
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Helical Surface

PT

Figure 2 – Spring Geometry

Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory

r
Fo

Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical

geometry. The dashboard interface enables helical sweeps to be created by
adding or removing material, or as surfaces. In Figure 1, the threads were
created by removing material, in Figure 2, the spring was created by adding
material, and in Figure 3, the helical geometry was created with surfaces.

Components of a Helical Sweep

The helical sweep feature uses each of the following components to generate
a helical shape:
• Sketch profile – Defines the shape and diameter of the helix. For example,
the sketched profile for a typical spring is a straight line parallel to the
center axis.
• Sketch section – Defines the shape to be swept along the helix. For
example, the section for a typical spring is a circular section.

Module 9 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Pitch values – The distance between the spring coils. The pitch value can
also be defined by a relation, for example, the profile length divided by
the number of coils.

Helical Sweep Options

The following options are available in the dashboard when defining a helical
sweep feature:

• Pitch points – Adding a single pitch value causes the pitch to remain
constant along the entire sweep profile, whereas adding multiple pitch
values enables you to define a graph that specifies the pitch values at
specific points.

y
nl
• Section orientation – Defines how
the cross-section is oriented as

O
it sweeps along the trajectory.
For Normal to trajectory, the
cross-section is oriented normal

se
to the trajectory, as shown in
the upper image of Figure 4.
U
For Through axis of revolution,
the cross-section lies in a plane
that passes through the axis of
al

revolution, as shown in the lower

rn

image of Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Cross-section Angle
te

• Variable section – Defines the behavior of the cross-section as it travels

In

along the trajectory of the sweep. Vary section enables the cross-section
to change size and shape, based on its position along the sweep
trajectory.
C
PT

• Helix direction – Defines which direction the trajectory is wrapped about

the helix. For Use Right Handed, the trajectory is defined using the
right-hand rule, and for Use Left Handed the trajectory is defined using
the left-hand rule.
r
Fo

Using Trajpar with a Helical Sweep

Helical Sweeps, like variable section sweeps, can utilize the trajpar
parameter. Trajpar can reference a datum graph using the EVALGRAPH
function if desired. Trajpar can also be used in section relations to control
dimensions as the section is swept along the helix. For example, trajpar
enables you to vary the spring section size along the swept helix length, or it
enables you to taper the end of a worm gear helix to blend into the shaft.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 3

Utilizing Helical Sweeps for Surfaces
Helical sweep surfaces are typically used to create datum curves
and other “construction” geometry.

Uses include:
• “Construction” geometry
– Typically used to create other
geometry
– Trim/Merge with other surfaces

y
• Datum curve construction

nl
– Create helical or spiral curves

O
se
Figure 1 – Helical Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Helical Curve Figure 3 – Spiral Curve

PT

Utilizing Helical Sweeps for Surfaces

r

Helical sweep surfaces are typically used to create “construction” surfaces

Fo

and datum curves. These “construction” surfaces are then often used to
create other solid geometry or datum curves. For example, in Figure 1,
a “ribbon” surface was created by sweeping a line about a cylinder. This
surface can now be used to create other geometry by trimming or merging
it with other surfaces.
Helical sweep surfaces can also be used for the construction of datum
curves. The helical surface can be intersected with other surfaces to create
various helical or spiral datum curves. In Figure 2, the helical datum curve
was created by intersecting a helical sweep surface with the cylindrical tube
surface. In Figure 3, a helical sweep surface was intersected with a drafted
tube surface to create a cone-shaped helical datum curve. The helical datum
curve was then projected onto the flat, disc surface to create the resulting
spiral surface.

Module 9 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Utilizing Helical Sweeps for Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Helical_Surface HELICAL_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Use a helical surface to create a helical curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Helical Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down list in
the Shapes group.

y
3. Click Surface from the dashboard.

nl
4. Select the References tab in the dashboard and click Define.

O
5. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane.
• Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

6. Enable only the following

se
U
Sketcher Display types:
.
al

7. Click Sketch View from the

rn

Setup group in the ribbon.

te

8. Click Centerline from the

Sketching group and sketch
In

a centerline on the vertical

reference.
C

9. Click One-by-One then

right-click and select Axis of
PT

Revolution.
10. Click Project and select the
left vertical edge.
r

• Click Close in the Type dialog

Fo

box.
11. Click OK .

12. Edit the Pitch value to 4.

13. Right-click and select Helix
Cross section.
14. Click Line Chain and sketch
a horizontal line from the
bottom-left vertical reference.
15. Click One-by-One and edit the
length to 5.
16. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 5

 17. Click Complete Feature .
18. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
19. De-select all geometry.

y
nl
20. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.
21. Press CTRL and select both the

O
helix and the cylindrical tube
surfaces.
22. Click Intersect
Editing group.
from the
se
U
23. Edit the selection filter to Smart.
al

24. In the model tree, right-click

Helical Sweep 1 and select Hide.
rn

Task 2: Use a helical surface to create a spiral curve.

te

1. In the model tree, right-click

In

Draft 1 and select Edit.

2. Edit the draft angle to 20 degrees
C

and click in the graphics area

twice.
r PT
Fo

3. Select the curve and click

Project .
4. Select the flat, disc surface.
5. Right-click and select Select
Direction Reference.
6. Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.
7. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Helical Sweep Surface Profile and
Pitch Variations
You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and
you can control the profile shape.
• Controlling pitch values along
length:
– Added via Pitch tab in
dashboard
♦ First added value is the

y
endpoint pitch.

nl
♦ Additional points are added
along length.

O
– Locate pitch value drag
handles using:
♦ By value
♦ By Ratio se
U
♦ By Reference
Figure 1 – Constant Profile, Constant
al

• Controlling profile shape: and Variable Pitch

– Profile must be tangent to use
rn

Normal to trajectory option.

– Example shapes:
te

♦ Straight line = Cylinder

In

♦ Angled line = Cone

C
PT

Figure 2 – Variable Profile, Constant

r

and Variable Pitch

Fo

Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations

You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and you can
control the profile shape.

Controlling Pitch Values Along the Profile Length

You control the pitch along the profile by adding pitch points at the locations
you want the pitch to be different. The first value added is the endpoint
pitch. If no others are specified, then the pitch is constant as shown in the
left image of Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Additional pitch points are added along the sweep axis either through the
Pitch tab in the dashboard, or by right-clicking and selecting Add Pitch Point.
When a point is added, a drag handle is available for it. The location of each
point can be defined by the following options:

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 7

• By value – Distance along sweep axis measured from the start point.
• By reference – Point can snap to a datum point, datum plane, geometry
reference, and so on.
• By ratio – Measured as a length ratio along sweep axis.
As you specify the pitch at the various points, the system displays them on the
sweep axis so that you can view the pitch specified at each point. In the right
image of Figure 1 and Figure 2, the pitch begins at a value of 1, increases to
4, and then decreases back to 1. This is in contrast to the left image of Figure
1 and Figure 2, where the pitch is a constant value of 1 along the entire profile.

Controlling Profile Shape

y
You can control the profile shape based on how you sketch it. The following

nl
are examples of the resulting spring shape for a given sketched section:
• Straight line – Creates a cylindrical shaped spring, as shown in Figure 1.

O
• Angled line – Creates a cone-shaped spring.

se
• Multiple lines/arcs – Enables you to create a custom profile. For example,
in Figure 2, the profile was created with three vertical lines and two diagonal
lines connecting them. The resulting spring bows out in the center. You
U
can even use splines and conics.
To use the Normal to trajectory option, the profile entities must be tangent to
al

each other.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Helical Sweep Surface Profile
and Pitch Variations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Helical_Profile-Pitch_Surface
PROFILE-PITCH_SURFACE.PRT
Task 1: Edit the shape of a spring by modifying its profile and pitch.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. In the model tree, expand Helical

O
Sweep 1.
3. Select Sketch 1, then right-click

se
and select Edit.
• Notice the profile sketch
U
consists of multiple line
segments.
al

• Notice the vertical centerline

and datum points on the
rn

sweep axis (the centerline).

te

4. Drag or edit the center dimension

to 6.
In

• Click in the background to

regenerate the model.
C

• Notice the changed profile of

the spring.
r PT
Fo

5. Click Undo from the Quick

Access toolbar.

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 9

 6. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the model tree, then right-click and select
Edit Definition.
7. Select the Pitch tab.
• Edit the existing pitch point to 1.00 and press ENTER.
• In graphics window, select the Pitch and right click to Add pitch
point and edit pitch to 1 and press ENTER.
• Select the Pitch, then right click and select Add pitch point.
• Press Shift and Ctrl and snap it to first datum point from the bottom
and edit pitch to 1 and press ENTER
• Select the Pitch, then right click and select Add pitch point.

y
• Press Shift and Ctrl and snap it to second datum point from the

nl
bottom and edit pitch to 4 and press ENTER

O
• Select the Pitch, then right click and select Add pitch point.
• Press Shift and Ctrl and snap it to third datum point from the bottom

se
and edit pitch to 4 and press ENTER
• Select the Pitch, then right click and select Add pitch point.
U
• Press Shift and Ctrl and snap it to fourth datum point from the
bottom and edit pitch to 1 and press ENTER
al

8. In dashboard, pitch values are

rn

as shown.
te
In
C

9. Click Complete Feature .

r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 10. Select Sketch 1, right-click,
select Edit, and edit the center
dimension to 6.
• Click in the background to
regenerate the model.
11. Select the Sketch 1 feature in
the model tree, then right-click
and select Hide.

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 11

Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweep
Surfaces
You can define a section for a helical sweep surface to be
variable along the length of the sweep.

• Along Trajectory options include:

– Keep constant section
– Vary section
• Constrain the section to other

y
geometry with Vary section.

nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing the Original
Constant Section Helical

se
U Sweep Surface
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Viewing the Variable

In

Figure 2 – Redefining the Section Section Helical Sweep Surface

C

Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweep Surfaces

PT

You can define a section for a helical sweep surface to be variable along the
length of the sweep. This is accomplished by selecting the desired Along
Trajectory option in the dashboard. Along Trajectory can be set to either
r

of the following:
Fo

• Keep Constant Section

• Vary Section
By setting the Vary Section option, you are able to constrain the section to
other geometry, as long as the system can regenerate the section along
the entire helical path. For example, a surface that followed the range of
the helical sweep can be utilized as a reference, whereas a datum plane
referenced in the sketch plane is not valid.

Module 9 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical
Sweep Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sweep\Helical_Variable-Section_Surface
HELICAL_VAR-[Link]
Task 1: Redefine a helical sweep to use the Vary Section option.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Notice the constant section in the

nl
helical sweep surface feature.

O
3. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Unhide. se
U
• Edit the definition of Extrude 1
al

and notice it is a surface.

• Click Complete Feature .
rn
te

4. In the model tree, right-click

Helical Sweep 1 and select Edit
In

Definition.
5. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select FRONT from the Named
C

Views drop-down list.

PT

6. Notice the current sweep profile

raises the center of the circular
section.
r
Fo

7. In the dashboard, click Create

Section .
8. Click Coincident from
Constrain group in the ribbon
and constrain the vertex to be
collinear with the cylindrical
surface.
• Click Delete in the Resolve
Sketch dialog box to delete the
dimension.
9. Click OK .

© 2011 PTC Module 9 | Page 13

 10. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Select Vary Section.
11. Click Complete Feature .
12. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Hide.
13. Notice that the current sweep
profile still raises the center of the
circular section, but the section
is constrained to the cylinder,

y
resulting in a smaller diameter.

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Module 10

y
Swept Blends

nl
O
Module Overview

se
The swept blend feature utilizes multiple sections, placed along a main
trajectory. The system creates geometry by blending between the sections,
while sweeping along the trajectory path. The sections can vary in shape and
U
size along the swept blend. An additional trajectory can also be used to orient
the sections along the main trajectory.
al

In this module, you will learn how to use the swept blend to create surface
rn

geometry, as well as the many options to control the orientation and tangency
of the sections.
te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand the theory behind swept blends.
C

• Create swept blends by selecting sections.

PT

• Create swept blends by sketching sections.

• Analyze the section options for a swept blend.
• Analyze swept blend section plane control.
r
Fo

• Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.

• Analyze swept blend tangency.
• Analyze swept blend options.
• Analyze swept blend rules.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 1

Understanding Swept Blend Theory
A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend
multiple sections along a main trajectory.

• Create a solid or surface feature.

• Add or remove material.
• Main components:
– Trajectories
♦ Use one or two
– Sections

y
♦ Two sections minimum

nl
♦ Each must have same

O
number of entities
♦ Select or sketch sections Figure 1 – Swept Blend Feature

se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Trajectories Highlighted Figure 3 – Sections Highlighted

te

in Green in Green
In

Understanding Swept Blend Theory

A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple
C

sections along a main trajectory. With the Swept Blend feature, you can
PT

create a solid or surface feature. You can add or remove material, and the
sections can be open or closed.

Trajectory Information
r
Fo

A swept blend can have two trajectories: an Origin trajectory (required) and
a Secondary trajectory (optional). The swept blend in the figures uses both
an Origin trajectory and a Secondary trajectory. To define a trajectory of the
swept blend, you can select a sketched curve, a chain of datum curves, or
edges. Each selected trajectory has end handles that you can dynamically
drag if you want the feature to not follow the entire trajectory. You can specify
a length from the end of the trajectory, or you can use the Trim At and Extend
To options. Plus, you can use SHIFT to snap the trajectory endpoint onto
other existing geometry.

Section Information
Each Swept Blend feature must have at least two sections, and additional
sections may be added between these two sections. While the sections may
change shape, they must each contain the same number of entities. The one
exception to this rule is that you can blend sections to a point. You can also

Module 10 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 add blend vertices to sections that need additional entities to equal those of
other sections. Each blend vertex counts as one entity.
You can sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices
or datum points on the Origin Trajectory. To orient a section, you specify
the direction of the sketch plane (the Z-axis) and the horizontal and vertical
direction to that plane (the X or Y axis).
You can use the Selected Sections option to select existing sketches, or edge
and curve references and use them as sections for a swept blend.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 3

Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by Selecting
Sections
You can select existing sketches to become sections for a swept
blend surface.
• Insert
– Enables you to select the next
section
– Section inserted after currently
selected section

y
– # entities in section displayed

nl
• Remove

O
– Removes currently selected
section

se
• Details Figure 1 – Selecting Sections
– Enables advanced selection
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Inserting a Section Figure 3 – Start Point Moved

C

Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by Selecting Sections

PT

After selecting an Origin trajectory, you can select existing sketches or edge
and curve references to become sections for the swept blend surface.
r

Options for selecting sections include:

Fo

• Insert – Used to insert the next section, after the currently selected section.
If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between
these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert. In
Figure 1, two sections are selected, one at the trajectory start and another
at the trajectory end. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, a new section was inserted.
Selected sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The
system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each
section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use
the divide tool to maintain an equal number or entities. For example, you
can blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three
arcs. In the figures, a circle is blended into a rectangle.
• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.
• Details – Opens the Chain dialog box for advanced selection tools for
selecting series of chains for sections.

Module 10 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Manipulating Selected Sections
The start point is displayed on the selected section. The system lines up the
start points from each section. A twisting effect occurs if the start points for
each of the sections are not in same relative position, as shown in Figure 2.
You can select the start points and drag them to a different vertex to remove
or change the twisting effect, as shown in Figure 3.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by
Selecting Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Select_Sections SELECT_SECTIONS_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a swept blend surface by selecting sections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the model tree, select SEC_1.

nl
3. Notice that the feature is a

O
rectangle.

4. Edit the definition of SEC_2. se

U
5. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
al

.
rn

6. Notice that this section is a circle

divided into four entities.
te

7. Click OK .
In

8. Edit the definition of SEC_3.

9. Notice that this section consists
C

of four arcs.
PT

10. Click OK .
11. De-select all geometry.
r
Fo

12. Click Swept Blend from the

Shapes group in the ribbon.
13. Click Surface from the
dashboard, if necessary.
14. Select the trajectory.

Module 10 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 15. In the dashboard, select the
Sections tab.
• Select the Selected Sections
option.
16. Select the right circle as Section
1.

17. In the Sections tab, click Insert

and select the rectangle as
Section 2.

y
nl
O
18. In the Section tab, select Section

se
1 and click Insert.
19. Notice that a new section is
U
inserted, making Section 2 now
Section 3.
al

20. Select the left circle as Section 2.

rn

21. Notice the twisting effect in the

geometry.
te

22. Drag the start point up to the

next entity endpoint to remove
In

the twisting effect.

C
r PT

23. Click Complete Feature .

Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 7

 24. In the model tree, right-click
SEC_1 and select Edit.
25. Edit the angle from 0 to –20 and
click Regenerate .
26. Spin the model, and notice that
the sections do not have to all be
the same angle.

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by Sketching
Sections
You can create all the sections within the swept blend surface
feature if desired.

• Select trajectory
– You can flip the trajectory
direction.
• Select section location

y
– Default locations

nl
– Optional locations
• Sketch the section Figure 1 – Sketching Sections

O
– Start point

se
• Manage Sketched Sections
– # entities in section
U
displayed
– Insert
al

– Remove
rn

Figure 2 – Changed Section Location

te

Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by Sketching Sections

In

You can create all the sections within the swept blend surface feature if
desired. Use the following procedure to create swept blend surfaces by
C

sketching the sections.

PT

Selecting the Trajectory

First, you must select the Origin trajectory. The direction of the sweep along
r

the trajectory is displayed with an arrow. You can flip the direction of the
Fo

arrow, which reverses the direction of the swept blend.

Selecting the Section Location

Next, you can select where to place a section along the trajectory. The
default locations are the trajectory start and trajectory end, both denoted by a
green “X” symbol, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Optionally, you can also
select vertices or datum points as the location to place a section. In Figure
1, Section 2 is placed at the vertex of the arc and line. When you select the
location of the section, it is specified in the Section Location collector. You can
relocate a section after sketching it with this option by selecting the section,
activating the Section Location collector, and selecting a different chain end,
vertex, or datum point as the section location. In Figure 2, the section location
for Section 2 has been relocated to the right trajectory endpoint.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 9

Sketching the Sections
Once the location for a section is specified, you can sketch that section.
When sketching the section in Sketcher, a start point appears on the first
entity sketched. The system lines up the start points from each section when
they are swept along the trajectory. A twisting effect occurs if the start points
are not in the same relative position. You can change the location of the
start point within Sketcher by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, and
selecting Start Point. Unlike selecting sections for creating swept blends, you
cannot move the start point except within Sketcher.

Managing Sketched Sections

The sketched sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard.

y
The system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each

nl
section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use the
divide tool to maintain an equal number or entities. For example, you can

O
blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs.
Within the Section tab of the dashboard, the following two options are
available for managing sketched sections:
se
U
• Insert – Used to insert the next section, after the currently selected section.
If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between
these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert.
al

• Remove – Removes the currently selected section.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blend Surfaces by
Sketching Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Sketch_Sections SKETCH_SECTIONS_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Create a swept blend surface by sketching a section.

y
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

nl
2. Click Swept Blend from the Shapes group in the ribbon.

O
3. Click Surface from the dashboard, if necessary.
4. Select the curve as the trajectory.

5. In the dashboard, select the

se
U
Sections tab.
6. Notice that the ends are available
al

points for sketching sections.

rn

7. Select the left endpoint and click

Sketch.
te

8. Enable only the following

In

Sketcher Display types:

.
C

9. Click Corner Rectangle

and, starting in the upper-left
PT

corner, sketch a symmetrical

rectangle.
10. Click One-by-One and edit the
r
Fo

width and height to 150 and 100,

respectively.
11. Click OK .

12. In the Sections tab, click Insert.

13. Select the vertex between the
line and arc and click Sketch.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 11

 14. Click Sketch View .
15. Click Center and Point and
sketch a 100 diameter circle.
16. Click Centerline from the
Sketching group and sketch two
centerlines at angles of 45.

17. Click Divide from the Editing

group and divide the circle

y
at each of the four centerline
intersections.

nl
18. Select the upper-left corner, then

O
right-click and select Start Point.

se
19. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation. U
20. Select the far right trajectory
endpoint, and notice that the
section relocates.
al
rn

21. In the Sections tab, select

Section 1 and click Insert.
te

22. Select datum point PNT0 from

the model tree and click Sketch.
In

23. Click Sketch View .

C

24. Click Corner Rectangle

PT

and, starting in the upper-left

corner, sketch a symmetrical
rectangle.
r

25. Click One-by-One and edit the

Fo

width and height to 75.

26. Click OK .

27. Orient to the Standard

Orientation.
28. Right-click and select Trajectory.
29. Click the trajectory direction
arrow to flip the blend.
30. Notice that the sections maintain
the same reference numbers.
31. Click Complete Feature .

Module 10 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 32. Select datum point PNT0 in the
model tree, then right-click and
select Edit.
33. Edit the point ratio value from 0.5
to 0.7 and click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 13

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section Options
There are numerous section options available when creating
a swept blend surface.

• Z-Rotation
– Each section independent
– Range: +/-120 degrees
• Section X-axis Directions
– Sets X-axis direction for active

y
section

nl
– Only available with Automatic
Horiz/Vert control

O
• Blend vertices
– Sketched sections:

se
♦ Managed in section
– Selected sections:
U
♦ Managed using Sections tab Figure 1 – Blend Vertices
and drag handles
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Modified Section

X-axis Directions Figure 3 – Z-Rotation Modified
r
Fo

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section Options

Consider the following section options that are available when creating a
swept blend surface:

Adding Blend Vertices

For a sketched section, blend vertices are created and managed in the
section itself, within Sketcher. This means that you add blend vertices within
Sketcher, while sketching the section.
For selected sections, blend vertices are added using the Add Blend Vertex
option in the Sections tab of the dashboard. Each blend vertex displays in the
graphics window as a drag handle. You can move the blend vertex locations

Module 10 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 by dragging their handles. In Figure 1, two blend vertices were added to the
rear section and dragged to the top corners.

You cannot add a blend vertex at the start point of a section.

You can add blend vertices only to start and end sections which
are located at trajectory vertices. You cannot add blend vertices
to intermediate sections.

Modifying the Section X-axis Directions

y
The Section X-axis directions option enables you to set the X-axis direction
for the active section. When Horizontal/Vertical control in the References tab

nl
is specified as Automatic, the Section X-axis directions in the Sections tab
is synchronized with the X direction reference at the start in the References

O
tab. This option is available only when Automatic is specified as the
Horizontal/Vertical control. In Figure 2, the X-axis direction was modified

se
from one datum plane to another datum plane. Notice how the section has
been reoriented.
U
al

Modifying the Z-Rotation

rn

You can specify the section’s rotation angle about the Z-axis for each location
where a sketched section is defined. Rotation angles can range in value
te

between –120 and +120 degrees. In Figure 3, the Z-rotation was modified for
each section individually to create different geometry.
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section
Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Section_Options OPTIONS_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Edit the swept blend Z rotation and section X-axis direction.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Edit the definition of Swept
Blend 1.

nl
3. Select the Sections tab and

O
select Section 2.
• Edit the Rotation angle to 20.

4. Select Section 3 and click

Sketch. se
U
5. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
al

.
rn

6. Click Sketch View from the

te

Setup group in the ribbon.

7. Notice the default X-direction in
In

the Sketch view.

8. Press CTRL, select both
C

construction lines, right-click,

and select Geometry.
PT

9. Click Delete Segment and

r

delete all of the top, right, and

Fo

bottom line segments.

10. Click One-by-One , select the
right triangle point, and then
right-click and select Blend
Vertex.
11. Notice the triangle faces in the
X-direction.

Module 10 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click OK and orient to the
Standard Orientation.
13. In the Sections tab, click in
the Section X-axis directions
collector and select datum plane
DTM1 from the model tree.
14. Notice the change in geometry
orientation.
15. Click Complete Feature .

y
Task 2: Create a swept blend surface and add blend vertices to a section.

nl
O
1. Click Swept Blend from the
shapes tab in the ribbon.
2. Click Surface from the
dashboard, if necessary.
se
U
3. Select TRAJ_2 as the trajectory.
al
rn
te
In

4. In the dashboard, select the

Sections tab.
C

• Select the Selected Sections

PT

option.
5. Select the rectangle as Section
1.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 17

 6. In the Sections tab, click Insert
and select the front sketch as
Section 2.
• Notice that the # column in
the Sections tab has 4 and 6
entities, respectively.

y
nl
7. Select Section 1 and drag the

O
start point to the lower-left.
8. Click Add Blend Vertex and
drag it to the upper-right corner.
9. Click Add Blend Vertex again se
U
and drag it to the upper-left
corner, if necessary.
al

10. Notice the # column is now 6 and

rn

6, respectively.
11. Click Complete Feature .
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section Plane
Control
You can modify the swept blend surface's moving section frame
orientation to create different geometry.

• Section plane control options:

– Normal To Trajectory
♦ Normal to Origin trajectory
by default
– Constant Normal Direction

y
♦ Section Z-axis parallel to

nl
specified reference direction

O
– Normal To Projection
♦ Origin trajectory projected
Figure 1 – Section Normal

se
onto specified reference
U to Trajectory
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Section Constant Figure 3 – Section Normal

PT

Normal Direction to Projection

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section Plane Control

r

Each sketched or selected section is placed on a moving section frame. You

Fo

can adjust the orientation of this moving section frame using section plane
control settings in the References tab of the dashboard.
The following three section plane control options are available:
• Normal To Trajectory – The moving section frame is always normal to a
specified trajectory. By default, the section frame is normal to the Origin
trajectory. If you have specified a Secondary trajectory, you can make the
section frame normal to it by selecting the N check box in the References
tab for the Secondary trajectory. In Figure 1, the section frame has been
specified normal to the Secondary trajectory. Notice that the section is
perpendicular to this Secondary trajectory.
• Constant Normal Direction – The Z-axis (or section normal) of the moving
frame is parallel to a specified direction. In the case of a datum plane, the
Z-axis is parallel to the plane normal direction, so the section becomes
parallel to the plane. The Direction reference collector enables you to add

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 19

 or delete the reference to which the Z-axis is parallel. In Figure 2, the
section plane control has been set to Constant Normal Direction, with the
direction reference set to a datum plane. Notice that the section is parallel
to the datum plane.
• Normal To Projection – The section frame remains normal to the Origin
trajectory as it is viewed along the projection direction. The Z-axis is
tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory at the direction specified.
In Figure 3, the section plane control has been set to Normal To Projection.
The Origin trajectory is projected onto Direction reference TOP. The
resulting section frame is normal to this projected Origin trajectory.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Section
Plane Control

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Sect_Plane_Surf SECT_PLANE_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the section plane control options available for a swept
blend surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select TRAJ_1.

nl
3. Orient to the RIGHT view

O
orientation.
4. Notice that the trajectory is

se
curved in this view.
5. Orient to the Standard
U
Orientation.
al

6. Edit the definition of Swept

Blend 1.
rn

7. In the dashboard, select the

References tab.
te

• Notice that the Section plane

control is Normal To Trajectory.
In

• Press CTRL and select the

additional trajectory.
C

8. Orient to the TOP view

PT

orientation.
9. In the References tab, select the
N check box for the Secondary
r

trajectory.
Fo

10. Notice that the section is normal

to the Secondary trajectory.

11. In the References tab, select

the N check box for the Origin
trajectory.
• Right-click Secondary and
select Remove.
12. Reorient the model and notice
the section is normal to the
Origin trajectory.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 21

 13. Edit the Section plane control
from Normal To Trajectory to
Constant Normal Direction.
14. Enable Plane Display .
15. Select datum plane DTM1 from
the model tree, orient to the
TOP view orientation, and notice
that the section is parallel to the
datum plane.
16. Orient to the Standard

y
Orientation.

nl
17. Edit the Section plane control

O
from Constant Normal Direction
to Normal To Projection.

se
• Select the References tab to
close it and select datum plane
TOP from the model tree.
U
• Select the References tab
and click Flip.
al

18. Orient to the RIGHT view

rn

orientation.
19. Notice that the section is normal
te

to datum plane TOP.

20. Click Complete Feature .
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a
Swept Blend Surface
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame
rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along
the swept blend surface.

• Automatic
– Section plane automatically
oriented in XY direction
• Normal To Surface

y
– Y-axis “points” normal to

nl
selected surface

O
• X-Trajectory
– Only available with two

se
trajectories
– X-axis of section plane “points”
U
to Secondary trajectory
Figure 1 – Automatic Control
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Normal to Surface Control Figure 3 – X-Trajectory Control

Fo

Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Surface
Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation
around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the swept blend surface.
There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control:
• Automatic – The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction.
Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the
swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an
Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference
collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation
at the start of the swept blend. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the
X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that
have a straight segment at the start.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 23

 When the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as Automatic, you can
specify the X-Direction reference at the start. The X-Direction reference at
the start sets the initial X-orientation of the section frame. The X-orientation
is the positive X direction in the sketch view for the section. You can either
specify this reference or leave it at Default, in which the system specifies
a default orientation. In Figure 1, the Horizontal/Vertical control is set to
Automatic. In turn, the X-Direction reference at start is a datum plane.

• Normal To Surface – The Y-axis of the section frame points in the direction
of the surface selected, normal to any surface associated with the Origin
trajectory. This is the default selection when the Origin trajectory has
at least one associated surface. Click Next to toggle through possible
surfaces, as shown in Figure 2.

y
nl
• X-Trajectory – This option becomes available when there is both an Origin
and Secondary trajectory specified. The X-trajectory is the Secondary

O
trajectory, and it must be at least as long as the Origin trajectory. For this
option, the X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection
point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep,

se
as shown in Figure 3. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control
in a Swept Blend Surface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Horiz-Vert_Control HORIZ-VERT_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend surface.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. View the geometry:
• Orient to the TOP view

O
orientation.
• Orient to the RIGHT view

se
orientation. U
3. Press CRTL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.

4. Edit the definition of Swept

al

Blend 1.
rn

5. In the dashboard, select the

References tab and view the
te

current settings.
6. Notice that the current
In

Horizontal/Vertical control is
specified as Normal To Surface
C

in the drop-down list.

• Click Next four times to view
PT

the different possibilities.

7. Select Automatic from the

r

Horizontal/Vertical control
Fo

drop-down list.
8. Notice that the sections
reoriented.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 25

 9. Click in the X direction reference
at start collector, select the
References tab to close it, and
select datum plane RIGHT from
the model tree.
• Select the References tab to
open it and click Flip.

10. In the graphics window, select

y
Section 2, then right-click and
select Sketch.

nl
11. Enable only the following

O
Sketcher Display types: .

se
12. Click Sketch View from the
Setup group in the ribbon.
U
13. Notice the current X direction.
14. Click OK .
al

15. Orient to the Standard

rn

Orientation.
16. Right-click and select Trajectory
te

if necessary.
In

17. Press CTRL and select the

Secondary trajectory.
C
PT

18. Select the References tab.

r

• Edit the Horizontal/Vertical

Fo

control from Automatic to

X-Trajectory.
• Notice the X check box is now
selected for the Secondary
trajectory.
19. Notice that the sections
reoriented.

Module 10 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 20. Right-click and select Sketch.

21. Click Sketch View .

22. Notice the new X-direction.
23. Click OK .
24. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 27

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Tangency
You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end
of the swept blend surface.

• Tangency conditions:

– Free

– Tangent

– Normal

y
• Sketcher point conditions:

nl
– Sharp
– Smooth

O
Figure 1 – Geometry Before
Tangency

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 3 – Smooth and Sharp

In

Figure 2 – Geometry After Tangency Conditions

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Tangency

C

You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept
PT

blend surface. You can change tangency condition settings either in the
Tangency tab of the dashboard or by right-clicking the tangency condition
icons in the graphics window and selecting the desired condition.
r

The three tangency conditions available are:

Fo

• Free – The start or end section is a free end, which means that no
tangency is defined.

• Tangent – The specified end is to be tangent to the selected adjacent

surfaces. You must specify the adjacent surface that each edge is to be
tangent to. The Entities collector advances automatically to the next entity.

• Normal – The start or end of the swept blend is normal to the section
plane. The Entities collectors are not available and no references are
required.
If a Sketcher point is used at the start or end of the swept blend feature, you
can define the condition for the geometry as Sharp or Smooth.

Module 10 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Tangency

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Swept_Blend_Tangency TANGENCY_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Add tangency constraints to the End Sections of a swept blend

surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Swept

y
Blend 2.

nl
3. In the dashboard, select the
Tangency tab.

O
• Edit the Boundary Condition
for the Start Section from Free

se
to Tangent.
• Select the surface adjacent to
U
the highlighted edge.
4. Continue selecting the remaining
al

three adjacent surfaces. Notice

that the first surface highlights
rn

after all four surfaces have been

selected.
te

5. In the graphics window,

In

right-click the icon for the

End Section and select Tangent.
C

• Select the surface adjacent to

the highlighted edge.
r PT
Fo

6. Continue selecting the remaining

three adjacent surfaces.
7. Notice the change in the
geometry shape.
8. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 29

Task 2: Edit the tangency for a Sketcher point condition of a swept blend
surface.

1. Edit the definition of Swept

Blend 1.

y
nl
2. Select Section 2, if necessary.
3. Right-click and select Sketch.

O
4. Enable only the following

se
Sketcher Display types: .
5. Drag a window around the
U
existing rectangle sketch and
delete it.
al

6. Click Point and place a

sketch point at the crosshairs.
rn

7. Click OK .
te

8. Orient to the Standard

In

Orientation.
9. Click Preview Feature .
C

10. Notice the sharp cap that has

formed at the end.
r PT

11. Click Resume Feature .

Fo

12. In the dashboard, select the

Tangency tab.
• Edit the Boundary Condition
for the End Section from Sharp
to Smooth.
13. Click Complete Feature .

Module 10 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 14. Right-click Draft 1 and select
Edit.
15. Edit the draft angle from 10 to
-10 and click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 31

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Options
You can cap the ends of a swept blend surface and specify blend
control.
• Cap ends
– Available for surfaces with
closed sections
• Blend control
– No blend control
– Set perimeter control

y
♦ Create curve through center

nl
of blend.
– Set cross-section area control

O
♦ Predefined cross-sections
cannot be edited. Figure 1 – No Blend Control

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Cross-section
PT

Figure 2 – Options Tab Area Control

Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Options

r

The two options available when creating a swept blend surface include:
Fo

• Cap ends – The system creates planar surfaces at the ends of the swept
blend, and merges them with the swept blend surface. This option is only
available for surfaces with closed sections.
• Blend control – You can control swept blend geometry by controlling
cross-sectional area between defined sections and by controlling how the
perimeter varies between the sections. The following options are available:
– No blend control – No blend control is specified for the swept blend. In
Figure 1, no blend control is specified.
– Set perimeter control – Forces the perimeter of the blend to vary linearly
between sections. You can also have the system create a curve through
the center of the blend. This curve becomes a part of the swept blend
feature.
– Set cross-section area control – Enables you to specify the cross-section
area at designated locations of the swept blend. A table displays each

Module 10 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 specified location and the cross-sectional area at that location. The
predefined cross-sections display in the table but the area cannot
be edited in this table. To add additional locations, click in the table
to activate it, then select points on the trajectory and edit the desired
cross-section area. In Figure 2, the Options tab displays the four
locations where the cross-section's area is controlled. For Sections 1
and 2 the Area cell is grayed out, as these sections are predefined.
The resulting geometry for the specified cross-section control is shown
in Figure 3.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 33

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Surface Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Swept_Blend\Swept_Blend_Options SW-BL_OPTIONS_SURF.PRT

Task 1: Analyze swept blend surface options.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Edit the definition of Swept

nl
Blend 1.

O
3. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.

se
• Select the Cap ends check
box.
4. Click Preview Feature .
U
al

5. Click Resume Feature .

6. Select the Options tab.
rn

• Select Set perimeter control.

te

• Notice that the preview

geometry updated.
In

• Select the Create curve

through center of blend
check box.
C

7. Click Preview Feature .

PT

8. From the In Graphics toolbar,

select Wireframe from the
Model Display types drop-down
r
Fo

menu.
9. Notice the new center curve
close to the original trajectory.

Module 10 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 10. Select Shading from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu.
11. Click Resume Feature .
12. Select the Options tab.
• Select Set cross-section
area control.
• Notice the defined Area for
Section 1 and Section 2.

y
nl
These areas are defined
by the sketch or selected

O
section and cannot be
modified in this table.

13. Select the vertex between the

arc and line. se
U
14. In the Options tab, edit the Area
al

from approximately 9750 to

12000.
rn
te

15. Press CTRL and select datum

In

point PNT0.
16. Edit the Area to 8500.
C

17. Click Complete Feature .

r PT

18. Select datum point PNT0,

Fo

right-click, and select Edit.

19. Edit the ratio from 0.3 to 0.7.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 35

Analyzing Swept Blend Rules
There are rules and restrictions to consider when creating a
swept blend feature.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – A Swept Blend Cannot Figure 2 – Creating a Swept Blend
Intersect Itself Over Non-Tangent Trajectory
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Start Points Not Lining Up Figure 4 – Using Blend Vertices

Analyzing Swept Blend Rules

r
Fo

Consider the following rules and restrictions when creating a swept blend
feature:
• For a closed trajectory profile, one section must be located at the start point
and at least one other section at another location.
• A swept blend cannot intersect itself. Common causes of intersection are:
– The trajectory intersects itself.
– A section that is too wide is swept around too sharp of a corner, resulting
in intersecting geometry.
In Figure 1, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory,
resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red
cross-section lines in the front view display that the geometry does not
overlap. In the right image, however, the section is too wide for the corner
radius, resulting in intersection, and therefore failing, geometry.

Module 10 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 • Creating a swept blend over a non-tangent trajectory results in a mitered
effect in the geometry. In Figure 2, notice the sharp corner due to the
non-tangent trajectory.
• Section references at the chain start and end points of the trajectory are
dynamic and update if the trajectory is trimmed.
• When using the Normal To Trajectory section plane control option, the
secondary trajectory must consist of entities that are tangent to one
another.
• Section locations can be referenced to model geometry, but modifying the
trajectory may invalidate the references and cause the swept blend to fail.
• If the start points do not line up between sections, a twisting effect is
created, and this twisting effect can cause a feature to fail. In Figure 3, the

y
swept blend start points are mismatched, resulting in the twisted geometry.

nl
You can also view the resulting geometry when the start points of the same
sections are properly aligned.

O
• If there are unequal quantities of entities between sections, you must divide
them or use blend vertices to create an equal number. In Figure 4, one

se
section of the swept blend has four entities, while the other has six. It
was necessary to add two blend vertices to the section containing fewer
entities, and the resulting preview geometry can be seen.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 10 | Page 37

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 10 | Page 38 © 2011 PTC

 Module 11

y
Analyzing Surface Curvature

nl
O
Module Overview

se
When designing products using surface features, the transitions between
surfaces play an important role. Curvature continuity conditions at the edges
of the surfaces determine how smooth these transitions are.
U
In this module, you will learn how to analyze the curvature of a surface
al

and determine whether the surface has curvature continuity using

porcupine-based and shaded curvature plots. In addition, you will learn
rn

techniques for creating curvature continuous surfaces.

te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Analyze surfaces theory.
C

• Define curvature and curvature continuity.

• Analyze the curvature of curves.
PT

• Analyze the curvature of surfaces.

• Analyze curvature using sections.
r

• Analyze curvature using normals.

Fo

• Use shaded curvature for surfaces.

• Use shaded section curvature.
• Create curvature continuous surfaces.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 1

Analyzing Surfaces Theory
You can use specific tools to analyze surface models, such as
for continuity, distortions, and visual characteristics.
• The goal is to create high quality
surfaces.
• Reasons for analyzing surfaces:
– Intended smoothness and
continuity
– Intended curvature

y
– No distortions or kinks

nl
– Suitable for manufacturing
• Common analysis options:

O
– Quick
– Saved

se
Figure 1 – Viewing Shaded
– Feature U Curvature
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Saved Analysis Dialog Box Figure 3 – Sections Analysis

r
Fo

Analyzing Surfaces Theory

Creo Parametric offers many different tools to suit different modeling
requirements. Depending on the objective, you can use specific tools
to analyze surface models, such as for continuity, distortions, and visual
characteristics.

Reasons for Analyzing Surfaces

When creating surfaces, the goal is that they be created of high quality.
Consider the following reasons for analyzing surfaces:
• Creating surfaces with intended smoothness and continuity. You can use
analysis tools to verify tangent and curvature continuity.
• Creating surfaces with intended curvature. You can check that there are
no unwanted high curvature zones, which would signify that there is a

Module 11 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 problem in the surfaces. For example, a kink in the surface would display
a very sharp rise in curvature and could be easily located using Creo
Parametric's analysis tools.
• Creating surfaces without distortions. Kinks or small patches are common
problems in surface models. These may cause problems in adding
thickness while creating a solid part or while creating manufacturing
sequences.
• Creating surfaces suitable for manufacturing. Many operations, such as
creating machining sequences, take the surface side into account. The
quilts in your surface model should have corresponding positive normal
sides.

y
Common Analysis Options

nl
There are three options available when using Creo Parametric's analysis

O
tools on models:
• Quick – Enables you to compute measurements without saving the

se
analysis or creating a feature in the model tree. The analysis disappears
after closing the dialog box.
U
• Saved – Enables you to save the measurement for future use. The analysis
remains after closing the dialog box. You can specify a unique name for
al

the analysis so it means something to you at a later time. You can enable,
disable, or edit the display of the saved analyses by clicking Analysis >
rn

Saved Analysis. A saved analysis updates to model geometry changes.

The Saved Analysis dialog box is shown in the lower-left figure.
te

• Feature – Enables you to save the analysis as a feature in the model tree.
The analysis updates to model geometry changes.
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 3

Defining Curvature
The curvature of a surface is defined as being proportional to
1/R, where R is the radius of the surface at a specific location.

• Curvature:
– 1/R
– Smaller radii = higher degree
curvature
– Larger radii = lower degree
curvature

y
• Common curvature values:

nl
– Straight line: 0

O
– Arc: Constant
– Spline: Constantly changing

se
♦ Some exceptions
Figure 1 – Viewing Surface
U
Curvature
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Viewing a Surface

r
Fo

Curvature Plot

Defining Curvature
It is often desired to create surfaces with curvature continuity so the resulting
model appears as a continuous flowing shape, even if is made up of several
surface patches.
Before we can analyze curvature continuity, we must define curvature. The
curvature of a surface is defined as being proportional to 1/R, where R is the
radius of the surface at a specific location. Therefore:
• The smaller the radius, the larger the curvature is.
• The larger the radius, the smaller the curvature is.
A surface is shown in Figure 1.

Module 11 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 • The portion of the curve with a radius of 20 results in a higher degree of
curvature on the surface.
• The portion of the curve with a radius of 35 results in a lower degree of
curvature on the surface.
A surface curvature plot is shown on the curve in the Figure 2.
• The portions of the curve with a higher degree of curvature have longer
curvature spikes.
• The portions of the curve with a lower degree of curvature have shorter
curvature spikes.
• The location near the middle of the curve where the curvature plot changes
direction is an inflection point. An inflection point is the point where

y
curvature changes direction. You can think of an inflection point as the

nl
location where the curvature changes from positive to negative curvature.

O
Common Curvature Values

se
Consider the curvature values for the following example geometry:
• A straight line has a curvature of zero.
U
• An arc has constant curvature based on 1/R.
al

• A spline has constantly changing curvature, except for splines through only
two points that form a straight line. You can control the curvature of a spline
rn

by manipulating its internal points. The curvature at the spline ends can be
controlled using endpoint curvature dimensions.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 5

Defining Curvature Continuity
When curve or surface geometry meets at a common point or
boundary, there are different levels of curvature continuity:

• C0 continuity:
– The geometry shares a common
boundary.
– It is discontinuous in both
tangency (slope) and curvature
(change in slope).

y
• C1 continuity:

nl
– The geometry is both joined and
tangent (continuous in slope).

O
– It is discontinuous in curvature.
• C2 continuity:
– The geometry is joined, tangent,
and continuous in curvature. se
Figure 1 – Free (C0) Continuity
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Curvature (C2)

Figure 2 – Tangent (C1) Continuity Continuity
C

Defining Curvature Continuity

PT

When curve or surface geometry meets at a common point or boundary,

there are different levels of curvature continuity:
r

• C0 – Also known as Free, C0 continuity has the following characteristics:

Fo

– The geometry shares a common boundary.

– The geometry is discontinuous in tangency (slope).
– The geometry is discontinuous in curvature (change in slope).
• C1 – Also known as Tangent, C1 continuity has the following characteristics:
– The geometry shares a common boundary.
– The geometry is continuous in tangency (slope).
– The geometry is discontinuous in curvature (change in slope).
• C2 – Also known as Curvature, C2 continuity has the following
characteristics:
– The geometry shares a common boundary.
– The geometry is continuous in tangency (slope).
– The geometry is continuous in curvature (change in slope).

Module 11 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Curvature plots are shown for each of the three cases on the slide. Notice the
geometry and resulting plot:
• Free or C0 continuity is displayed in Figure 1. Consider the curvature at
the following geometry areas:
– For the spline, the curvature plot varies according to the curvature.
– For the straight line, the curvature is zero.
– For the arc, the curvature is constant.
• Tangent or C1 continuity is displayed in Figure 2. Consider the curvature at
the following geometry areas:
– For the spline, the curvature plot varies according to the curvature.
– The second spline curvature is in the opposite direction, attached with

y
an inflection point.

nl
– For the arc, the curvature is constant.

O
Notice that the spline and arc curvature are not the same, which creates a
“step” in the curvature plot.

se
• Curvature or C2 continuity is displayed in Figure 3. Consider the curvature
at the following geometry areas: U
– For the spline, the curvature plot varies according to the curvature.
– The second spline curvature is in the opposite direction, attached with
al

an inflection point.
– For the arc, the curvature is constant.
rn

Notice that the spline and arc curvature now meet up and flow evenly in
the curvature plot.
te

Depending on the design task, different levels of curvature continuity may

In

be required. Curvature continuous continuity is often required for various

purposes, including these examples:
C

• Aesthetic purpose, such as for exterior surfaces of products, especially

those that are glossy or shiny. These surfaces are often referred to as
PT

class A surfaces.
• Engineering purpose, such as improved fluid flow.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 7

Analyzing Curvature of Curves
You can use the Curvature tool to display the curvature for
selected curves or edges.

• Curvature displayed as a
porcupine plot.
– Length of spikes indicate the
degree of curvature.
• Curvature tool uses:
– Determine level of curvature

y
continuity.

nl
– Display curvature
discontinuities.

O
se
Figure 1 – Curvature Plot for
Free Continuity
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Curvature Plot for Figure 3 – Curvature Plot for

Tangent Continuity Curvature Continuity
r
Fo

Analyzing Curvature of Curves

You can use the Curvature tool to display the curvature for selected curves or
edges. The curvature is displayed as a porcupine plot, with the length of the
spikes indicating the degree of curvature at that location. The curvature plot
can be used to analyze a curve or edge to determine its level of curvature
continuity, whether free, tangent, or curvature, and to display discontinuities
in curvature before a surface is created.
The following parts of the curvature plot can be controlled:
• Quality – Controls the density of spikes in the plot.
• Scale – Controls the height of the spikes in the plot.
• Style of plot – Controls how the spikes are displayed and connected.
You can display and connect the spikes smoothly, linearly, or spikes only,
meaning that there is no line connection between spikes.

Module 11 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 In Figure 1, the curvature plot has a gap in its center. This curve has Free
continuity. In Figure 2, the curvature plot contains no gaps, but there is a
discontinuity near the center. The discontinuity displays in the plot as a step.
This curve has Tangent continuity. In Figure 3, the curvature plot contains no
gaps or discontinuities and has an inflection point. This curve has Curvature
continuity.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Curvature of Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Curvature_Curve CURVATURE_CURVE.PRT

Task 1: Analyze the three types of curvature conditions in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select CURVE_1, CURVE_2, and CURVE_3 from the model tree to
locate them on the model.

y
3. De-select all geometry.

nl
4. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

O
tab. Click Curvature from

se
the Inspect Geometry group.
5. Query and select the entire
U
CURVE_3 from the model.
6. In the Curvature dialog box, edit
al

the Quality to 20, if necessary.

7. Drag the Scale upward to
rn

approximately –100.
8. Notice the gap in the center of
te

the curvature plot. This curve

has a free condition.
In

9. Select Quick as the analysis

type in the Curvature dialog box,
C

if necessary.
PT

• Click Complete Analysis .

10. In the ribbon, click Curvature

r

from the Inspect Geometry

Fo

group.
11. Query and select the entire
CURVE_2 from the model.
12. Drag the scale upward to
approximately 100.
13. Notice the discontinuity in the
center of the curvature plot. This
curve has a tangency condition.
14. Select Quick as the analysis
type in the Curvature dialog box,
if necessary.
• Click Complete Analysis .

Module 11 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 15. In the ribbon, click Curvature
from the Inspect Geometry
group.
16. Select CURVE_1 from the
model.
17. Drag the scale downward to
approximately 100.
18. Notice the flow and inflection
point in the center of the
curvature plot. This curve has a

y
curvature continuity condition.

nl
19. Select Quick as the analysis
type in the Curvature dialog box,

O
if necessary.
• Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure. se

U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 11

Analyzing Curvature of Surfaces
You can use the Curvature tool to display the curvature for
selected surfaces.
• Curvature displayed as a
porcupine plot:
– Plots displayed independently
in two directions.
– Length of spikes indicates the
degree of curvature.
• Curvature tool uses:

y
– Determine level of curvature

nl
continuity.

O
– Display surface curvature Figure 1 – Curvature Plots for
discontinuities. Free Continuity

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Curvature Plots for Figure 3 – Curvature Plots for

C

Tangent Continuity Curvature Continuity

PT

Analyzing Curvature of Surfaces

r

You can use the Curvature tool to display the curvature for selected surfaces.
Fo

The curvature is displayed as a porcupine plot, with the length of the spikes
indicating the degree of curvature at that location. The curvature plot can
be used to analyze a surface to determine its level of curvature continuity,
whether free, tangent, or curvature, and to display discontinuities in surface
curvature.
When analyzing the curvature of a surface, two curvature plots are created,
one in each direction of the surface. The following parts of the curvature
plot can be controlled:
• Number – Controls the number of plots created. You can edit the number
of plots created in each direction independently.
• Quality – Controls the density of spikes in the plots in the first direction.
• 2nd Quality – Controls the density of spikes in the plots in the second
direction.
• Scale – Controls the height of the spikes in the plots in the first direction.

Module 11 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 • 2nd Scale – Controls the height of the spikes in the plots in the second
direction.
• Style of plot – Controls how the spikes are displayed and connected.
You can display and connect the spikes smoothly, linearly, or spikes only,
meaning that there is no line connection between spikes.
In Figure 1, the curvature plots contain no gaps or discontinuities in the first
direction, but there is a gap in the plots in the second direction near the center.
This surface has Free continuity. In Figure 2, the curvature plots contain no
gaps or discontinuities in the first direction, but there is a discontinuity near
the center of the surface in the plots in the second direction. The discontinuity
displays in the plots as a step. This surface has Tangent continuity. In Figure
3, the curvature plots contains no gaps or discontinuities in either direction

y
and have inflection points. This surface has Curvature continuity.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Curvature of Surfaces
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Curvature_Surfaces

curvature_surf_free.prt

Task 1: Run a curvature analysis for a free condition between surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

y
nl
tab. Click Curvature from
the Inspect Geometry group.

O
3. Press CTRL and select both
upper surfaces.

se
4. In the Curvature dialog box, edit
the Number of plots in the first
U
and second directions to 3 and
5, respectively.
al

• Edit the Quality and 2nd

Quality to 25.
rn

• Edit the Scale and 2nd Scale

to 2 and 0, respectively.
te

5. In the Curvature dialog box, edit

In

the Scale and 2nd Scale to 0 and

10, respectively.
C

• Select Quick as the analysis

type, if necessary.
PT

• Click Complete Analysis .

6. Click Close Window .
r
Fo

Module 11 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Run a curvature analysis for a tangent condition between surfaces.

1. Click Open and double-click

curvature_surf_tangent.prt.
2. In the ribbon, click Curvature
from the Inspect Geometry
group.
3. Press CTRL and select both
upper surfaces.

y
4. In the Curvature dialog box, edit

nl
the Number of plots in the first
and second directions to 3 and

O
5, respectively.
• Edit the Quality and 2nd

se
Quality to 25.
• Edit the Scale and 2nd Scale
U
to 2 and 0, respectively.

5. In the Curvature dialog box, edit

al

the Scale and 2nd Scale to 0 and

rn

10, respectively.
• Select Quick as the analysis
te

type, if necessary.
• Click Complete Analysis .
In

6. Click Close Window .

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 15

Task 3: Run a curvature analysis for a curvature condition between
surfaces.

1. Click Open and double-click

curvature_surf_curvature.prt.
2. In the ribbon, click Curvature
from the Inspect Geometry
group.
3. Press CTRL and select both

y
upper surfaces.

nl
4. In the Curvature dialog box, edit
the Number of plots in the first

O
and second direction to 3 and 5,
respectively.

se
• Edit the Quality and 2nd
Quality to 25. U
• Edit the Scale and 2nd Scale
to 2 and 0, respectively.
al

5. In the Curvature dialog box, edit

rn

the Scale and 2nd Scale to 0 and

10, respectively.
te

• Select Quick as the analysis

type, if necessary.
In

• Click Complete Analysis .

C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Curvature using Sections
You can use the Curvature tool to display the curvature along
sections for selected surfaces.
• Curvature displayed as porcupine
plot.
– Length of spikes indicates the
degree of curvature.
• Porcupine plots are created
parallel to direction reference.
• Curvature tool uses:

y
– Determine level of curvature

nl
continuity.

O
– Display surface curvature
discontinuities.

se
Figure 1 – Curvature Plots
for a Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Curvature Plots for

r

Surface Parallel to Different

Fo

Reference

Analyzing Curvature using Sections

You can use the Curvature tool to display the curvature along sections for
selected surfaces. When you specify a direction reference, the system
creates a series of porcupine plots, parallel to the direction reference, with
the length of the spikes indicating the degree of curvature at that location.
The curvature plot can be used to analyze a surface to determine its level
of curvature continuity, whether free, tangent, or curvature, and to display
discontinuities in surface curvature.
The following parts of the curvature plot can be controlled:
• Number – Controls the number of sections, and therefore, the number
of plots created.
• Spacing – Controls the spacing between each section.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 17

• Start location – Controls the starting location for the sections.
• Quality – Controls the density of spikes in the plots.
• Scale – Controls the height of the spikes in the plots.
• Style of plot – Controls how the spikes are displayed and connected.
You can display and connect the spikes smoothly, linearly, or spikes only,
meaning that there is no line connection between spikes.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 11 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Curvature using Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Curvature_Sections CURVATURE_SECTIONS.PRT

Task 1: Run a curvature analysis using sections in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab. From the Inspect Geometry

y
group, click the Geometry Report

nl
group drop-down menu and
select Sections .

O
3. Press CTRL and select both

se
upper surfaces.
4. Right-click and select Direction
Collector.
U
• Select the front surface.
al

5. In the Sections dialog box,

rn

edit the Number of sections to

compute to 5.
te

• Edit Spacing to 24.

• Edit Start to –98.
In

• Edit Scale to 150.

C
PT

6. In the graphics window,

right-click and select Direction
r

Collector.
Fo

• Select the side surface.

7. In the Sections dialog box, edit
Number to 5.
• Edit Spacing to 22.
• Edit Start to –95.
• Edit Scale to 20.
• Select Quick as the analysis
type, if necessary.
• Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 19

Analyzing Curvature using Normals
You can use the Curvature tool to display the normal vectors for
selected surfaces.
• Normals are displayed as arrows.
– Arrows point normal to the
surface.
• Surface normal display uses:
– Detect surface distortions.
– Detect if adjacent surfaces have
different positive directions.

y
• Normals can be flipped.

nl
– Flip Normal feature created.

O
se
Figure 1 – Displaying Curvature
using Normals
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Normals Flipped

r
Fo

Analyzing Curvature using Normals

You can use the Curvature tool to display the normal vectors for selected
surfaces. Surface normals are displayed as arrows pointing normal to the
surface at that location.
When analyzing the curvature of a surface using normals, two directions of
normal arrows are created, one in each direction of the surface. The following
parts of the normals plots can be controlled:
• Number – Controls the number of plots created. You can edit the number
of plots created in each direction independently.
• Quality – Controls the density of normals arrows in the first direction.
• 2nd Quality – Controls the density of normals arrows in the second
direction.
• Scale – Controls the height of the normals in the plots in the first direction.

Module 11 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 • 2nd Scale – Controls the height of the normals in the plots in the second
direction.
The surface normal display has the following uses:
• Detect surface distortions.
• Detect if adjacent surfaces have different positive directions. Different
positive directions can lead to downstream modeling or manufacturing
problems.
You can also change the positive direction of selected surfaces by selecting
the surface and In the Model tab, click the Editing group drop-down menu
and select Flip Normal. When the normals are flipped, a Flip Normal feature
appears in the model tree.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Curvature using Normals

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Curvature_Normals CURVATURE_NORMALS.PRT

Task 1: Run a normals curvature analysis on surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

y
tab. Click Curvature from
the Inspect Geometry group.

nl
3. Press CTRL and select the right

O
half of the upper surface, the
round surface, and the vertical

se
right surface.
4. In the Curvature dialog box, edit
the Plot type from Curvature to
U
Normal.
al

• Edit the Number of plots in the

first and second direction to 4
rn

and 3, respectively.
• Edit Quality and 2nd Quality to
te

3 and 5, respectively.
• Edit Scale and 2nd Scale to
In

–1.
5. Select Saved as the analysis
C

type, if necessary.
PT

6. Click Complete Analysis .

7. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.

r

8. Select the main upper quilt

Fo

surface.

Module 11 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 9. In the ribbon, select the Model
tab. Click the Editing group
drop-down menu and select Flip
Normal.
10. Click Repaint from the
Graphics toolbar.
11. Notice the feature in the model
tree.
12. Notice that the arrow direction
updated.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 23

Using Shaded Curvature Analysis for Surfaces
You can use the Curvature tool to display the shaded (Gaussian)
curvature for selected surfaces.

• Gaussian curvature values are

plotted for all points on the selected
surface(s).
• Color fringe plot created.
– Warm values indicate higher
curvature.

y
– Cool values indicate lower
curvature.

nl
• Color Scale dialog box displays

O
curvature values for the color
spectrum.

se
Figure 1 – C0 Continuity Shaded
U
Curvature Analysis
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – C1 Continuity Shaded Figure 3 – C2 Continuity Shaded

Fo

Curvature Analysis Curvature Analysis

Using Shaded Curvature Analysis for Surfaces

You can use the Curvature tool to display the shaded (or Gaussian) curvature
for selected surfaces. The Gaussian curvature is defined as the product of
the smallest and largest normal curvature for every point on the surface.
The shaded curvature display plots the Gaussian curvature values for all
points on the selected surfaces. The following types of curvature values can
be can be achieved:
• Positive values – Examples include ridges.
• Negative values – Examples include saddles.
• Zero values – Examples include planes and ruled surfaces.

Module 11 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Understanding the Shaded Curvature Display
The Shaded Curvature display results in a color fringe plot on the model.
A thermometer-type color scale appears in the Color Scale dialog box,
displaying the values for the varying color spectrum. Warm values indicate
areas of higher curvature, while cool values indicate areas of lower curvature.
You can drag the upper, middle, and lower arrows that determine the range of
the scale. There is also an option to reset the color scale to its default values.
You can also change the Style type that is displayed. There are two options:
• Rainbow – Displays a rainbow type of color plot for the selected surface
or surfaces.
• Three-color – Displays a three-color type of color plot for the selected

y
surface or surfaces.

nl
The Continuous Display option causes an infinite number of color gradients
throughout the range of the scale. You can toggle to the Non-continuous

O
Display option and specify the number of colors for the color scale. You can
also change the base and peak values of the logarithm scale used for the

se
analysis.
Finally, by toggling the Tool Tip Display on, you are able to drag the mouse
U
over the surface to view the exact curvature value at any point.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Using Shaded Curvature Analysis for
Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Curvature-Shaded SHADED_CURVATURE_FREE.PRT

Task 1: Run a shaded curvature analysis for a free condition between

surfaces.

y
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

nl
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab. From the Inspect Geometry

O
group, click the Curvature
group drop-down menu and
selectShaded Curvature .
se
U
3. Press CTRL and select both
upper surfaces.
al

4. In the Shaded Curvature dialog

box, edit the Plot type to
rn

Gaussian, if necessary.
• Edit the Quality to 25.
te

5. Notice how the colors flow,

especially along the mid line of
In

the surface.
• Notice the color scale for the
C

fringe plot, which indicates the

PT

degree of curvature.
• Notice how the colors do not
“flow” across the surface.
r

• This surface has a free (C0)

Fo

condition.

6. Select Quick as the analysis type, if necessary, and click Complete

Analysis .
7. Click Close Window .

Task 2: Run a shaded curvature analysis for a tangent condition between

surfaces.

1. Click Open and double-click shaded_curvature_tangent.prt.

2. From the Inspect Geometry group, click the Curvature group
drop-down menu and select Shaded Curvature .

Module 11 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 3. Press CTRL and select both
upper surfaces.
4. In the Shaded Curvature dialog
box, edit the Quality to 25.
5. Notice how the colors flow,
especially along the mid line of
the surface.
• Notice how the colors
somewhat “flow” across
the surface.

y
• This surface has a tangent

nl
(C1) condition.

O
6. Select Quick as the analysis type, if necessary, and click Complete
Analysis .

se
7. Click Close Window . U
Task 3: Run a shaded curvature analysis for a curvature condition
between surfaces.
al
rn

1. Click Open and double-click shaded_curvature_curvature.prt.

2. From the Inspect Geometry group, click the Curvature group
te

drop-down menu and select Shaded Curvature .

In

3. Press CTRL and select both

upper surfaces.
C

4. In the Shaded Curvature dialog

PT

box, edit the Quality to 25.

5. Notice how the colors flow,
especially along the mid line of
r

the surface.
Fo

• Notice how the colors smoothly

“flow” across the surface.
• This surface has a curvature
(C2) condition.

6. Select Quick as the analysis type, if necessary, and click Complete

Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 27

Using Shaded Section Curvature Analysis
You can use the shaded curvature tool to display the sectional
curvature for selected surfaces, given a reference plane
direction.

• Curvature values are plotted for all

points on the selected surface(s),
parallel to a selected reference.
• Color fringe plot created.
– Warm values indicate higher

y
curvature.

nl
– Cool values indicate lower
curvature.

O
• Color Scale dialog box displays
curvature values for the color

se
spectrum. Figure 1 – Section Curvature
Analysis using Front Surface
U
as Direction
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Section Curvature

Analysis using Right Surface
r

as Direction
Fo

Using Shaded Section Curvature Analysis

You can use the shaded curvature tool to display the sectional curvature for
selected surfaces, given a reference plane direction. Similar to the Gaussian
curvature display, which depicts the surface curvature in two directions, the
section curvature displays surface curvature for one direction at a time,
based on the reference direction. The surface curvature is calculated parallel
to the selected reference direction. The following types of curvature values
can be achieved:
• Positive values – Examples include ridges.
• Negative values – Examples include saddles.
• Zero values – Examples include planes and ruled surfaces.

Module 11 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Understanding the Shaded Curvature Display
The Shaded Curvature display results in a color fringe plot on the model.
A thermometer-type color scale appears in the Color Scale dialog box,
displaying the values for the varying color spectrum. Warm values indicate
areas of higher curvature, while cool values indicate areas of lower curvature.
You can drag the upper, middle, and lower arrows that determine the range of
the scale. There is also an option to reset the color scale to its default values.
You can also change the Style type that is displayed. There are two options:
• Rainbow – Displays a rainbow type of color plot for the selected surface
or surfaces.
• Three-color – Displays a three-color type of color plot for the selected

y
surface or surfaces.

nl
The Continuous Display option causes an infinite number of color gradients
throughout the range of the scale. You can toggle to the Non-continuous

O
Display option and specify the number of colors for the color scale. You can
also change the base and peak values of the logarithm scale used for the

se
analysis.
Finally, by toggling the Tool Tip Display on, you are able to drag the mouse
U
over the surface to view the exact curvature value at any point.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Using Shaded Section Curvature
Analysis
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed Analysis\Curvature-Shaded_Sections

SHADED_CURV_SECT.PRT

Task 1: Run a shaded section curvature analysis for surfaces in a part

model.

y
nl
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

O
tab. From the Inspect Geometry
group, click the Curvature group

se
drop-down menu and select
Shaded Curvature .
U
3. In the Shaded Curvature dialog
box, edit the Plot type to Section.
al

• Edit the Quality to 25.

rn

4. Press CTRL and select both

upper surfaces.
te

5. Right-click and select Plane

Collector.
In

• Select the front surface.

6. Select Quick as the analysis
C

type, if necessary, and click

PT

Complete Analysis .

7. From the Inspect Geometry

group, click the Curvature group
r

drop-down menu and select

Fo

Shaded Curvature .
8. Edit the Plot type to Section.
• Edit the Quality to 25.
9. Press CTRL and select both
upper surfaces.
10. Right-click and select Plane
Collector.
• Select the right side surface.
11. Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Curvature Continuous Surfaces
To create curvature continuous surfaces, references such as
curves or edges should have curvature continuity themselves.
• The shape-defining curves need to
be curvature continuous to create
surfaces with C2 continuity.
• Boundary blended surfaces can
be made C2 in only one direction.
• Style surfaces can be made C2 on
all four sides.

y
• Round features have a C2 profile

nl
option.

O
Figure 1 – Shaded Plot of
Boundary Surface

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – C2 Continuity Condition Figure 3 – C2 Continuity Condition

of Boundary Surface Edges of Boundary Surface Edges
PT

Creating Curvature Continuous Surfaces

r

To create curvature continuous surfaces, references such as curves or edges

Fo

should have curvature continuity themselves. Boundary surfaces can be

curvature continuous along one direction, while Style, or freeform, surfaces,
can be curvature continuous in both directions.
The following are techniques for creating curvature continuous surfaces for a
given geometry type:
• Sketcher splines – You can use radius of curvature dimensions. After
a Tangency Angle dimension is created for a spline endpoint, you can
create a Radius of Curvature dimension for that endpoint. The Radius of
Curvature dimension can be used to control the radius of curvature at the
endpoint of a spline, and changing its value changes the shape of the spline
near the endpoint. Controlling the Radius of Curvature dimension is useful
in cases where a spline meets up with other geometry (an arc for example),
and a curvature continuity is desired. To create this dimension, select the
spline, the spline endpoint, and middle-click to place the dimension. The
dimension appears similar to a radius dimension.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 31

• Curve Thru Points – The tangency for a curve thru points can be set to
Curvature.
• Boundary blend – You can set boundary conditions. In Figure 2, the two
boundary blend edges in the first direction have tangency defined. In
Figure 3, the two boundary blend edges in the second direction have
curvature defined.
• Style, or freeform, surfaces – This technique is covered in the Freeform
Surface Modeling course.
• Round features – You can define a round that uses a curvature continuous
spline as a round profile. This option is particularly useful on models where
maintaining a curvature continuity is important across rounded surfaces.
The system calculates the round then applies the spline profile. You use

y
the curvature continuous round profile (C2) with single or variable radius

nl
rounds. In addition, the round feature can be used to create rounds as
solids or surfaces.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 11 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating Curvature Continuous Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Curvature_Continuous CREATING_CURVE_CONT.PRT

Task 1: Create a curvature continuous surface in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Model

y
tab. Click the Datum group

nl
drop-down menu and select
Curve Curve > Curve

O
through Points.
3. Select the bottom vertex, then

se
the top vertex near the gap on
the left of the model.
U
4. In the Curve: Through Points
dashboard, select the Ends
al

Condition tab. Select

Tangent from the End condition
rn

drop-down menu.
te

5. Select the edge below the start

point.
In

6. Select End point from the

Curve side Field, then select
Tangent from the End condition
C

drop-down menu.
PT

7. Select the edge above the start

point.
8. Select Start point from the
r

Curve side Field, then select

Fo

Curvature Continuous from the

End condition drop-down menu.
9. Select End point from the
Curve side Field, then select
Curvature Continuous from the
End condition drop-down menu.
10. Click Complete Feature
from the Curve: Through Points
dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 33

 11. Repeat the procedure to create
another curve through points that
spans the gap on the right of the
model.

y
nl
12. De-select all geometry and in
the ribbon, start the Boundary

O
Blend from the Surfaces
Group.
13. Press CTRL and select the two
horizontal surface edges. se
U
14. Right-click and select Second
al

Direction Curves.
rn

15. Press CTRL and select the two

curves you created.
te
In

16. Set both horizontal boundaries

C

tangent to their adjacent

PT

surfaces.
17. Click Complete Feature from
the Boundary Blend Dashboard.
r
Fo

Module 11 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 18. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab. From the Inspect Geometry
group, click the Curvature group
drop-down menu and select
Shaded Curvature .
19. In the Shaded Curvature dialog
box, edit the Plot type to
Gaussian, if necessary.
20. Press CTRL and select the
central boundary surface you

y
just created, followed by the

nl
outer main surfaces.
21. Notice how the color flow stops

O
abruptly along the blended
surface.

se
22. Select Saved as the analysis
type and click Complete
U
Analysis .
al

23. Edit the definition of Boundary

Blend 1.
rn

24. Right-click both tangent

horizontal boundaries and
te

select Curvature.
25. Click Complete Feature from
In

the Boundary Blend Dashboard.

26. Click No Hidden and notice
C

that the analysis has updated.

PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 11 | Page 35

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 11 | Page 36 © 2011 PTC

 Module 12

y
Additional Surface Analysis Tools

nl
O
Module Overview

se
To create aesthetically pleasing surface models, you need to analyze the
quality of edges and surfaces using various analysis tools to check the curve
and the surface quality. After utilizing the surface analysis tools, you gain
U
insight into how you can improve the overall quality of surfaces in models,
and/or ensure they are fit for manufacturing.
al

In this module, you will learn how to use several additional surface analysis
rn

tools.
te

Objectives
In

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Use the Point analysis option.
C

• Use the Radius analysis option.

• Use the Dihedral Angle analysis option.
PT

• Use the Offset analysis option.

• Use the Draft analysis option.
r

• Use the Slope analysis option.

Fo

• Use the Reflection analysis option.

• Use the Shadow analysis option.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 1

Using the Point Analysis Option
With the Point analysis option, you can gain surface information
about a selected location on a surface.

• Specify references:
– Point on surface
– Coordinate system reference
• Available results:
– Plot of normal, tangent, and
radius vectors

y
– Point coordinates

nl
– Unit normal lengths

O
– Min./Max. Curvature Figure 1 – Selected Point
– Radius of curvature on Surface

se
– Gaussian curvature
• Options:
U
– Scale
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Point Dialog Box

PT

Using the Point Analysis Option

r

With the Point analysis option, you can gain surface information about a
Fo

selected location on a surface.

When performing a Point analysis, the following references must be specified:
• Point on a surface.
• Coordinate system reference – The system uses the default coordinate
system for all calculations unless a different coordinate system reference
is specified.
When a Point analysis is performed, the following results information can
be obtained:
• A plot of the normal, tangent, and radius vectors at the selected point.
• Point coordinates – Specifies the coordinates of the point based on the
specified coordinate system.
• Unit normal lengths.

Module 12 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Min./Max. Curvature values, Radius of curvature, and Direction of greatest
curvature.
• Gaussian curvature value at the selected point.
When performing a Point analysis, the following options are available:
• Scale – Enables you to adjust the scale of the vectors in the plot.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Using the Point Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Point [Link]

Task 1: Use the Point Analysis Option for points on the surface of a part
model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

y
tab.

nl
3. Select the Point from the
Geometry Report drop-down

O
menu.
4. Select a convex location on the

se
upper-left surface. U
5. Edit the Scale to 2.
6. Notice the following:
al

• The default coordinate system

is used for the calculations.
rn

• The coordinates of the

te

selected point and its normal

are displayed.
In

• The Min. and Max. Curvature

values are displayed.
C
r PT

7. Select a concave location on the

Fo

upper-right surface.
8. Notice that the data updates in
the Point dialog box.

Module 12 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 9. In the Point dialog box, click Info
to receive more information
about the selection.
10. Click Close in the Information
Window dialog box.
11. In the Point dialog box, select
Quick as the analysis type, if
necessary.
12. Click Complete Analysis .

y
This completes the procedure.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 5

Using the Radius Analysis Option
The Radius analysis option is useful to determine the maximum
tool radius for a manufacturing operation.
• Radius analysis option:
– Determine the maximum tool
radius.
– Specify references:
♦ Geometry
– Available results:

y
♦ Minimum inside and

nl
outside radii values
– Options:

O
♦ Plot type
♦ Scale

se
• Curvature analysis option: Figure 1 – Radius Analysis
Option Result
– Detect abrupt radii changes
U
– Specify references
al

♦ Geometry
– Available results:
rn

♦ Porcupine plot changing

radius values
te

– Options:
In

♦ Quality
♦ Scale
C
PT

Figure 2 – Curvature Analysis

Radius Plot Result
r

Using the Radius Analysis Option

Fo

With the Radius analysis option, you can obtain radius information from a
surface, or a curve or edge. The Radius analysis option is useful to determine
the maximum tool radius for a manufacturing operation.
When performing a Radius analysis, the following references must be
specified:
• Geometry – Enables you to specify surfaces, or curves or edges.
When a Radius analysis is performed, the following results information can
be obtained:
• Minimum inside and outside radii values and their locations.
When performing a Radius analysis, the following options are available:
• Plot type – Enables you to specify the plot type that is displayed in the
graphics window. Options include Inside & Outside, Inside, and Outside.

Module 12 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 • Scale – Enables you to adjust the scale of the plot.

Using the Curvature Tool Radius Option

You can also obtain radius information along a curve or edge by using the
Curvature tool with the Radius plot option. This option is useful to detect
abrupt radii changes along a model, and to detect whether the curve travels
in 2-D or 3-D.
When creating a Radius plot for the Curvature tool, the following references
must be specified:
• Geometry – Enables you to specify a curve or edge.

y
When creating a Radius plot for the Curvature tool, the following results

nl
information can be obtained:

O
• A porcupine plot displaying the radius values along the selected curve.
When creating a Radius plot for the Curvature tool, the following options

se
are available:
• Quality – Enables you to adjust the quality of the radius analysis.
U
• Scale – Enables you to adjust the scale of the plot.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Using the Radius Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Radius [Link]

Task 1: Use the Radius Analysis Option for surfaces of a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.

y
3. Click Radius from the

nl
Measure group.

O
4. Select the upper-left surface.

se
U
5. Edit the Scale to 5.
al

6. Notice the Min. inside and Min.

outside radius locations and
rn

values.
te
In
C

7. Select the upper-right surface.

PT

8. Notice that the data updates in

the Radius dialog box.
9. In the Radius dialog box, select
r

Quick as the analysis type, if

Fo

necessary.
10. Click Complete Analysis .

Module 12 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Use the Radius Plot type for curves and edges of a part model.

1. Click Curvature from the

Inspect Geometry group.
2. Press CTRL and select both
upper front edges above the text.
3. Edit the Plot type to Radius.
4. Edit the Quality to 20.
5. Edit the Scale to 0.15.

y
6. Notice the radius changing over

nl
the length of the curve.

O
7. Also notice that the radius
approaches infinity on the left
portion, which is normal for an

se
inflection point in a curve. U
8. Select the ridge on the top of the
model.
al

9. Edit the Scale to 0.50.

rn

10. Notice the changing radius and

changing direction of spikes.
They are produced normal to the
te

curve direction and flow in 3-D

for a 3-D curve.
In

11. In the Curvature dialog box,

select Quick as the analysis
C

type, if necessary.
PT

12. Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 9

Using the Dihedral Angle Analysis Option
With the Dihedral Angle analysis, you can determine the extent
of tangency for the surfaces along an edge.

• Specify references:
– Edge
• Available results:
– Porcupine plot of dihedral angle
– Min./Max. Dihedral

y
• Options:

nl
– Quality
– Scale

O
se
Figure 1 – Porcupine Plot of
U
Dihedral Angle
al

Using the Dihedral Angle Analysis Option

rn

With the Dihedral Angle analysis, you can determine the extent of tangency
te

for the surfaces along an edge. The system plots the value of the angle
between the tangents of adjoining surfaces along the selected curve or edge.
In

A dihedral angle of zero occurs when the two adjoining surfaces are tangent
at a given location. The amount of dihedral angle is the amount the surfaces
C

deviate from tangency to one another.

PT

When performing a Dihedral Angle analysis, the following references must

be specified:
• Edge – Specifies the edge between surfaces for which to measure the
r

dihedral angle.
Fo

When a Dihedral Angle analysis is performed, the following results

information can be obtained:
• Porcupine plot of the dihedral angle along the selected edge.
• Min./Max. Dihedral angles – Specifies the minimum and maximum dihedral
angle along the selected edge.
When performing a Dihedral Angle analysis, the following options are
available:
• Quality – Enables you to adjust the quality of the dihedral angle porcupine
plot.
• Scale – Enables you to adjust the scale of the porcupine plot.

Module 12 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using the Dihedral Angle Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Dihedral [Link]

Task 1: Use the Dihedral Angle Analysis Option for an edge of a part
model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

y
tab.

nl
3. Click Dihedral Angle from
the Inspect Geometry group.

O
4. Select the edge as shown.

se
U
al

5. Edit the Quality to 15.

6. Drag the Scale upward to
rn

approximately 20.
7. Notice the shape of the plot:
te

• The edge is “more tangent” at

In

the ends and “less tangent”

at the center, where the plot
spikes are taller.
C

8. Notice the Min. and Max.

PT

Dihedral angles.
9. In the Dihedral Angle dialog box,
select Quick as the analysis
r

type, if necessary.
Fo

10. Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 11

Using the Offset Analysis Option
With the Offset surface analysis, you are able to create a surface
mesh at an adjustable offset value from the selected surfaces.
• Specify references:
– Geometry
– Plane (Optional)
• Available results:
– Offset surface mesh
• Options:

y
– Offset distance

nl
– Number of mesh lines
– Quality

O
Figure 1 – Offset Surface Mesh

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Offset Surface Mesh

PT

with Overlapping Geometry

Using the Offset Analysis Option

r
Fo

With the Offset surface analysis, you are able to create a surface mesh at
an adjustable offset value from the selected surfaces. This is useful for
exaggerating any slight changes in the quality of a surface. Overlapping
of the surface mesh reveals locations which could cause problems when
offsetting surfaces or shelling a model, and can be used to diagnose failures
in these situations.
When performing an Offset analysis, the following references must be
specified:
• Geometry – Specifies the surfaces to be offset.
• Plane – Specifies the reference plane for the offset direction. This
reference is optional.
When an Offset analysis is performed, the following results information can
be obtained:
• Offset surface mesh – Displays a surface mesh at the offset specified.

Module 12 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 When performing an Offset analysis, the following options are available:
• Offset distance – Specifies the distance the surface mesh is to be offset
from the specified surfaces. You can specify both a positive and negative
offset distance.
• Number of mesh lines in two directions – Specifies the number, or density,
of mesh lines displayed in the offset surface. You can specify a different
number of mesh lines in each direction.
• Quality – Enables you to adjust the quality of the surface mesh in each
direction.
You can also create a surface mesh directly on a surface without
any offset. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab. Click Mesh

y
Surface from the Inspect Geometry group, and then select

nl
surfaces.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Using the Offset Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Offset [Link]

Task 1: Use the Offset Analysis Option for surfaces of a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.

y
3. Click the Inspect Geometry

nl
group drop-down menu and

O
select Offset .
4. Press CTRL and select both

se
upper surfaces.

5. Drag the Offset handle to 12.

U
6. Notice that the mesh is
al

exaggerating surface contours,

with convex patches becoming
rn

larger and concave patches

becoming smaller.
te
In

7. Edit the Offset to 36 in the Offset

dialog box.
C

8. Edit the Number of mesh lines in

PT

each direction to 20.

9. Notice that the mesh starts
to overlap in the rear.
r

Consequently, a surface offset

Fo

would likely fail with an offset of

this value.
10. Rotate the model to view the
offset.
11. In the Offset dialog box, select
Quick as the analysis type, if
necessary.
12. Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Using the Draft Analysis Option
Visually display draft angles on model surfaces.

• Specify:
– Surfaces/Model
– Direction reference
– Acceptable draft angle
• Available results:
– Color scale shading draft

y
angles Figure 1 – Surfaces to be Analyzed

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Draft Analysis Display

PT

Figure 2 – Color Scale Dialog Box (Viewing Underside of Model)

r
Fo

Using the Draft Analysis Option

The Draft analysis option enables you to ultimately determine whether a
model is suitable for a mold or casting operation. You can select surfaces,
specify a pull direction, and input a draft angle to check for. The system then
produces a color plot of the draft angles. Based on the color scale applied
to the model, you can identify areas that have or do not have sufficient draft
angles.
The examples shown illustrate a draft gradient for both sides, where the
draft angle to check for is set to 3 degrees. The color plot is set to display
positive and negative draft angles respectively. The default colors in the
color scale are:
• Blue (Positive Draft) – Surfaces that are above the specified draft angle for
the upper half of the model.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 15

• Light Blue (Positive Values) – Surfaces that are between the specified
draft angle and zero draft for the upper half of the model.
• White (Verticals) – Surfaces with zero draft angle. Also known as verticals
in terms of draft angles.
• Pink (Negative Values) – Surfaces that are between the specified draft
angle and zero draft for the lower half of the model.
• Red (Negative Draft) – Surfaces that are above the specified draft angle for
the lower half of the model.
When performing a Draft analysis, the following references must be specified:
• Surface – Specifies the surfaces for which the draft analysis is to be run.
You can also select the model node from the model tree, or query to the

y
solid geometry of the model. This enables you to analyze the whole model.

nl
• Direction reference – Specifies the pull direction to be used for the draft
analysis.

O
The following options are available in the Draft dialog box:
• Draft angle – Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check for.

se
• One direction/Both directions – Enables you to specify whether the draft
analysis is run on one or both sides of the direction reference.
U
When a Draft analysis is performed, a default color scale is applied to the
al

model surface with a five-color display. The following options and settings
are available in the Color Scale dialog box:
rn

• Model display can be set to only display Positive Draft, Positive Values,
Verticals, Negative Values, or Negative Draft.
te

• You can toggle between displaying a continuous gradient and a specified

number of color bands.
In

• You can toggle between displaying a rainbow plot and a plot based on
shades of three colors.
C

• You can customize the color of each color band.

PT

• You can save and retrieve color schemes and settings for the Color Scale
dialog box.
• You can reset the color scale to its default values.
r
Fo

Module 12 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using the Draft Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Draft [Link]

Task 1: Use the Draft Analysis option for surfaces of a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.

y
3. Click Draft from the Inspect

nl
Geometry group.

O
4. Right-click to query over the
model until all solid geometry is
highlighted, then select it.

5. Right-click and select Direction se

U
Collector.
• Select datum plane TOP.
al

6. Edit the Draft angle to 10 and

rn

press ENTER.
te

7. Click Named Views and

select 4.
In

8. Notice the colors in the resulting

plot:
C

• Blue and light blue shades

PT

are positive draft and positive

values respectively.
• Red and pink shades are
r

negative draft and negative

Fo

values respectively.
• White shaded surfaces are
verticals with zero draft.

Based on the 10 degree draft angle, only the darker blue and red
areas meet or exceed this criteria. All other areas do not have
the required draft angle, or are verticals.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 17

 9. In the Draft dialog box, type 3 for
the Draft angle value and press
ENTER.
10. In the Color Scale dialog box,
click Enable Tool Tips .
11. Place the cursor over the light
blue shaded area of the model.
• Notice the indicated draft
angle is 1.5, which is less than
the set value of 3 degrees.

y
12. Place the cursor over other

nl
shaded areas of the model.

O
• Notice the varying draft angles
and the arrow indicator in the
Color Scale dialog box.

13. Select No Hidden se

from the Model Display types drop-down menu.
U
14. Click Color Scale Options in the Color Scale dialog box.
al

15. Select Verticals as the Model Display option.

rn

16. Click the middle color box as shown in the image and type 0, 180, 0
for the RGB values.
te

• Notice that only the vertical surfaces with zero draft angle are
displayed in green.
In

• Notice the other options available.

C
r PT
Fo

Module 12 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 17. Click Close from the Color Editor.
18. Select Quick as the analysis type in the Draft dialog box, if necessary.
19. Click Complete Analysis .

y
nl
O
se
This completes the procedure. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 19

Using the Slope Analysis Option
With the Slope analysis option, you can easily visualize the
direction and amount of slope on a surface.

• Specify references:
– Surface
– Direction reference
• Available results:
– Color plot of slope values
– Min./Max. slope

y
• Options:

nl
– Quality

O
– Flip direction

se
Figure 1 – Slope Analysis using
Front Surface Direction Reference
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Slope Analysis with Figure 3 – Slope Analysis using

PT

Flipped Direction Side Surface Direction Reference

r

Using the Slope Analysis Option

Fo

With the Slope analysis option, you can easily visualize the direction and
amount of slope on a surface, given a reference plane and direction. The
system creates a color plot to illustrate the positive and negative slope
values. When moving across the surface in the specified direction, warm
colors indicate positive (downhill) slope, and cool colors indicate negative
(uphill) slope.
When performing a Slope analysis, the following references must be
specified:
• Surface – Specifies the surfaces for which the slope analysis is to be run.
• Direction reference – The slope plot indicates how the surface slopes away
from the selected direction reference.
When a Slope analysis is performed, the following results information can
be obtained:

Module 12 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 • Color plot of slope values on the surfaces with respect to the selected
direction reference.
• Min. and Max. slope values on the surfaces.
When performing a Slope analysis, the following options are available:
• Quality – Enables you to adjust the quality of the slope plot.
• Flip direction – You can flip the direction for how the slope is calculated
from the direction reference by clicking the arrow in the graphics window.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Using the Slope Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Slope [Link]

Task 1: Use the Slope Analysis Option for surfaces of a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.

y
3. Click the Inspect Geometry

nl
group drop-down menu and

O
select Slope .
4. Press CTRL and select both

se
upper surfaces. U
5. Right-click and select Direction
Collector.
al

• Select the front surface with

the text.
rn

6. Notice the varying degrees of

positive and negative slope from
te

the direction normal to this plane.

In
C

7. Click the on-screen arrow to flip

PT

the direction.
r
Fo

Module 12 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 8. In the graphics window,
right-click and select Clear.
• Right-click again and select
Direction Collector.
• Select the right side surface.
9. In the Slope dialog box, select
Quick as the analysis type, if
necessary.
10. Click Complete Analysis .

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 23

Using the Reflection Analysis Option
With the Reflection analysis option, you can simulate the
reflection of light on shiny or glossy surfaces.
• Specify references:
– Surface
• Available results:
– Reflection plot on the surfaces
• Options:
– Number of Lights

y
– Light Angle

nl
– Light Spacing
– Light Width

O
Figure 1 – Viewing a Reflection plot

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Viewing a Reflection

Plot with Different Settings
C
PT

Using the Reflection Analysis Option

With the Reflection analysis option, you can simulate the reflection of light
r

on shiny or glossy surfaces. Surface imperfections, such as curvature

Fo

discontinuities, become obvious when rotating the model and viewing the
reflection curves. Breaks or interruptions in a reflection indicate a surface
discontinuity.
When performing a Reflection analysis, the following references must be
specified:
• Surface – Specifies the surfaces to be made reflective.
When a Reflection analysis is performed, the following results information
can be obtained:
• Reflection plot on the specified surfaces.
When performing a Reflection analysis, the following options are available:
• Number of Lights – Specifies the number of light bands used for the
Reflection analysis.
• Light Angle – Adjusts the angle of the light bands.

Module 12 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 • Light Spacing – Adjusts the spacing of the light bands. When viewing the
reflection plot, the Spacing value controls the black band width.
• Light Width – Adjusts the width of the light bands. When viewing the
reflection plot, the Width value controls the gray band width.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Using the Reflection Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Reflection [Link]

Task 1: Use the Reflection Analysis Option for surfaces of a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.

y
3. Click the Inspect Geometry

nl
group drop-down menu and

O
select Reflection .
4. Press CTRL and select both

se
upper surfaces. U
5. Rotate the model and notice the
reflection pattern changing on
al

the surfaces.
rn

6. Notice the breaks in reflection

around the center of the model.
te

The surfaces are not curvature

continuous.
In
C
PT

7. In the Reflection dialog box, edit

the number of Lights to 20.
• Edit the Angle to 45.
r
Fo

8. Rotate the model to view the

reflections.
9. In the Reflection dialog box,
select Quick as the analysis
type, if necessary.
10. Click Complete Analysis .

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 Using the Shadow Analysis Option
With the Shadow analysis option, you can simulate the effects
of casting shadows on selected surfaces.
• Specify references:
– Surface
– Model
– Direction
• Available results:
– Color plot of light and shadow

y
areas

nl
– Shadow area
– Shadow ratio

O
• Options:

se
– Quality
– Flip direction
Figure 1 – Original Geometry
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 3 – Viewing Shadow

Figure 2 – Viewing Sphere with Different Light Angle and
PT

Shadow on Surface Sphere Location

Using the Shadow Analysis Option

r
Fo

With the Shadow analysis option, you can simulate the effects of casting
shadows on selected surfaces. A set of surfaces (or a model in an assembly)
is selected to cast the shadow, and a light direction is specified. The system
then produces a color plot indicating lit and shadowed areas, as well as
providing shadow area data.
When performing a Shadow analysis, the following references must be
specified:
• Surface – Specifies the surfaces on which to cast the shadow.
• Model – Specifies the surfaces or part model that is casting the shadow.
• Direction – Specifies the direction in which the shadow is projected.
When a Shadow analysis is performed, the following results information can
be obtained:
• Color plot of light and shadow areas on the surfaces.

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 27

• Shadow area – Specifies the shadow area in the model units.
• Shadow ratio – Specifies the ratio of shadow area to surface area in the
plot.
When performing a Shadow analysis, the following options are available:
• Quality – Enables you to adjust the quality of the cast shadow.
• Flip direction – You can flip the direction so the shadow is projected from
the reference by clicking the arrow in the graphics window.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Using the Shadow Analysis Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Shadow [Link]

Task 1: Use the Shadow Analysis Option for surfaces of a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis

y
tab.

nl
3. Click the Inspect Geometry

O
group drop-down menu and
select Shadow .

se
4. Press CTRL and select both
upper surfaces.
U
5. Right-click and select Model
al

Collector.
rn

• Press CTRL and select both

surfaces on the sphere.
te

Model selection could be

In

another component in an
assembly, or surfaces within
the current model.
C
PT

6. Right-click and select Direction

Collector.
r
Fo

• Prehighlight datum plane

LIGHT and then select it.
7. Flip the light direction.
8. Notice the shadow pattern on the
surface.
9. In the Shadow dialog box, notice
the Shadow area and ratio
values.
• Select Saved as the analysis
type, if necessary.
• Click Complete Analysis .

© 2011 PTC Module 12 | Page 29

 10. In the model tree, right-click
Revolve 1 and select Edit.
11. Edit the rear distance from 12 to
64.
12. Right-click datum plane LIGHT
and select Edit.
13. Edit the angle to -45 and click
Regenerate .

y
14. Click Saved Analysis from the Manage group.

nl
15. In the Saved Analysis dialog box, click the eyeball to disable the
analysis display, and close the dialog box.

O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Module 13

y
Extending and Trimming Surfaces

nl
O
Module Overview

se
When working with surfaces, it is often useful to manipulate quilts to achieve
your design intent quickly.
U
In this module, you will learn how to extend and trim surfaces using a variety
of techniques.
al

Objectives
rn

After completing this module, you will be able to:

te

• Extend surfaces.
• Extend surfaces using measurements.
In

• Analyze extend surface options.

• Create a surface trim.
C

• Trim surfaces with geometry.

PT

• Trim surfaces with quilts.

• Trim surfaces using the silhouette trim option.
• Trim surfaces using the vertex round option.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 1

Extending Surfaces
The Extend tool enables you to extend a quilt by a specified
distance or up to a plane.

• Extend Original Surface

– Extends edge chain along
surface.
– Options:
♦ Same
♦ Tangent

y
♦ Approximate

nl
• Extend Surface To Plane

O
– Extends edge chain to plane
Figure 1 – Surface Extended
using Same Option

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Surface Extended

PT

using Tangent Option Figure 3 – Extending a Surface to Plane

Extending Surfaces
r

The Extend tool enables you to extend a quilt by a specified distance or up to

Fo

a plane. To start the Extend tool, first select the surface boundary edges to
be extended, and then click Extend from the Editing group.
You cannot select multiple edges using CTRL. Multiple edges must
be selected as a chain, such as One by One chain, or intent edges.

You specify the desired extend method by clicking the appropriate icon from
the Extend dashboard:
• Extend Original Surface – Extends the surface boundary edge chain
along the original surface. This option has three additional options that
determine how the extension is created:
– Same – Creates the extension of the same type as the original surface
(for example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface). The original
surface is extended past its selected boundary edge chain, and does
not create an additional surface patch. This is the default extend option.

Module 13 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 – Tangent – Creates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to the
original surface. With this option an additional surface patch is created.
– Approximate – Creates the extension as a boundary blend between the
boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the extension.
This method is useful when extending the surface up to a vertex that
does not lie along a straight edge. With this option an additional surface
patch is created.

• Extend Surface To Plane – Extends the boundary edge chain up to

a specified plane in the direction normal to this plane. With this option an
additional surface patch is created.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Extending Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Extend [Link]

Task 1: Extend the edges of a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the quilt and select the
right edge.

y
3. In the ribbon, click Extend

nl
from the Editing group.

O
4. Drag the handle to the left to 20.
5. Click Preview Feature

se
from the Surface Extension
Dashboard. Notice the surface
is “trimmed.”
U
al

6. Click Resume Feature

rn

from the Surface Extension

Dashboard.
te

7. Drag the handle to the right to

20 and click Complete Feature
In

from the Surface Extension

Dashboard.
C

8. From the Graphics toolbar, select

PT

No Hidden from the Model

Display types drop-down menu
and notice that the extended
surface portion is the same
r
Fo

surface.
9. Select Shading from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu.

Module 13 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 10. Select the quilt and select one of
the back edges.
11. Press SHIFT and select the other
back edge.
12. Click Extend from the Editing
group and drag the handle back
to 20.
13. In the Surface Extension
dashboard, select the Options
tab.

y
• Edit the Method to Tangent.

nl
14. Click Complete Feature
from the Surface Extension

O
Dashboard and de-select all
geometry.

15. Select No Hidden from the se

U
Model Display types drop-down
menu and notice the tangent line.
al

16. Select Shading from the

rn

Model Display types drop-down

menu.
te

17. Select the bottom quilt and select

In

one of the left edges.

18. Press SHIFT and select the
upper-left edge.
C

19. Click Extend from the Editing

PT

group and drag the handle left to

20.
20. Select the Options tab
r
Fo

from the Surface Extension

Dashboard and edit the Method
to Approximate.
21. Click Complete Feature
from the Surface Extension
Dashboard and de-select all
geometry.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 5

 22. Select the bottom quilt and
query-select the entire front
intent edge.
23. Click Extend from the Editing
group.
24. Enable Plane Display .
25. In the Surface Extension
dashboard, select Extend
Surface To Plane and

y
select datum plane TOP.

nl
26. Click Complete Feature

O
from the Surface Extension
Dashboard.

se
U
al
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Extending Surfaces using Measurements
You can use the Measurements tab to add multiple measurement
locations for the extend feature.
• Perform the following
operations on each added
point:
– Delete the point.
– Edit the offset Distance.
– Change the Distance
Type.

y
– Change the Reference:

nl
♦ Vertex or datum point

O
– Change the Location:
♦ Snap to reference

se
♦ Length ratio
Figure 1 – Adding Points to the Extension
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Measurements Dialog Box

C

Extending Surfaces using Measurements

PT

You can use the Measurements tab to add multiple measurement locations
for the extend feature. You can add new location points either by right-clicking
in the Measurements tab and selecting Add, or by right-clicking existing
r
Fo

location points in the graphics window and selecting Add.

For each location point, you can perform the following operations:
• Delete the point – Right-click the point in either the Measurements tab or
graphics window and select Delete to delete the point.
• Edit the Distance – You can specify a different offset distance from each
added point.
• Change the Distance Type – Several options are available controlling how
the distance is measured.
• Change the Reference – You can select a vertex or datum point along
the extension edge.
• Change the Location – The Location is specified as a length ratio. If you
want the point to be at the midpoint of the extension edge, you would
specify the Location as 0.5. When points are snapped to a specific
Reference, the Location field becomes grayed out. If you snap a point to

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 7

 either extension edge endpoint, the Location field displays as either End
1 or End 2.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Extending Surfaces using Measurements

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Extend_Measure EXTEND_MEASURE.PRT

Task 1: Extend the edges of a surface using measurements.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the quilt and select the

y
right edge.

nl
3. In the ribbon, click Extend
from the Editing group.

O
4. Drag the handle to the right to
20.

se
U
5. In the dashboard, select the
al

Measurements tab from the

Surface Extension Dashboard.
rn

• Right-click in the tab and

select Add.
te

• Drag the point downward to an

In

approximate Location of 0.20.

• Type 0.25 in the Location
column for point 2.
C

• Drag the point inward to an

PT

offset Distance of 15.

6. In the graphics window,

r

right-click in the new point

Fo

and select Add.

• In the Measurements tab,
select in the Reference
column for point 3.

• Enable Point Display .

• Select datum point PNT0.
• Notice that the Location value
becomes grayed out in the
Measurements tab.
• Type 25 in the Distance
column for point 3.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 9

 7. In the Measurements tab,
right-click and select Add.
• Drag the new point to the rear
endpoint (End 2).
• Notice that the Location value
becomes grayed out.
• Notice that the Distance is
initially 25.
• Type 20 in the Distance
column for point 4.

y
8. Click Complete Feature

nl
from the Surface Extension
Dashboard and de-select all

O
geometry.

se
9. Select the Extend feature by
selecting the right quilt edge. U
You must select the new
edge if selecting the extend
feature from the model.
al

Otherwise the boundary

rn

blend feature is selected.

10. Right-click and select Edit.

te

11. Edit the 25 dimension to 30 and

In

in the ribbon click Regenerate

from the Operations group.
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 13 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Analyzing Extend Surface Options
You can specify options for how the sides of surface geometry
are extended and measured.
• Measure options:
– Changes how extension is
measured when viewed from
the side.
• Distance Type options:
– Changes how extension is
measured when viewed from

y
straight on.

nl
• Extension side options:

O
– Changes how the surface
geometry is created for both
side 1 and side 2.

se
U
Figure 1 – Measure Options
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Extension Side Options Figure 3 – Distance Type Options

r
Fo

Analyzing Extend Surface Options

You can specify options for how the sides of surface geometry are extended
and measured.

Measurement Options
Within the Measurements tab of the Extend dashboard, the following options
are available:
• Measure options – Changes how the surface extension is measured when
viewed from the side. The following measurement options are available:

– Measure in Surface – Measures the extension distance in the

reference surface. In Figure 1, the extension distance is measured
along the reference surface in the top image.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 11

 – Measure in Plane – Measures the extension distance in the
selected plane. You must specify the plane. In the upper-right figure,
the extension distance is measured along the selected plane in the
bottom image.
• Distance Type – Changes how the surface extension is measured when
viewed straight on. The following Distance Type options are available:
– Normal To Edge – Measures extension distance normal to the boundary
edge. In Figure 3, the extension distance is measured normal to the
boundary edge in the bottom image.
– Along Edge – Measures extension distance along the measurement
edge. In Figure 3, the extension distance is measured along the edge in
the top image.

y
– To Vertex Parallel – Starts extension edge at the vertex and parallel to

nl
the boundary edge.

O
– To Vertex Tangent – Starts extension edge at the vertex and tangent
with the next one-sided edge.

Extension Side Options se

U
Within the Options tab of the Extend dashboard, you can specify how the
side surface geometry of the extend is created. You can specify how the
al

side surface geometry is created independently for side 1 and side 2. The
rn

following extension side options are available:

• Along – Creates the extension side along the selected side edge. In the
te

lower-left figure, the extension sides are created along the side edge
in the top image.
In

• Normal To – Creates the extension side normal to the boundary edge.

In the lower-left figure, the extension sides are created normal to the
C

boundary edge in the bottom image.

r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Analyzing Extend Surface Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Extend_Options

Task 1: Analyze the options available for extending the edges of a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the quilt and select one of
the front edges.

y
3. Press SHIFT and select the other

nl
front edge.

O
4. In the ribbon, click Extend
from the Editing group.

se
5. Drag the handle downward to 10.

6. From the Graphics toolbar, select

U
FRONT view from the orientation
drop-down menu and notice
al

the side edges of the extended

surface.
rn
te
In

7. In the dashboard, select the

C

Options tab from the Surface

Extension Dashboard.
PT

• Edit the drop-down lists to

Normal To for both Extension
sides.
r
Fo

8. Notice the surface geometry

updates in this view.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 13

 9. Orient to the RIGHT view
orientation from the orientation
drop-down menu.
10. In the dashboard, select the
Measurements tab from the
Surface Extension Dashboard.
• Notice that the measurement
type is set to Measure in
Surface .

y
nl
O
se
U
al

11. Enable Plane Display .

12. In the Measurements tab,
rn

edit the measurement type to

te

Measure in Plane .
• Select datum plane DTM1.
In
C
PT

13. Notice the dimension orientation updates in this view.

r

14. Set the measurement type back to Measure in Surface .

Fo

15. Orient to the FRONT view from

the orientation drop-down menu.
16. In the Measurements tab, notice
the Distance Type is set to
Normal to Edge.
• This measurement type
measures normal to the
extension edge.

Module 13 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 17. Edit the Distance Type to Along
Edge.
18. This measurement type
measures along the side
edge.
19. Notice the dimension orientation
updates in this view.
20. Click Complete Feature
from the Surface Extension
Dashboard.

y
nl
21. Orient to the BACK view from the orientation drop-down menu.

O
22. Unhide Fill 1 and click Plane Display to disable their display.

se
23. With the fill feature still selected,
select the horizontal edge and
U
click Extend from the Editing
group.
al

24. Drag the handle down to 10.

rn

25. Select the Measurements tab

from the Surface Extension
Dashboard and notice that the
te

Distance Type is set to Normal

to Edge.
In

26. Edit the Distance Type to To

Vertex Parallel.
C
PT

27. Edit the Distance Type to To

Vertex Tangent.
r
Fo

28. In the Measurements tab

from the Surface Extension
Dashboard, right-click and select
Add.
29. Drag the new point to End 2
and edit its Distance Type to To
Vertex Tangent.
30. Click Complete Feature
from the Surface Extension
Dashboard.

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 15

Creating a Surface Trim
A surface trim is analogous to a solid cut, except that it trims
away a portion of a surface.

• Create the surface trim feature.

• Specify the Trim Quilt.
• Flip Options:
– Keep one side
– Keep other side

y
– Keep both sides

nl
• Thicken Options.

O
se
Figure 1 – Outside of Surface
Trim Kept
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Both Sides of

Figure 2 – Inside of Surface Trim Kept Surface Trim Kept
r
Fo

Creating a Surface Trim

When creating solids, you can add material by creating protrusions and then
remove material by creating cuts. With surfaces, you can create surfaces and
also create surface trims. A surface trim is analogous to a solid cut, except
that it trims away a portion of a surface.
You can create a surface trim as an extrude, revolve, sweep, blend, variable
section sweep, swept blend, and so on. You initiate a surface trim differently,
depending upon the tool type:
• Menu manager tool – When you want to create a surface trim as a feature
that uses the menu manager, you can start the tool as either a Surface
trim or Thin Surface trim. You then select the quilt to trim, and create the
desired feature as usual. Finally, you can flip the trim side.

Module 13 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 • Dashboard tool – When you want to create a surface trim as a feature
that uses the dashboard, you start the desired feature tool and click the
surface icon in the dashboard. Next, you click the Remove Material icon,
which you can think of as removing material from a surface in the form of a
trim. You then create the feature as usual, using the thin option if desired.
Finally, you can flip the trim side.
You must also specify the Trim Quilt, which is the quilt that is to be trimmed
by the surface feature you have created.

Flip Options
After selecting the trim quilt, you can flip the side to keep between three

y
options:

nl
• Keep one side – The surface portion is removed within the surface, as

O
shown in Figure 1.
• Keep other side – The surface portion is removed outside the surface,

se
as shown in Figure 2.
• Keep both sides – The surface portion is trimmed, but both sides are kept.
When both sides are kept, a new option appears called the Identity Side
U
option. This option is displayed with an additional arrow in the graphics
window and a flip option in the dashboard. The flip option enables you to
al

select which side maintains the original quilt ID. In Figure 3, the Identity
arrow points inward, so the new feature becomes the original quilt ID.
rn
te

Thicken Options
In

Like most solid features, you can use the Thicken option for dashboard
C

features and the Thin option for menu manager feature tools. Using the
Thicken option, you can flip the thicken side using one of three options:
PT

• One side – The Surface Trim is thickened within the surface.

• Other side – The Surface Trim is thickened outside the surface.
r

• Both sides – Both sides of the Surface Trim are thickened.

Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating a Surface Trim

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Trim CREATE_SURF_TRIM.PRT

Task 1: Trim a surface with another surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Sketch 1 from the model
tree and start the Extrude

y
from the shapes group.

nl
3. In the Extrude dashboard, click

O
Surface and click Remove
Material .

se
• Select the rounded quilt.
• Select the Options tab from
U
the Extrude dashboard.
• Edit the depths for Side 1 and
al

Side 2 to Through All .

rn

4. Click Preview Feature from

the Extrude dashboard.
te

5. Click Resume Feature from

In

the Extrude dashboard.

6. Click Flip Trim Sides so both
C

sides are being trimmed.

PT

7. Notice the additional flip identity

icon that appears in the graphics
window.
r

8. Notice the additional flip

Fo

identity icon that appears in the

dashboard.

Module 13 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 9. Click Complete Feature
from the Extrude dashboard and
de-select all geometry.
10. Select the rectangular trim area
so the quilt highlights.
11. Notice that the part is two quilts
now.

y
nl
O
12. Edit the definition of Extrude 1.
se
U
13. Click Flip Trim Sides so the
material is removed outside the
al

sketch.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

14. Click Preview Feature from

the Extrude dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 19

 15. Click Resume Feature from
the Extrude dashboard.
16. Click Flip Trim Sides so the
material is removed inside the
sketch.
17. Click Thicken Sketch and
edit the thickness value to 20.
• Click Change Thickness Side
three times to view the

y
options.

nl
18. Click Complete Feature from
the Extrude dashboard.

O
This completes the procedure.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 Trimming Surfaces with Geometry
You can trim a selected surface quilt using other geometry
including datum planes, quilts, or curves or edges.

• Trimming geometry includes:

– Datum plane
– Other quilts
– Curves or edges
• Flip the side to keep:
– One side

y
nl
– Other side
– Both sides

O
se
Figure 1 – Trimming a Surface
using a Datum Plane
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 2 – Trimming a Surface Figure 3 – Trimming a Surface

Fo

using a Curve using Another Surface

Trimming Surfaces with Geometry

You can trim a selected surface quilt using other geometry including datum
planes, quilts, or curves or edges. In Figure 1, the quilt is trimmed using a
datum plane. In Figure 2, the quilt is trimmed using a curve, and in Figure
3, the surface quilt is trimmed with another quilt.
After selecting the trimming object, you can flip the side to keep between
three options:
• One side – Surface is removed within trimming object.
• Other side – Surface is removed outside the trimming object.
• Both sides – Surface is trimmed, but both sides are kept.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Trimming Surfaces with Geometry

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Trim_Geometry TRIM_WTH_GEOM.PRT

Task 1: Trim surfaces using existing geometry.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Select the orange quilt.

y
nl
3. In the ribbon, click Trim from
the Editing group.

O
4. Select datum plane DTM1.

se
U
5. Click Flip Trim Sides three
times to view the trim options
al

available.
rn

6. Click Complete Feature from

the Surface Trim Dashboard to
te

keep the large quilt portion.

In

7. Disable Plane Display .

8. Select the orange quilt again

C

and start the Trim from the

PT

Editing group.
9. Select the datum curve.
r
Fo

10. Click Flip Trim Sides four

times to view the trim options
available.
11. Click Complete Feature in
the Surface Trim Dashboard to
keep the inside oval portion.

Module 13 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 12. Select the orange quilt again
and start the Trim from the
Editing group.
13. Select the transparent surface
quilt.

y
nl
14. Click Flip Trim Sides three

O
times to view the trim options
available.

se
15. Click Complete Feature in
the Surface Trim Dashboard to
U
keep the outside portion.
al
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 23

Trimming Surfaces with Quilts Options
When trimming a surface with another quilt, there are numerous
options available.

• Options include:
– Keep trimming surface
– Thin trim
♦ Specify thickness value
♦ Thin side options
♦ Trimming method

y
♦ Excluded surfaces

nl
– Silhouette

O
se
Figure 1 – Trimming a Surface
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT

Figure 3 – Thin Trim with

Fo

Figure 2 – Trimming Surface Not Kept Excluded Surface

Trimming Surfaces with Quilts Options

When trimming a surface with another quilt, the following options are
available:
• Keep trimming surface – If enabled, the quilt selected as the trimming
object is left intact when the trim is completed. If disabled, the quilt selected
as the trimming object is consumed by the trim feature when completed.
In Figure 1, the trimming surface has been kept. In Figure 2, the trimming
surface has not been kept.
• Thin trim – When enabled, creates a trim based on a thickness value from
the trimming quilt. With the Thin trim, you can specify the following options:
– Thickness value – Specifies the thickness of the trim.

Module 13 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 – Thin side options – Enables you to further control how the Thin trim is
made using the Flip Trim Sides option in the dashboard. Options
include:
♦ One side – Thicken is applied to the inside of the sketch.
♦ Other side – Thicken is applied to the outside of the sketch.
♦ Both sides – Thicken is applied symmetrically to both sides of the
sketch.
– Method – Enables you to specify the method of Thin trim. Methods
include Normal to surface, Automatic fit, and Controlled fit.
– Excluded surfaces – You can select surfaces from the quilt selected as
the trimming object to exclude them from the trim operation. In Figure 3,

y
the left surface of the rectangular trimming object has been excluded

nl
from the Thin trim. The Auto select option automatically excludes
surfaces for successful completion of the feature.

O
• Silhouette trim – Trims using the Silhouette Trim option.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Trimming Surfaces with Quilts Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Trim_Geometry_Options
TRIM_GEOM_OPTIONS.PRT
Task 1: Trim a surface using different quilts options.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the orange quilt and in the

y
ribbon, click Trim from the

nl
Editing group.

O
3. Select the transparent quilt.
4. Click Preview Feature from

se
the Surface Trim Dashboard.
U
al

5. Click Resume Feature from

the Surface Trim Dashboard.
rn

6. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
te

• De-select the Keep trimming

surface check box.
In

7. Click Preview Feature .

C
PT

8. Click Resume Feature .

9. Select the Options tab from the
r

Surface Trim Dashboard.

Fo

• Select the Thin trim check

box.
• Edit the Thin trim to 10.
10. Click Flip Trim Sides three
times to view the trim options
available.
11. Click Preview Feature .

Module 13 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click Resume Feature .
13. Select the Options tab from the
Surface Trim Dashboard.
• Click in the Exclude surfaces
collector.
• Select the left surface of the
rectangular extrude feature.

y
nl
14. Click Complete Feature from
the Surface Trim Dashboard.

O
15. Right-click Trim 1 and select
Hide.
16. Notice that the quilt became part
of the trim feature. se
U
al
rn
te

This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 27

Trimming Surfaces with the Silhouette Trim
Option
The Silhouette Trim option enables you to trim a surface quilt
based on the outline of the quilt shape as viewed from a view
direction reference.

• Available when a plane is selected

as the trimming object.
• The surface is trimmed as it falls

y
over the “horizon” based on the
view direction plane.

nl
• Keep one, other, or both sides.

O
se
Figure 1 – Silhouette Trim,
One Side Kept
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Silhouette Trim, Figure 3 – Silhouette Trim,

PT

Other Side Kept Both Sides Kept

r

Trimming Surfaces with the Silhouette Trim Option

Fo

The Silhouette Trim option enables you to trim a surface quilt based on the
outline of the quilt shape as viewed from a view direction reference. The
Silhouette Trim option is available within the Trim tool when the trim quilt
is selected and a plane is selected as the trimming object. The surface is
trimmed as it falls over the “horizon” based on the view direction plane. You
can keep either side of the surface, or both sides. In Figure 1, one side of
the surface is kept. In Figure 2, the other side is kept, and in Figure 3, both
sides are kept.

Module 13 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Trimming Surfaces with the Silhouette
Trim Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Trim_Silhouette [Link]

Task 1: Trim a surface using the Silhouette trim option.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. From the Graphics toolbar, select
3D from the orientation types

O
drop-down menu.
3. Select Wireframe from the

se
Model Display types drop-down
menu.
U
4. Select the quilt.
al

5. In the ribbon, click Trim from

the Editing group.
rn

6. Select datum plane VIEW.

7. In the dashboard, click
te

Silhouette Trim .
In

8. Notice that as viewed from the

VIEW datum plane, the surface
C

is trimmed at the “horizon”

location. In this case, there are
PT

two silhouette lines, and the

central portion is kept.
r

9. In the graphics window, click the

Fo

arrow to flip the direction.

10. Notice that the surface is trimmed
at the same silhouette location,
but the opposite sides are kept.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 29

 11. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim
Sides .
12. Notice that the surface is trimmed
at the same silhouette location,
but that both sides are kept.

13. Right-click and select Flip.

14. Click Complete Feature from

y
the Surface Trim dashboard.

nl
O
se
U
15. Select datum plane VIEW, then
right-click and select Edit.
al

16. Edit the angle from 0 to -20 and

rn

click Regenerate from the

Operation group.
te

17. Notice that the silhouette trim

In

updates to reflect the new

horizon from the updated view
direction.
C
PT

This completes the procedure.

r
Fo

Module 13 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Trimming Surfaces with the Vertex Round Option
You can trim the vertices of a quilt using the Vertex Round
option.

• Create Vertex Rounds on

convex or concave corners
of a quilt.
• Vertex Rounds can be
applied to 2-D or 3-D
surfaces.

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Original Surface Model
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Surface Model with

Vertex Rounds
r
Fo

Trimming Surfaces with the Vertex Round Option

You can trim the vertices of a quilt using the Vertex Round option. This
feature applies a fillet to a concave or convex corner of a quilt. The vertex
round can be applied to 2-D or 3-D surfaces. In Figure 2, vertex round trims
have been applied to three different corners of the surface. Vertex round radii
can be modified similar to a round radius.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Trimming Surfaces with the Vertex
Round Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Vertex_Round VERTEX_ROUND.PRT

Task 1: Trim a surface using the Vertex Round option.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Click the Surface group
drop-down menu and select

nl
Vertex Round.

O
3. Select the uppermost right
corner.

se
4. Type 20 and press ENTER.
U
al
rn

5. Click Complete Feature from

the Vertex Round Dashboard.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

6. Click the Surface group

drop-down menu and select
Vertex Round.
7. Select the concave corner below
the previous corner.
8. Type 14 and press ENTER.

Module 13 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 9. Click Complete Feature from
the Vertex Round Dashboard.

y
nl
10. Click the Surface group
drop-down menu and select

O
Vertex Round.
11. Select the front-right corner.
12. Type 20 and press ENTER.
se
U
al
rn
te
In

13. Click Complete Feature from

the Vertex Round Dashboard.
C
r PT
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 13 | Page 33

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13 | Page 34 © 2011 PTC

 Module 14

y
Manipulating Surfaces

nl
O
Module Overview

se
When working with surfaces, it is often useful to manipulate quilts to achieve
your design intent quickly.
U
In this module, you will learn how to copy and offset surfaces, as well as how
to move, mirror, and merge surfaces using a variety of techniques.
al

Objectives
rn

After completing this module, you will be able to:

te

• Copy and paste surfaces.

• Offset surfaces.
In

• Offset and expand surfaces.

• Offset surfaces and add draft.
C

• Move and rotate quilts.

PT

• Mirror quilts.
• Merge surfaces.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 1

Copying and Pasting Surfaces
Copying and Pasting a surface creates an overlay copy of the
surface.
• You can then manipulate the
copied surface.
• You can exclude surfaces from the
copy.
• Options:
– Copy all surfaces as is

y
– Exclude surfaces and Fill holes

nl
– Copy Inside boundary
Figure 1 – Copied Surface with

O
Excluded Surface Portion

se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Copied Surface Figure 3 – Surface Copied Inside

with Filled Holes Boundary Only
In
C

Copying and Pasting Surfaces

PT

Copying and Pasting a surface creates an overlay copy of the surface. You
can then manipulate the copied surface.
r

Copy and Paste Selections

Fo

You can select any surface or surface set (quilt or solid) to copy and paste.
Surface set types include the following:
• Single – You can press CTRL to select multiple surfaces.
• Solid surfaces
• Intent surfaces
• Surface/boundary
• Loop
• Exclude – You can exclude individual surfaces from sets by pressing CTRL
and de-selecting them. In Figure 1, the center rectangular square has
been excluded from the surface copy.
You can select surfaces using either of the following methods:
• Select surfaces directly using the mouse.

Module 14 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 • Use the Chain dialog box. You can use the Chain dialog box in the context
of the tool only.

Copy and Paste Methods

When copying and pasting surfaces, you can use any of the following
methods, or a combination:

• In the ribbon, click Copy and Paste icons from the Operations
group.
• Press CTRL+C and CTRL+V shortcut keys.

y
nl
Copy and Paste Surface Options

O
The following options are available when copying and pasting surfaces:
• Copy all surfaces as is – Creates an exact duplicate of the original surface.

se
• Exclude surfaces and Fill holes – Copies some of the surfaces with an
option to fill holes or other voids in the surface. In Figure 2, the square cut
U
and round hole have both been filled.
• Copy Inside boundary – Copies the selected surfaces, and trims them to a
al

selected closed boundary curve. In Figure 3, the surface has been copied
and trimmed to the curve.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Copy_Paste COPY_PASTE.PRT

Task 1: Copy and paste surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, select Extrude
3.

y
3. Query select the entire top

nl
surface.

O
4. In the ribbon, click Copy from

se
the from the Operations group. U
5. In the ribbon, click Paste
from the from the Operations
group.
al

6. In the Surface Copy dashboard,

rn

select the Options tab.

• Select the Copy all surfaces
te

as is option, if necessary.
7. Click Complete Feature .
In

8. Right-click and select Hide to

hide Copy 1.
C
PT

9. In the model tree, select Extrude

3.
10. Query select the entire top
r

surface.
Fo

11. Click Copy.

12. Click Paste.
13. Press CTRL and select the
center rectangle to exclude it.
14. Click Complete Feature .
15. Right-click and select Hide to
hide Copy 2.

16. In the model tree, select Extrude 3.

17. Query select the entire top surface.

Module 14 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 18. Press CTRL+C to copy.
19. Press CTRL+V to paste.
20. Select the Options tab.
• Select Exclude surfaces and
Fill holes.
• Press CTRL and select the
edges of the square cut and
round hole.

21. Click Complete Feature .

y
22. Right-click and select Hide to

nl
hide Copy 3.

O
se
23. In the model tree, right-click Project 1 and select Unhide.
U
24. In the model tree, select Extrude 3.
25. Query-select the entire top surface.
al

26. Press CTRL+C to copy and

rn

press CTRL+V to paste.

27. Select the Options tab.
te

• Select Copy Inside

boundary.
In

• Query select the entire

projected curve.
C
PT

28. Click Complete Feature .

r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 5

Offsetting Surfaces
You can create a surface quilt by offsetting a value from another
quilt or a solid surface.

• The offset surface remains

dependent on the original surface.
• Fit types:
– Normal to Surface
– Automatic Fit
– Controlled Fit

y
• Other options:

nl
– Create side surface

O
– Special handling
Figure 1 – Offsetting a Surface

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Side Surfaces Versus Figure 3 – Automatic Fit Versus

No Side Surfaces Created Controlled Fit
r
Fo

Offsetting Surfaces
You can create a surface quilt by offsetting a value from another quilt or a
solid surface, as shown in Figure 1. The offset surface remains dependent
on the original surface. In addition to specifying the offset distance, you can
flip the direction the surface is offset.
When offsetting surfaces, the following options are available:
• Fit type – Enables you to specify how the surface is offset. Options include:
– Normal to Surface – Offsets the surface normal to the reference surface
or quilt.
– Automatic Fit – Automatically determines a coordinate system and
offsets the surface along its axes as necessary to create the offset
approximately in shape to the original. This fit type is useful in cases
where the Normal to Surface fit type fails.

Module 14 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 – Controlled Fit – Enables you to select a coordinate system, and manually
control whether the surface is translated in the X, Y, and Z axes.
• Create side surface – Creates additional surfaces between the offset
surface and the original surface. Note that these surfaces are not merged
with the other offset surfaces. Figure 2 displays a surface offset with and
without side surfaces created.
• Special handling – The Special Handling dialog box can appear if the offset
fails; this typically occurs when the offset exceeds the radius value of the
surface. The Special Handling dialog box provides you with the option of
excluding failing surfaces from the offset operation. There is also an option
for Approximate Offset within the special handling dialog box. This option
enables the system to offset what it can, and approximate the surface
for areas it cannot offset. In addition, you have the option to leave the

y
approximate offset surface attached or unattached from the original.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Offsetting Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Offset [Link]

Task 1: Offset a surface using different offset types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the quilt.

y
3. In the ribbon, click Offset
from the Editing group.

nl
4. Click the arrow in the graphics

O
window to flip the offset direction.
5. Drag the offset handle to 25.

6. Orient to the FRONT view

se
U
orientation.
7. In the Offset dashboard, select
al

the Options tab.

• Notice the offset type is
rn

Normal to Surface.
• Edit the offset to 35.
te

• Notice the preview geometry

In

fails.
• Edit the offset type to
Automatic Fit.
C
PT

8. Click the arrow to flip the offset

downward.
9. Edit the offset type to Controlled
r

Fit.
Fo

10. Click Csys Display to

enable their display.
11. In the Options tab, clear the X
check box to prevent translation
in that direction.
12. Drag the offset to 45 to notice
the difference.

13. Notice the offset surface does not change shape in the X direction.

Module 14 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 14. Click Complete Feature .
15. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

16. Click Csys Display to

disable their display.

y
Task 2: Offset a surface with side surfaces.

nl
1. In the model tree, press CTRL

O
and select Offset 1 and Extrude
1.

se
• Right-click and select Hide.
2. Right-click Extrude 2 and select
U
Unhide.
al
rn

3. Select the quilt and click Offset

from the Editing group.
te

4. Click the arrow in the graphics

window to flip the offset inward.
In

5. Edit the offset to 20.

C
PT

6. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
• Select the Create side
r

surface check box.

Fo

7. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 9

 8. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select No Hidden from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu.
9. Notice the surfaces are not
merged, as indicated by the
green one-sided edges.
10. Select Shading from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 Offsetting Surfaces with the Expand Option
You can offset a surface by expanding it based on a sketch,
creating an embossed surface.

• An expansion is seen on one side

whereas a depression is seen on
the other side.
• Options:
– Flip the directions of:
♦ Material side

y
♦ Offset direction

nl
– Side surface normal to:
♦ Surface

O
♦ Sketch

se
Figure 1 – Flipping Material Side
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Offset Normal to

C

Figure 2 – Flipping Offset Direction Sketch Versus Surface

PT

Offsetting Surfaces with the Expand Option

r

You can offset a surface by expanding it based on a sketch, creating an

Fo

embossed surface. The original surface is literally offset, so an expansion is

seen on one side, and a depression is created on the other side.
When creating the offset surface with the expand option, you must specify
the surface quilt to be offset and the sketch that is to be expanded.

Flip Direction Options

You can flip the directions of the following two items:
• Material side – In Figure 1, you can view the differences between the
resultant geometry when the material side is flipped.
• Offset direction – In Figure 2, you can view the differences between the
resultant geometry when the offset direction is flipped.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 11

Side Surface Normal To Option
The Side surface normal to option controls which entity the side surface is
normal to. You can specify either of the following:
• Surface – The surface is offset normal to itself. In the right image of figure
3, the side surface normal to is the surface.
• Sketch – The surface is offset normal to the sketching plane of the
reference sketch. In the left image of Figure 3, the side surface normal
to is the sketch.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Offsetting Surfaces with the Expand
Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Offset_Expand OFFSET_EXPAND.PRT

Task 1: Offset the surfaces in a part model using the Expand option.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select the quilt.

nl
3. In the ribbon, click Offset
from the Editing group.

O
4. In the dashboard, click Expand

se
Offset .
5. Select the sketch.
U
6. Edit the offset to 20.
al

7. Click Preview Feature .

rn

8. Orient to the 3D2 view

orientation.
te

9. Notice the emboss effect.

10. Orient to the 3D1 view
In

orientation.
11. Click Resume Feature .
C
PT

12. Click Change Material Direction

.
r

13. Click Preview Feature .

Fo

14. Click Resume Feature .

15. Click Change Material Direction
.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 13

 16. Click Change Offset Direction
.
17. Click Preview Feature .
18. Click Resume Feature .
19. Click Change Offset Direction
.

y
nl
O
20. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.

se
• Select Surface for the Side
surface normal to option.
21. Click Complete Feature .
U
al
rn
te
In
C

This completes the procedure.

r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Offsetting Surfaces with Draft
You can offset a surface and create draft angles by expanding it
based on a sketch, creating an embossed surface.

• Similar to Offset Expand, except it

adds a draft.
• Options:
– Side surface normal to:
♦ Surface

y
♦ Sketch

nl
– Side surface profile:
♦ Straight

O
♦ Tangent

se
Figure 1 – Side Surface Normal
U
to Sketch
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Side Surface Normal Figure 3 – Side Surface

r
Fo

to Surface Tangent Profile

Offsetting Surfaces with Draft

You can offset a surface and create draft angles by expanding it based on
a sketch, creating an embossed surface. This option is similar to Offset
Expand, except it adds in the capability of a draft angle. The original surface
is literally offset, so an expansion is seen on one side, and a depression
is created on the other side.
When creating the offset surface with draft, you must specify the surface quilt
and the sketch that is to be expanded. You can flip the offset direction and
also specify a draft angle for the expanded surface.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 15

Offset with Draft Options
The following options are available when offsetting a surface with draft:
• Side surface normal to – Controls which entity the side surface is normal
to. You can specify either of the following:
– Surface – The surface is offset normal to itself. In Figure 2, the side
surface normal to is the surface.
– Sketch – The surface is offset normal to the sketching plane of the
reference sketch. In Figure 1, the side surface normal to is the sketch.
• Side surface profile – Controls the profile of the side surface. You can
specify either of the following:
– Straight – Side surfaces are created with sharp edges. Both figures 1

y
and 2 are created using the Straight side surface profile.

nl
– Tangent – Rounded surfaces are created between the offset surface
and the parent surface. In Figure 3, the side surface profile is specified

O
as Tangent.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Offsetting Surfaces with Draft

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Offset_Draft OFFSET_DRAFT.PRT

Task 1: Offset the surfaces in a part model with draft.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the quilt.

y
3. In the ribbon, click Offset
from the Editing group.

nl
4. In the Offset dashboard, click

O
With Draft .

se
5. Select the sketch.
6. Edit the offset to 20.
U
7. Edit the draft angle to 10.
8. Click Preview Feature .
al
rn

9. Click Resume Feature .

10. In the dashboard, select the
te

Options tab.
• Select Sketch for the Side
In

surface normal to option.

11. Click Preview Feature .
C
r PT
Fo

12. Click Resume Feature .

13. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
• Select Tangent for the Side
surface profile option.
14. Click Complete Feature .

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 17

 15. Orient to the 3D2 view
orientation.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 Moving and Rotating Quilts
You can transform a surface quilt by translating or rotating it.

• Differences from copying/pasting

features:
– You must select the quilt.
– Transform is always dependent
on the original.
– You have the option to hide the
original.

y
• Hide original geometry option.

nl
• Transform operations:
– Move

O
– Rotate Figure 1 – Original Geometry

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Transformed Quilt, Figure 3 – Transformed Quilt,

Original Geometry Retained Original Geometry Hidden
C
PT

Moving and Rotating Quilts

You can transform a surface quilt by translating or rotating it. To transform a
quilt, select the quilt and use the Copy and Paste Special functions. A new
r

surface feature is created, leaving the original intact in the model tree.
Fo

The quilt transform functionality is fundamentally different than copying and

pasting features in the following three ways:
• You must select the quilt, not the surface feature. This is important
because if you select the feature you simply create a feature copy, not
a surface transform.
• The surface transform is always dependent on the original quilt.
• By default, the original quilt is hidden upon completion, but you have the
option to leave the original quilt displayed.
When transforming a quilt, the following option is available:
• Hide original geometry – Hides the original quilt. You can disable this
option to leave the original quilt visible. In Figure 2, the quilt is transformed
and the original quilt is not hidden. In Figure 3, the quilt is transformed and
the original quilt is hidden.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 19

Transform Operations
You can control transform operations using the Transformations tab in the
dashboard. The following transform operations are available:
• Move – Enables you to select a translation reference such as a plane, axis,
or edge, and specify a translation value. You can also drag the handle to
move the quilt.
• Rotate – Enables you to select a rotation reference such as an axis or
edge, and specify an angle value. You can also drag the handle to change
the angle for the quilt.
• Add Move – Enables you to add another move or rotate transformation

y
within the feature. You can have several move and rotate operations within

nl
a single feature.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Moving and Rotating Quilts

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Move_Rotate MOVE_ROTATE.PRT

Task 1: Transform a surface by moving and rotating it.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. In the model tree, select Extrude

y
2.

nl
3. In the graphics window, select

O
Extrude 2 again to select the
quilt.

You must select the quilt

rather than the feature; se
U
otherwise, you will actually
create a feature copy, not a
al

surface transform.
rn

4. In the ribbon, click Copy and

te

click Paste Special from the

In

Paste drop-down menu.

5. In the Paste Special dialogue
C

box, select the Apply

Move/rotate transformation
PT

check box
6. In the Move(Copy) dashboard,
r

click Rotate and Prehighlight

Fo

datum axis CTR and then select

it.
7. Edit the angle to 90.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 21

 8. In the dashboard, select the
Transformations tab.
• Click New Move and select
datum plane DTM1 as the
Direction Reference.
• Drag the translation handle
down to 3.

y
nl
9. Click Complete Feature .

O
se
U
al

10. Select Extrude 2.

rn

11. Select Extrude 2 again to select

te

the quilt.
In

You must select the quilt

rather than the feature;
C

otherwise you will actually

create a feature copy, not a
PT

surface transform.
r

12. Click Copy and click Paste

Fo

Special .
13. In the Paste Special dialogue
box, select the Apply
Move/rotate transformation
check box
14. In the dashboard, click Translate
, if necessary, and select the
front, horizontal edge of the base
feature.
15. Drag the translation handle to
the right to 3.

Module 14 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 16. Right-click and select New
Move.
17. Right-click and select Rotate.
• Select datum axis A_1.
• Edit the angle to 270.

18. Click Complete Feature .

y
nl
O
se
U
19. In the model tree, select Extrude
2, then right-click and select
al

hide.
20. Right-click Extrude 2 and select
rn

Edit.
te

21. Zoom in and edit the height from

1 to 1.5.
In

22. Click Regenerate .

C

This completes the procedure.

r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 23

Mirroring Quilts
You can transform a surface quilt by mirroring it.
• Specify a reference plane.
• Differences from mirroring
features:
– You must select the quilt.
– Transform is always dependent
on the original.
– You have the option to hide the
original.

y
nl
• Hide original geometry option.

O
Figure 1 – Original Geometry

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Mirrored Quilt, Original Figure 3 – Mirrored Quilt, Original

Geometry Hidden Geometry Retained
PT

Mirroring Quilts
r
Fo

You can transform a surface quilt by mirroring it. To mirror a quilt, select the
quilt and start the Mirror . You must specify a reference plane for the
mirror. A new surface feature is created, leaving the original feature intact in
the model tree.
The quilt mirror functionality is fundamentally different than mirroring features
in the following three ways:
• You must select the quilt, not the surface feature. This is important
because if you select the feature you simply create a feature mirror, not
a surface transform.
• The surface transform is always dependent on the original quilt. Unlike a
conventional mirror feature, you cannot make the transform independent
on the original feature.
• By default, the original quilt is displayed upon completion, but you have
the option to hide the original quilt.

Module 14 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 When mirroring a quilt, the following option is available:
• Hide original geometry – Hides the original quilt. You can enable this option
to hide the original quilt. In Figure 2, the quilt is mirrored about datum plane
TOP, and the original quilt is hidden. In Figure 3, the quilt is mirrored about
datum plane RIGHT, and the original quilt is not hidden.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 25

PROCEDURE - Mirroring Quilts

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Mirror [Link]

Task 1: Transform a surface by mirroring it.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, select Revolve
1.

y
3. In the graphics window, select

nl
Revolve 1 again to select the
quilt.

O
You must select the quilt
rather than the feature;
otherwise you will get a
feature mirror, not surface se
U
transform.
al

4. Start the Mirror from the

rn

Editing group, and select datum

plane TOP from the model tree.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

5. In the model tree, select Revolve

1, then right-click and select hide.
6. Click Complete Feature .

Module 14 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 7. Select Mirror 1.
8. Select Mirror 1 again to select
the quilt.
You must select the quilt
rather than the feature;
otherwise you will get a
feature mirror, not surface
transform.

y
nl
9. Start the Mirror from the
Editing group, and select datum

O
plane RIGHT from the model
tree.

se
U
al
rn
te

10. Click Complete Feature .

In
C
r PT
Fo

11. Right-click Revolve 1 and select

Edit.
12. Zoom in and edit the offset value
from 150 to 100.

13. Click Regenerate .

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 27

Merging Surfaces
Merging a quilt is required for operations such as creating solids
from quilts.
• Colors:
– Green = one-sided
edges.
– Magenta = two-sided
edges.
• Merge makes one-sided
edges two-sided.

y
• Merge options:

nl
– Intersect

O
– Join

se
U
Figure 1 – Surface Merge Keep Options
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Surfaces Edge Figure 3 – Surface Edge Display

Display of Separate Quilts of Merged Quilts
r
Fo

Merging Surfaces
You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts. Merging a quilt
makes it selectable as a single entity for other operations, and is required for
operations such as creating solids from quilts.
Remember the following:
• Surfaces are shown using green and magenta highlighting on the edges.
• Green denotes outer or one-sided edges.
• Magenta denotes inner or two-sided edges because they border two
surface patches.
Therefore:
• Merging a surface results in the creation of two-sided edges from one-sided
edges. In Figure 2, the adjacent quilt surface edges are separate,

Module 14 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 one-sided edges, as they display in green. In Figure 3, the quilts have
been merged to form two-sided, magenta edges.
• Merged surface edges appear in magenta.

Merge Options
There are two types of merge operations, used for different surface geometry:
• Intersect – Primarily used for intersecting quilts, when a trimming effect is
desired, although it can be used on adjacent quilts. The Intersect option
provides up to two flip arrows, enabling four possible geometry outcomes,
as shown in Figure 1. Intersect is the default merge option.

y
• Join – Recommended for use on adjacent quilts. Join can also be used to

nl
join surfaces when no trimming effect is desired. For example, you could
join two surfaces that meet in a “T,” without having to decide which sides

O
to keep.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Merging Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Merge [Link]

Task 1: Merge surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the oval surface.
3. Press CTRL and select the

y
boundary surface.

nl
4. In the ribbon, click Merge

O
from the Editing group.
5. In the dashboard, select the

se
Options tab.
• Select Intersect, if necessary.
U
6. Click Preview Feature .
al

7. Click Resume Feature .

rn

8. In the Merge dashboard, click

Change Second Quilt Side .
te

9. Click Preview Feature .

In
C
PT

10. Click Resume Feature .

11. In the graphics window, click
r

both arrows to flip them.

Fo

12. Click Preview Feature .

Module 14 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 13. Click Resume Feature .
14. In the dashboard, click Change
Second Quilt Side .
15. Click Complete Feature .

Task 2: Join surfaces in a part model.

y
nl
1. Press CTRL and select JOIN1,

O
JOIN2, and JOIN3.
2. Right-click and select Unhide.

se
3. De-select all geometry.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar,
U
select No Hidden from the
Model Display types drop-down
al

menu.
rn

5. Notice the one-sided green

edges between the main surface
and the three “joined” surfaces.
te

6. Press CTRL and select the main

In

center quilt and right quilt.

C

7. In the ribbon, click Merge

from the Editing group.
PT

8. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
• Select Join.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 14 | Page 31

 9. Press CTRL and drag a window
around all quilts to select them.
10. Click Complete Feature and
de-select all geometry.
11. Notice that the edges between
the main surface and three
joined surfaces are two-sided
magenta edges.
12. Select Shading from the
Model Display types drop-down

y
menu.

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14 | Page 32 © 2011 PTC

 Module 15

y
Creating and Editing Solids using Quilts

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Surfaces are primarily used to define complex shapes that are difficult to
define using solid modeling tools. Once the surfaces are created however,
the creation of a solid model is typically the goal. Also, adding or removing
U
material from solid models using surfaces is a powerful editing technique.
al

In this module, you will learn to use a variety of tools to add and remove
material when working with solid and surface models.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Thicken quilts.
• Solidify quilts to add and remove material, as well as patch material.
C

• Offset surfaces using the Replace option.

PT

• Create rounds on surfaces.

• Converting solid rounds to surfaces.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 1

Thickening Surface Quilts
With the Thicken tool, you can offset a selected quilt to create or
remove material.

• Basic controls:
– Add material
– Remove material
– Thickness value
– Flip direction
• Thickening options:

y
– Thicken type

nl
♦ Normal to surface
Figure 1 – Thickening a Surface

O
♦ Automatic fit
♦ Controlled fit

se
– Excluded Surfaces U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Adding or Removing

Material Figure 3 – Thickening a Bottle
te
In

Thickening Surface Quilts

C
PT

With the Thicken tool, you can offset a selected quilt to create or remove
material. The following basic controls are available:

• Add material – Fills the thickened quilt with solid material. Use the Solid
r
Fo

option to add material.

• Remove material – Removes material from inside the thickened quilt. Use
the Remove Material option to remove material. In Figure 2, the quilt
was used to add material in the left image, while it was used to remove
material in the right image.
• Thickness value – Specifies how much the surface is thickened.

Similar to offsetting a surface, the maximum thickness value is a

function of the minimum radius of the surface.
• Flip direction – Enables you to flip the thickness direction to be on either
side of the quilt, or centered around both sides of the quilt. Use the Change
Thickness Direction option to flip the direction.

Module 15 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Thickening Options
The following options are available within the Options tab of the Thicken tool:
• Thicken type – Enables you to specify how the quilt is thickened. The
three available options are:
– Normal to surface – Offsets the surface normal to the reference surface
or quilt.
– Automatic fit – Automatically determines a coordinate system and
offsets the surface along its axes as necessary, to create the offset
approximate in shape to the original. This option is useful in cases in
which the Normal to surface thicken type fails.

y
– Controlled fit – Enables you to select a coordinate system and manually

nl
control it, if the surface is translated in the X, Y, and Z axes. This
option is useful in cases in which the Normal to surface option fails, and

O
Automatic fit does not yield suitable geometry.
• Excluded Surfaces – Enables you to select surfaces to remove them from

se
the thicken operation. U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Thickening Surface Quilts

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Thicken THICKEN_1.PRT

Task 1: Thicken a surface quilt to add material.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Examine the surfaces in the
model.

y
nl
O
3. Select the quilt. se
U
4. In the ribbon, click Thicken
al

from the Editing group.

• Edit the thickness value to 5.
rn
te
In

5. Click Complete Feature from

C

the Thicken dashboard.

PT

6. Click Close Window .

r
Fo

Module 15 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Thicken a surface quilt to remove material.

1. Click Open and double-click

thicken_2.prt to open it.

y
nl
2. Select the quilt.

O
3. In the ribbon, click Thicken
from the Editing group.

se
• Edit the thickness value to 3.
• Click Change Thickness
U
Direction three times to
view the options.
al

4. Click Preview Feature .

rn

5. Click Resume Feature .

te

6. Click Remove Material .

7. Click Complete Feature from
In

the Thicken dashboard.

8. Click Close Window .
C
PT

Task 3: Thicken a surface quilt to add material.

r
Fo

1. Click Open and double-click

thicken_3.prt to open it.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 5

 2. Select the quilt.
3. In the ribbon, click Thicken
from the Editing group.
• Edit the thickness value to 10.
• Click Change Thickness
Direction to flip the
material to the inside.
4. Click Complete Feature from
the Thicken dashboard.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 15 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Solidifying Quilts to Add Material
You can use the Solidify tool to add solid material to a model,
based on a surface quilt.

• To be solidified for adding material,

a quilt must define a closed
volume.
– An enclosed quilt.
– An open quilt surrounded by
existing solid material.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Original Surface Quilt

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 3 – Adding Material by

Figure 2 – Solidified Surface Quilt Solidifying a Quilt
r
Fo

Solidifying Quilts to Add Material

You can use the Solidify tool to add solid material to a model, based on a
surface quilt. Select the Solid option in the dashboard. To solidify a
surface quilt to add material, it must define an enclosed volume, for example:
• An enclosed quit. In Figure 1, the enclosed quilt has been solidified into a
solid model shown in Figure 2.
• An open quilt bounded by existing solid material. In Figure 3, the open
quilt is bounded by existing solid material at its open end. Consequently,
the open quilt is solidified to add solid material to the model, as shown in
the lower image.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Solidifying Quilts to Add Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Solidify_Add SOLIDIFY_ADD.PRT

Task 1: Solidify quilts in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Hidden Line from the
Model Display types drop-down

y
menu and notice the closed quilt

nl
with no green edges.

O
se
3. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.
4. Select the quilt.
U
al
rn
te

5. In the ribbon, click Solidify

from the Editing group.
In

6. Click Complete Feature from

the Solidify dashboard.
C

7. Notice that the lines are now the

PT

color of the model because the

feature is solid.
8. Click Shading from the
r

Model Display types drop-down

Fo

menu.

9. In the model tree, right-click

Group QUILT2 and select
Unhide.
10. De-select all geometry.
11. Click Hidden Line from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu and notice the open quilt
with yellow edges on the bottom.

Module 15 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 12. Select the quilt.

13. In the ribbon, click Solidify

from the Editing group.

y
14. Click Complete Feature from

nl
the Solidify dashboard.

O
15. De-select all geometry.
16. Notice that the lines are now the

se
color of the model because the
feature is solid. U
17. Click Shading from the
al

Model Display types drop-down

menu.
rn
te
In

This completes the procedure.

C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 9

Solidifying Quilts to Remove Material
You can use the Solidify tool to remove solid material from a
model, based on a surface quilt.

• To be solidified for removing

material, a quilt must define a
volume to remove from the model:
– An enclosed quilt.
– An open quilt bounded by

y
existing solid material.

nl
– An open quilt overlapping the
model:

O
♦ Must pass completely
through.

se
Figure 1 – Removing Material
– A datum plane. U using a Quilt
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Removing Material Figure 3 – Removing Material

using a Datum Plane using an Enclosed Quilt
r
Fo

Solidifying Quilts to Remove Material

You can use the Solidify tool to remove solid material from a model, based on
a surface quilt. Select the Remove Material option in the dashboard. You
can remove material from either side of the quilt using the Change Thickness
Direction option. To solidify a surface quilt to remove material from the
model, it must define a volume to remove from the model, for example:

• An enclosed quilt. In Figure 3, an enclosed quilt is solidified to remove

material from the model.
• An open quilt bounded by existing solid material. In the Figure 1, an
enclosed quilt is solidified to remove material from the model.
• An open quilt overlapping, passing completely through the model.

Module 15 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 • A datum plane can also be selected since their boundaries are infinite. In
Figure 2, the material was removed by selecting the datum plane.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Solidifying Quilts to Remove Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Solidify_Remove SOLIDIFY_REMOVE.PRT

Task 1: Solidify quilts to remove material in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. Select QUILT1.

nl
3. Notice that the quilt is bounded

O
by the solid.

se
U
al

4. In the ribbon, click Solidify

rn

from the Editing group.

te

5. Click Remove Material .

6. Click Preview Feature .
In

7. Click Resume Feature .

8. Click Change Thickness
C

Direction .
PT

9. Click Complete Feature from

the Solidify dashboard.
r

10. Orient to the 3D1 view

Fo

orientation.
11. In the model tree, right-click
QUILT2 and select Unhide.
12. Notice the open overlapping
quilt.

Module 15 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 13. In the ribbon, click Solidify
from the Editing group.
14. Click Remove Material .
15. Click Change Thickness
Direction .

y
16. Click Change Thickness

nl
Direction once again.

O
17. Click Complete Feature from
the Solidify dashboard.

se
U
al
rn
te

18. In the model tree, right-click

datum plane CUT and select
In

Unhide.
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 13

 19. In the ribbon, click Solidify from
the Editing group.
20. Click Change Thickness
Direction twice and notice
the difference in the model
display.
21. Click Complete Feature from
the Solidify dashboard.
22. Click Plane Display to
disable their display.

y
nl
O
23. Orient to the 3D2 view se
U
orientation.
24. In the model tree, right-click
al

Group QUILT3 and select

Unhide.
rn

25. Edit the selection filter to Quilts

te

and select the quilt.

In
C
PT

26. In the ribbon, click Solidify

from the Editing group.
27. Click Remove Material .
r

28. Click Complete Feature from

Fo

the Solidify dashboard.

This completes the procedure.

Module 15 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Solidifying Quilts to Replace Material
You can use the Solidify tool to add and remove solid material
simultaneously, based on a surface quilt.

• Commonly referred to as Patch.

• Keep material on either side.
• Add and remove material
simultaneously from multiple
surfaces.
• Quilt boundaries must lie on the

y
surfaces.

nl
O
Figure 1 – Viewing the Quilt

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Replaced Material

C
PT

Solidifying Quilts to Replace Material

You can use the Solidify tool to add and remove solid material simultaneously,
based on a surface quilt. You must select the Replace Portion With Quilt
r
Fo

option from the dashboard.

This option is commonly referred to as Patch.

You can keep material on either side of the quilt using the Change Direction
option in the dashboard.
The advantage of using the Replace Portion With Quilt option is that you
can add and remove material simultaneously from multiple surfaces. The
only rule is that the quilt boundaries must lie on the surfaces. In the figures,
the surface quilt is used to patch the model. The operation both adds and
removes material from the model. Notice that the edges of the quilt lie on the
surrounding model surfaces.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Solidifying Quilts to Replace Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Solidify_Replace [Link]

Task 1: Solidify a quilt and use it to add and remove material in a part
model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Edit the definition of Merge 1.

y
3. Notice the quilt bounded by solid

nl
edges.

O
4. Click Complete Feature from
the Merge dashboard.

se
U
5. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.
al

6. Select the quilt.

rn
te
In
C
PT

7. In the ribbon, click Solidify

from the Editing group.
8. In the dashboard, click Replace
r
Fo

Portion With Quilt , if

necessary.

Module 15 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 9. Click Complete Feature
from the Solidify dashboard and
de-select all geometry.
10. Notice that the feature has both
added and removed material
from multiple surfaces.
11. Press CTRL and select
Boundary Blend 1, Boundary
Blend 2, and Merge 1 from the
model tree.

y
• Right-click and select Hide.

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 17

Offsetting Surfaces using the Replace Option
Using the Replace option in the Offset tool, you can replace a
single solid surface with a quilt.

• Uses:
– Add material.
– Remove material.
– Simultaneously
add and remove
material.

y
• By default, the quilt

nl
is “consumed” by the
replace feature.

O
– Keep replace Figure 1 – Offset using Replace that
quilt. Adds Material

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 2 – Offset
C

using Replace that Figure 3 – Offset using Replace that Adds

Removes Material and Removes Material
PT

Offsetting Surfaces using the Replace Option

r

Using the Replace option in the Offset tool, you can replace a single solid
Fo

surface with a quilt. You can use the Replace option to:
• Add material. In Figure 1, the Replace option is adding material.
• Remove material. In Figure 2, the Replace option is removing material.
• Add and remove material simultaneously. In Figure 3, the Replace option
is both adding and removing material simultaneously.
By default, the quilt is “consumed” by the replace feature. That is, the quilt is
not visible, but still exists previously in the model tree.
When using the Replace option, there is one option available in the Options
tab of the dashboard:
• Keep replace quilt – Enables the quilt selected for the replace to remain
visible after the replace is created.

Module 15 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Offsetting Surfaces using the Replace
Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Offset_Replace [Link]

Task 1: Use the Replace Surface offset option to add material.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. Select EXTRUDE and select the
top, solid surface.

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

3. In the ribbon, click Offset

from the Editing group.
In

4. In the dashboard, click Replace

Surface .
C

5. Select the quilt and click

PT

Complete Feature from the

Offset dashboard.
6. Notice that the feature has added
r

material.
Fo

7. Click Close Window .

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 19

Task 2: Use the Replace Surface offset option to remove material.

1. Click Open and double-click

[Link] to open it.
2. Select EXTRUDE and select the
top, solid surface.

y
nl
O
se
3. In the ribbon, click Offset
from the Editing group.
4. In the dashboard, click Replace
U
Surface .
al

5. Select the quilt and click

Complete Feature from the
rn

Offset dashboard.
te

6. Notice that the feature has

removed material.
In

7. Click Close Window .

C

Task 3: Use the Replace Surface offset option to add and remove material.
PT

1. Click Open and double-click

[Link] to open it.
r
Fo

2. Select EXTRUDE and select the

top, solid surface.

Module 15 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 3. In the ribbon, click Offset
from the Editing group.
4. Right-click and select Replace.
5. Select the quilt and click
Complete Feature from the
Offset dashboard.
6. Notice that the feature has
added and removed material
simultaneously.

y
nl
O
This completes the procedure.

se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 21

Creating Rounds on Surfaces
You can create rounds directly on surface quilts.

• You can only create rounds on

two-sided, merged edges.
• Additional profiles:
– Conic
– D1 x D2 Conic
– Curvature Continuous

y
– D1 x D2 Curvature Continuous

nl
• RHO parameter
– 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical

O
– 0.5 = Parabolic
– > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic
– √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse
se
Figure 1 – Original Surface Model
U
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Understanding the Figure 3 – Rounds Created

RHO Parameter on Surfaces
PT

Creating Rounds on Surfaces

r

You can create rounds directly on surface quilts. You can only create rounds
Fo

on two-sided, merged edges. The resulting created rounds are surfaces. In

the figures, the rounds are created on the merged edges, which results in
surface rounds.
You can also create chamfers on surface quilts.

Analyzing Surface Round Profile

You can create surface rounds that have profiles other than that of a circular
arc. You can create Conic, D1 x D2 Conic, as well as Curvature Continuous
round profiles. Creating surface rounds with a conic or curvature continuous
profile can be useful for surface modeling. The conic round profiles maintain
tangency like that of the circular arc round, but can be used to create sharper
or shallower rounds by varying the RHO parameter. The curvature continuous
round can be used in situations where curvature continuity is desired.

Module 15 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 Using the RHO Parameter
You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic. This is a
dimension that appears on the conic similar to a radius dimension. As shown
in Figure 2, the RHO value is the ratio of length A to A+B (i.e. A/(A+B)), in
which C=D. RHO can vary from 0.05 to 0.95. Higher RHO values create a
more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values create a more flat conic
shape.
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
• 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical
• 0.5 = Parabolic
• > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic

y
nl
• √2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds on Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\On-Surfaces CREATE_ROUNDS.PRT

Task 1: Create rounds on surfaces of a part model.

1. Examine the part model.

y
nl
O
2. In the ribbon, click No Hidden
from the Editing group, and se
U
notice the three merged surfaces
with magenta edges.
al
rn
te

3. In the ribbon, start the Round

In

from the Engineering group

and select the front, right vertical
C

edge.
PT

• Edit the radius to 10.

4. Click Complete Feature
from the Round dashboard and
r

de-select all geometry.

Fo

5. Start the Round from the

Engineering group and select the
top, front edge.
• Edit the radius to 5.

Module 15 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 6. In the dashboard, select the Sets
tab.
• Edit the shape from Circular to
Conic.
• Edit Rho to 0.70.
7. Click Complete Feature
from the Round dashboard and
de-select all geometry.
8. Select Shading from the
Model Display types drop-down

y
menu.

nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 25

Converting Solid Rounds to Surfaces
You can convert solid rounds to surfaces to aid in difficult
modeling situations.
• Reasons for round
conversion:
– Create a custom shape.
– Resolve a failing round.
• Attachment type:
– Solid

y
– Surface

nl
♦ Create end surfaces Figure 1 – Original Model with
Undesired Round Result

O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Round Converted Figure 3 – Round Manipulated,

to Surface and Trimmed Merged, and Solidified
In

Converting Solid Rounds to Surfaces

C

You can convert solid rounds to surfaces to aid in difficult modeling situations.
PT

You can then manipulate the surfaces manually to create a custom round
shape or resolve a failing round. Within the Round tool's Options tab, you
have the ability to modify the round Attachment type. The following two types
r

are available:
Fo

• Solid – The default round type that is created when the Round tool is
started. In Figure 1, the round that has been created is a solid round.
• Surface – Enables you to convert the Solid round type to a Surface. When
Surface is specified as the round Attachment type, you also have the ability
to use the Create end surfaces option. The Create end surfaces option
caps the ends of the converted surface round. In Figure 2, the round has
been converted to a surface, and end surfaces have been created.

A Typical Solid Round Conversion Procedure

A typical solid round conversion procedure begins with redefining the round
on the solid part. The round is then converted to surfaces, which has been
done between Figure 1 and Figure 2.

Module 15 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 Once the round has been converted to a surface, the undesired portion is
typically trimmed away. In Figure 2, the middle, undesired round portion of
the surface was trimmed at the datum planes. Additional surfaces are then
created and merged to the remaining round surface. In Figure 3, a boundary
blend surface was created and then merged with the remaining round surface.
Finally, the merged surfaces are solidified with the model to add or remove
material. In Figure 3, the merged round surfaces were solidified with the rest
of the model to add material.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 27

PROCEDURE - Converting Solid Rounds to Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Round\Convert-Surfaces CONVERT_ROUNDS.PRT

Task 1: Convert solid rounds to surfaces in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .
2. Edit the definition of Round 1.

y
nl
3. Select the Options tab.
• Select Surface as the

O
Attachment.
• Select the Create end

se
surfaces check box.
4. Click Complete Feature from
U
the Round dashboard.
al

5. With the round still selected,

select it again to select the round
rn

quilt.

6. In the ribbon, start the Trim

te

from the Editing group and select

datum plane DTM1.
In

7. Click Flip Trim Sides two

C

times to keep both sides.

PT

8. Click Complete Feature from

the Trim dashboard.

9. Select the front round quilt and

r
Fo

start the Trim from the

Editing group.
10. Select datum plane DTM2.
11. Verify that only the front is kept
and click Complete Feature .

Module 15 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 12. Click Plane Display to
disable their display.
13. Click No Hidden from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu and notice the two open
round quilts with pink edges.
14. Click Shading from the
Model Display types drop-down
menu.

y
15. In the model tree, select

nl
CURVE1, press CTRL, and
select CURVE2.

O
16. Right-click and select Unhide.

se
17. De-select all geometry.
U
al

18. Start the Boundary Blend

rn

from the Surfaces group in Model

Tab.
te

19. Press CTRL and select the

edges of the two round quilts.
In

20. Right-click and select Second

Direction Curves.
C

21. Press CTRL and select the two

PT

unhidden curves.
22. Right-click each of the
constraints and select Tangent.
r
Fo

23. Click Complete Feature from

the Boundary Blend dashboard.
24. Hide CURVE1 and CURVE2.

© 2011 PTC Module 15 | Page 29

 25. Select Trim 1 and select it again
to select the quilt.
26. Press CTRL and select the newly
created quilt.

27. In the ribbon, start the Merge

from the Editing group.
28. Press CTRL and select the other
quilt.
29. Click Complete Feature .

y
30. With the merge feature still

nl
selected, click Solidify from the
Editing group.

O
31. In the dashboard, click Solid .

se
32. Click Complete Feature from
the Solidify dashboard.
U
al

This completes the procedure.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 15 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Module 16

y
Master Model Technique

nl
O
Module Overview

se
The Master Model technique is a powerful way to combine surface modeling
with top-down-design methodology. You can use the master model technique
to design products that use multiple interlocking body components to form an
U
enclosure with an overall styled shape.
al

In this module, you will examine each of the steps in the master model
technique to create body components.
rn

Objectives
te

After completing this module, you will be able to:

In

• Understand the theory behind the master model technique.

• Create a master model.
C

• Create framework in the master model.

PT

• Create surfaces in the master model.

• Refine and complete the master model.
• Share geometry from the master model.
r

• Complete body components.

Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 1

Master Model Technique Theory
The “Master Model” technique is often used to design surface
models; particularly on products that use multiple interlocking
body components to form an enclosure with an overall styled
shape.

Steps in the Master Model technique:

1. Creating the Master Model
2. Creating a Surface Design

y
Framework in the master

nl
model
3. Creating Surfaces in the Master

O
Model
4. Refining and completing the

se
Master Model
5. Sharing Geometry from the
U
Master Model to the Body
Components
al

6. Completing the Body Figure 1 – Creating a Surface

Components Design Framework
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Figure 2 – Creating Surfaces in Figure 3 – Completing the

the Master Model Body Components

Master Model Technique Theory

The “Master Model” technique is often used to design surface models;
particularly on products that use multiple interlocking body components to
form an enclosure with an overall styled shape. Common examples include a
computer mouse, cell phone, and laptop computer.
This technique enables you to develop the overall styled shape as a single
component (the master model), and then transfer geometry to each of the
individual body components. By modifying the master model, you can make
changes to a number of interlocking body components simultaneously.

Module 16 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 Definition of Terms
The following are common terms using the Master Model technique:
• Internal components – Existing solid parts that lie inside the to-be-created
enclosure. These components may mate with or protrude through the
enclosure.
• Master Model – A non-solid part in which you design the enclosure shape.
Similar to a skeleton, this component does not exist in real-life.
• Body components – Solid parts that form the enclosure. The shape of each
body component is derived from the master model.

y
Master Model Steps

nl
The Master Model technique has six basic steps:

O
1. Creating the Master Model
2. Creating a Surface Design Framework in the master model
3.
4. se
Creating Surfaces in the Master Model
Refining and completing the Master Model
U
5. Sharing Geometry from the Master Model to the Body Components
al

6. Completing the Body Components

rn

Selecting Tools and Techniques

Consider the surface modeling tools and techniques you may use before
te

starting a project:
In

• First, consider your design intent and select an appropriate surface

modeling paradigm, whether Parametric surface modeling, Freeform
C

surface modeling, or a combination of both.

• Second, consider the input to the design:
PT

– Section and Trajectory data – Variable Section Sweeps or Swept Blends

– Section and Boundary data – Boundary Blends
r

– Sketches and/or physical mockups – Style Tool (Freeform Surface

Fo

Modeling)
• When working with a mixture of Sections and Trajectories, keep in mind
these techniques:
– Exact Boundaries – Use a network of curves and edges to create exact
boundaries for surfaces.
– Overbuilding – Create overlapping surfaces using various methods, and
then trim and merge surfaces accordingly.
– A combination of the above.
• Finally, as a general guideline:
– Use the simplest tool you anticipate can satisfy your design intent.
– Use more advanced tools as necessary.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 3

Creating a Master Model
Remember that the master model is a non-solid part in which
you design the enclosure shape.
• Use the following steps:
– Evaluate the existing product
structure.
– Create the master model.
– Transfer reference geometry
into the master model.
• Techniques:

y
nl
– Publish Geometry
– Copy Geometry

O
Figure 1 – Evaluating the Existing

se
U Product Structure
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Locating the Master Model Figure 3 – Transferring Reference

in the Model Tree Structure Geometry into Master Model

Evaluating the Existing Product Structure

r
Fo

Before creating and developing a Master Model, first evaluate the existing
product structure in the model tree:
• Is there an existing skeleton? If so, you may be able to transfer some
references from the skeleton to your master model.
• Are there enough internal components created to be able to design the
surface enclosure around? You likely design the body with references
to the internal components. You may also refer to other components to
which the body touches or is tangent. Not all internal components may be
completed yet; consider if they would come in contact with the body.
• Do the actual body components already exist as empty components in the
model tree? If not, they need to be created.
• Should the Master Model be created at the top level, or at a sub-assembly
level? Typically, the Master model should be created at the same level as
the body components that would reference it.

Module 16 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 • Should the master model be a “skeleton” model, or standard part model? If
all of the body components will be organized in a sub-assembly, consider
creating the master model as a skeleton model in that sub-assembly
instead of a conventional part model. Remember, skeletons will be created
as the first models in an assembly. The typical master model needs
to reference previous solid models, as well as pass references to solid
models downstream, and as a result need to be positioned accordingly in
the model tree.

Creating the Master Model

When you create the master model, remember that it is a component, and
you must therefore locate it in the assembly. You can either assemble it using

y
the Default constraint or by using constraints as dictated by the design intent.

nl
Once the master model is assembled, you must locate it in the model tree
structure accordingly. The master model must be placed after the internal

O
components that it will reference. It must also be placed before the empty
body components that will be derived from the master model.

se
Transferring Reference Geometry into the Master Model
U
After the master model is created, you can transfer reference geometry into
it, either from an assembly skeleton, or through its internal components.
al

Select those references that you would need to reference during the creation
of the framework and surfaces in the master model.
rn

Techniques for Sharing Geometry

te

The primary techniques for sharing geometry are through the Publish and
In

Copy Geometry Features:

• Publish Geometry (Optional) – Created upstream of the Master Model, in
C

the assembly skeleton, or internal components. The Publish Geometry

feature organizes and saves a “set” of selections to a feature that are
PT

destined to be used in the master model. The “set” of selections can

include Surface references, Chain references, and Datum references. The
published geometry can be selected when creating a Copy Geometry
r

feature. It is created by Selecting the Publish Geometry from the Model

Fo

Intent Group.
• Copy Geometry – Created in the Master Model. You can select the
following entities from an assembly skeleton or internal components to
copy to the Master Model: a Publish Geometry feature, Surface references,
Chain references, and Datum references.
A Copy Geometry feature is created by clicking Copy Geometry from the
Get Data group. The following options are available:
– Dependent – Enables or disables dependency with the referenced
models.
– Reference context – You can specify the reference as either Assembly or
External. For Assembly, the copy geometry is created in the context of

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 5

 the assembly; for External, the Copy Geometry feature is not dependent
on the assembly.
When using the Copy Geometry feature, you can only copy from
one component at a time. As a result, it is not uncommon to
create several copy geometry features.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 PROCEDURE - Creating a Master Model
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed Surface_Operations\Master-Model_Create

[Link]

Task 1: Create a master model for an assembly and assemble it.

1. Enable only the following Datum

y
Display types: .

nl
2. Review the tree structure.

O
3. In the ribbon, click Create

se
Component from the
Component group.
• Edit the Name to MASTER
U
and click OK.
al

4. Accept the defaults in the

Creation Options dialog box and
rn

click OK.
te

5. Assemble datum plane RIGHT

In

of [Link] to the flat,

oval-shaped surface.
C

6. Align datum plane TOP from

[Link] to datum plane
PT

TOP from [Link].

7. Align datum plane FRONT from
[Link] to datum plane
r

FRONT from [Link].

Fo

8. Click Complete Component

from the Component Placement
dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 7

 9. In the model tree, drag
[Link] to directly before
COVER_A.PRT to reorder it.
10. Disable Plane Display .

y
nl
O
Task 2:
se
Create a copy geometry feature within the master model.
U
1. In the model tree, right-click
al

[Link] and select

Activate.
rn

2. In the ribbon, click Copy

Geometry from the Get Data
te

group.
In

3. Click Publish Geometry Only

to de-select it.
C

4. Press CTRL and select the main

large oval halves.
r PT

5. Click Complete Feature from

Fo

the Copy Geometry dashboard.

6. In the model tree, right-click
[Link] and select
Activate.

Module 16 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 7. In the model tree, right-click
[Link] and select Open.
8. Enable Plane Display .

y
nl
O
se
U
al

This completes the procedure.

rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 9

Creating Framework in the Master
In this step, you create the framework in the master model
that will support the enclosure surfaces, referencing the copy
geometry features created previously.

• Consider the following when

capturing design intent:
– Flexibility
– Symmetry
– Dependency

y
• Use the following to create the

nl
framework:

O
– Datum features
– Sketches

se
– Surfaces
Figure 1 – Creating a Datum Plane
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Sketches Created

for Framework
r
Fo

Creating Framework in the Master

In this step, you create the framework in the master model that will support
the enclosure surfaces, referencing the copy geometry features created
previously. Before you can begin the creation of the framework, however,
consider the following:
• Flexibility – A robust surface model begins with a robust framework.
Design your framework to easily update with model changes to the internal
components.
• Symmetry – Determine lines of symmetry in the model, and have datum
planes at these locations. You can mirror the following:
– Curves
– Datum features
– Surfaces

Module 16 | Page 10 © 2011 PTC

 – Entire part models – You can create as a mirror type when creating
components initially in model tree. You can also mirror components
after creation of one side.
• Dependency – Make the framework reference the Copy Geometry features
where dependency is desired. Remember that you can toggle dependency
in the Copy Geometry feature.

Creating the Framework

You can create the framework in the master model using the following:
• Datum features – Examples include datum planes, datum points, datum

y
axes, datum coordinate systems, and datum curves.

nl
• Sketches – You can sketch curves forming the framework.
• Surfaces – Can be used as construction geometry for the framework (for

O
example to project a curve onto). Surfaces that represent the enclosure
should not be created at this stage.

se
You can create the framework for the following uses:
• Boundary curves
U
• Sections
al

• Trajectories
• Controlling “Skeleton” type geometry, for example, Offset planes
rn

• Major parting or split lines for the body components

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Creating Framework in the Master

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Master-Model_Framework
[Link]
Task 1: Create framework sketches in the master model.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. In the model tree, right-click

nl
[Link] and select Open.

O
3. In the ribbon, start the Plane
from the Datum group and select
datum plane RIGHT.
4. Drag the offset handle to the
right 250 and click OK. se
U
5. De-select all geometry.
al

6. Select datum plane TOP and

rn

start the Sketch .

te

• Click Sketch View from

the Setup group in Sketch
In

dashboard.
7. Enable only the following
C

Sketcher Display types:

.
PT

8. Click References and select

datum plane DTM1.
r

• Click X sec and query-select

Fo

the quilt.
9. Click Spline from the
Sketching group and sketch two
splines, selecting the endpoints
on the references.

Module 16 | Page 12 © 2011 PTC

 10. Middle-click to stop sketching
splines, then de-select all
geometry.
11. Right-click and select
Dimension.
12. Dimension the four endpoint
angles and type 90 for each of
the angle values.
13. Click OK from the Sketch
dashboard and orient to the

y
Standard Orientation.

nl
14. Select datum plane FRONT and

O
start the Sketch .

se
• Click Sketch View . U
15. Click References and select
datum plane DTM1.
al

• Click X sec and query-select

the quilt.
rn

16. Click Spline from the

Sketching group and sketch a
te

spline, selecting the endpoints

on the references.
In

17. Middle-click to stop sketching

C

the spline, then de-select all

geometry.
PT

18. Right-click and select

Dimension.
r

19. Dimension the two endpoint

Fo

angles and type 90 for both of

the angle values.
20. Click OK from the Sketch
dashboard.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 13

 21. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.

y
nl
This completes the procedure.

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 14 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Surfaces in the Master
In this stage, you create the overall surface model of a body,
shell, or enclosure that defines the shape of the product.

• Include major surfacing details

common to multiple components.
• Do not include minor details used
by a single component.

y
nl
O
se
U Figure 1 – Creating Surfaces
al
rn
te
In
C

Figure 2 – Completed Surface

PT

Creating Surfaces in the Master

In this stage, you create the overall surface model of a body, shell, or
r

enclosure that defines the shape of the product:

Fo

• This would include major surfacing details common to multiple components.

In the figures, the surface is to be used in both the front and back cover.
• This would not include minor details used by a single component.
Design the surfaces in the master model with each of the body components
in mind, because they will be created from this quilt.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Surfaces in the Master

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Master-Model_Surfaces [Link]

Task 1: Create surfaces in the master model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, right-click

y
[Link] and select Open.

nl
3. Start the Boundary Blend

O
from the Surfaces group.
4. Query-select the front half of

se
Sketch 1.
5. Press CTRL and select Sketch
U
2.
6. Press CTRL and query-select
al

the back half of Sketch 1.

rn

7. Right-click and select Second

Direction Curves.
te

8. Select the edge of the copy

geometry surface.
In

9. Right-click the boundary

constraints in the first direction
C

and select Normal.

r PT
Fo

10. Right-click the boundary

constraint in the second direction
and select Tangent.

Module 16 | Page 16 © 2011 PTC

 11. Click Complete Feature from
the Boundary Blend dashboard
and de-select all geometry.

y
12. Press CTRL and select Copy

nl
Geometry, datum plane DTM1,
Sketch 1, and Sketch 2.

O
13. Right-click and select Hide.
14. In the ribbon, select the View

se
tab. From the visibility group,
click the Status drop-down menu
U
and select Save Status .
al
rn

This completes the procedure.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 17

Refining and Completing the Master Model
This stage of the Master Model process consists of further
refining the master model and completing it.
• Refinements include:
– Analysis
– Split/Parting lines
– Create additional details
• Complete the master model:
– Mirror geometry, for example

y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Analyzing the
U Master Model
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Completing the Master

Model by Mirroring Quilts

Refining and Completing the Master Model

r
Fo

This stage of the Master Model process consists of further refining the master
model and completing it.
Each of the items in this stage are optional, depending on your
design intent.

You can perform the following refinements:

• Analysis – Perform surface analysis on your master model surfaces to
ensure they meet design requirements. Analyses can be for visual or
aesthetic purposes, checking curvature, or verifying manufacturability. In
Figure 1, a reflection analysis is being performed to verify that the surface
is aesthetically pleasing.
• Split/Parting lines – If not already created as part of the framework,
create parting/split lines that can be used to separate the individual body
components. You can split the body components using:

Module 16 | Page 18 © 2011 PTC

 – Curves lying in the surface
– Intersecting surfaces
– Datum planes
• Details – Create additional details such as a recess, scoop, bulge, tear, or
blister that will affect multiple body components. You can create these
details using additional curves and surfaces and then merging them into
the main quilt.
After all refinements have been done, you can complete the master model.
For example, if you have symmetry in your model, you can mirror the
appropriate quilts, and then merge the mirrored quilts as necessary. In
Figure 2, the surface quilt has been mirrored about its line of symmetry and
is being merged.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - Refining and Completing the Master
Model

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Master-Model_Complete [Link]

Task 1: Refine and complete the master model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

y
2. In the model tree, right-click

nl
[Link] and select Open.

O
3. In the ribbon, select the
Analysis tab. From the Inspect
Geometry group, click the
Inspect Geometry drop-down
se
U
menu and select Reflection .
4. The surface looks good based
al

on the reflection analysis.

5. Click Complete Analysis .
rn

6. Select the boundary blend.

te

7. Select the quilt.

In

8. In the ribbon, select the Model

tab. Start the Mirror from
C

the Editing group.

PT

9. Select datum plane TOP.

10. Click Complete Feature from
the Mirror dashboard.
r
Fo

Module 16 | Page 20 © 2011 PTC

 11. With the mirrored surface still
selected, select it again to select
the quilt.
12. Press CTRL and select the top
quilt.

13. Start the Merge from the

Editing group.
14. In the Merge dashboard, select
the Options tab.
• Select Join.

y
nl
15. Click Complete Feature from
the Merge group and de-select

O
all geometry.

se
This completes the procedure.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 21

Sharing Geometry from the Master Model
In this stage, you are sharing geometry (typically surface quilts)
from the master model to each of the body components.
• Activate each component and
share geometry from the master
model as required.
• Techniques for sharing data:
– Publish Geometry
– Copy Geometry

y
– Merge

nl
♦ Transfers the entire master
model into the body
Figure 1 – Selecting References to

O
component.
Be Shared from Master Model

se
U
al
rn
te
In

Figure 3 – Same References

C

Figure 2 – References Copied into Copied into Body Component

PT

Body Component COVER_A.PRT COVER_B.PRT

Sharing Geometry from the Master Model

r

In this stage, you are sharing geometry (typically surface quilts) from the
Fo

master model to each of the body components. Since each of the body
components exists, you can activate them one at a time and share geometry
from the master model to them as required. You can share geometry either
by copying surface quilts or by copying any relevant geometry for trimming
the quilt to form that individual body component. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, the
same quilt is shared into both covers of the sharpener assembly. Within each
cover, the geometry can be trimmed appropriately to leave what is needed.
Techniques for Sharing Geometry
The primary techniques for sharing geometry to body components are similar
to those used to create the master model, however the merge option can
also be used:
• Publish Geometry (Optional) – Created upstream of the Master Model, in
the assembly skeleton, or internal components. The Publish Geometry
feature organizes and saves a “set” of selections to a feature that are

Module 16 | Page 22 © 2011 PTC

 destined to be used in the master model. The “set” of selections can
include Surface references, Chain references, and Datum references. The
published geometry can be selected when creating a Copy Geometry
feature. It is created by Selecting the Publish Geometry from the Model
Intent Group.
• Copy Geometry – Created in the Master Model. You can select the
following entities from an assembly skeleton or internal components to
copy to the Master Model: a Publish Geometry feature, Surface references,
Chain references, and Datum references. In Figure 1, the quilt is selected
as the geometry to be copied.
A Copy Geometry feature is created by clicking Copy Geometry from the
Get Data group from the main menu. The following options are available:

y
– Dependent – Enables or disables dependency with the referenced

nl
models.
– Reference context – You can specify the reference as either Assembly

O
or External. For Assembly, the copy geometry is created in the context
of the assembly, and for External, the Copy Geometry feature is not
dependent on the assembly.

se
• Merge – Used to add geometry from the master model into the current
body component. Merge is a simple way to transfer the entire master
U
model into each of the body components, enabling you to then trim away
unnecessary geometry.
al

Create a merge feature by clicking Merge/Inheritance from the Get Data

rn

drop-down menu. To use a merge feature, insert the merge from the
current model to which you wish to add material or remove material (the
target model), then open or select the source model. Next, “assemble”
te

the source model into the target model using assembly-type constraints.
In

Finally, toggle the Remove Material icon, if necessary, to disable it

before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of
C

the following from the source model:

PT

– Annotations
– Copy Datums – If the datums are copied into the target model from the
source model, the copied datums have a “_1” suffix appended to their
r

names.
Fo

There are also two different options available when creating the merge
feature:
– Dependent – Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the
source model.
– Refit Datums – Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums.
This option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from
the source model.
Copying geometry in separate Copy Geometry features gives you
additional control for hiding and unhiding copied geometry.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Sharing Geometry from the Master Model
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Master-Model_Share

[Link]

Task 1: Create a copy geometry feature in COVER_A.PRT.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, right-click

y
COVER_A.PRT and select

nl
Activate.
3. In the ribbon, click Copy

O
Geometry from the Get Data
group.
4. Click Publish Geometry Only
se
U
to de-select it.
5. Query-select the whole quilt.
al

6. Click Complete Feature from

rn

the Copy Geometry dashboard.

7. In the model tree, right-click

te

COVER_A.PRT and select

Open.
In

8. Notice the Copy Geometry

C

feature in the model tree.

9. Notice the geometry in the
PT

graphics window.
10. Click Close Window to
r

return to [Link].
Fo

Module 16 | Page 24 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Create a copy geometry feature in COVER_B.PRT.

1. In the model tree, right-click

COVER_B.PRT and select
Activate.
2. In the ribbon, click Copy
Geometry from the Get Data
group.
3. Click Publish Geometry Only
to de-select it.

y
4. Query-select the whole quilt.

nl
5. Click Complete Feature from

O
Copy Geometry dashboard.

se
6. In the model tree, right-click
COVER_B.PRT and select
Open.
U
7. Notice the Copy Geometry
feature in the model tree.
al

8. Notice the geometry in the

rn

graphics window.
9. Click Close Window to
te

return to [Link].
In

10. In the model tree, right-click

C

[Link] and select Hide.

11. In the ribbon, select the View
PT

tab. From the visibility group,

click the Status drop-down menu
and select Save Status .
r
Fo

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 25

Completing Body Components
In this stage, you complete the body components.

• Use the following steps:

– Trimming quilts
– Adding material
– Creating additional features

y
nl
Figure 1 – Completed Assembly

O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

Figure 2 – Completed Body Figure 3 – Completed Body

Component COVER_A.PRT Component COVER_B.PRT

Completing Body Components

r
Fo

In this stage, you complete each of the body components using the following
steps:
• Trimming quilts – Trim the quilt copied from the master model, using the
copied trimming references. You could use any tool that enables you to
trim or cut a surface (trim, merge, surface trim/cut).
• Adding material – Add material to the model, such as with the thicken
and/or solidify tools. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, each of the body components
had its trimmed surface thickened.
In some cases, you may find it easier to add material to the model
first, and then cut away the unwanted solid material using the
solidify tool, or other features.
• Creating additional features – Create additional solid detailing features to
complete the model as necessary, such as:

Module 16 | Page 26 © 2011 PTC

 – Screw bosses
– Structural ribs
– Access holes or cuts
– Interlocking slots or tabs
– Rounds and chamfers

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 27

PROCEDURE - Completing Body Components
Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Master-Model_Components

[Link]

Task 1: Trim the quilt in COVER_A.PRT and thicken it.

1. Enable only the following Datum

Display types: .

y
2. In the model tree, right-click

nl
COVER_A.PRT and select
Open.

O
3. Select the Copy Geometry
feature.
4. Select the quilt and in the ribbon,
se
U
start the Trim from the
Editing Group.
al

5. Select datum plane FRONT as

the trimming entity.
rn

6. Verify that the front side of the

quilt is kept, using Flip Trim
te

Sides as necessary.
In

7. Click Complete Feature from

the Trim dashboard.
C

8. Select the quilt.

PT

9. In the ribbon, select Thicken

from the Editing Group.
r

10. Edit the thickness to 10.

Fo

11. Verify the quilt is thickened to the

inside, using Change Thickness
Direction as necessary.

12. Click Complete Feature from

the Thicken dashboard.
13. Click Close Window to
return to [Link].

Module 16 | Page 28 © 2011 PTC

 Task 2: Trim the quilt in COVER_B.PRT and thicken it.

1. In the model tree, right-click

COVER_B.PRT and select
Open.
2. Select the Copy Geometry
feature.
3. Select the quilt and in the ribbon,
start the Trim from the
Editing Group.

y
4. Select datum plane FRONT as

nl
the trimming entity.

O
5. Click Flip Trim Sides to keep
the back side of the quilt.

se
6. Click Complete Feature from
the Trim dashboard.
U
7. Select the quilt.
al

8. In the ribbon, select Thicken

from the Editing Group.
rn

9. Edit the thickness to 10.

te

10. Verify the quilt is thickened to the

inside, using Change Thickness
In

Direction as necessary.
C

11. Click Complete Feature .

PT

12. Disable Plane Display .

r
Fo

13. Click Close Window to

return to [Link].

This completes the procedure.

© 2011 PTC Module 16 | Page 29

 y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 16 | Page 30 © 2011 PTC

 Module 17

y
Project

nl
O
Module Overview

se
Using Creo Parametric and the skills learned in this course, complete the
following project design tasks.
U
Objectives
al

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Create a master model.
rn

• Create framework in a master model.

te

• Create surfaces in a master model.

• Refine and complete the master model.
In

• Share geometry from the master model.

• Complete a body component.
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 1

The Shaver
In this project, you will follow the Master Model technique to
create the master model and a body component of the Shaver.
• Master Model Technique:
– Creating a Master Model
– Creating Framework in a Master
Model
– Creating Surfaces in a Master
Model

y
– Refining and Completing the

nl
Master Model Figure 1 – Shaver
– Sharing Geometry from the

O
Master Model
– Completing the Body

se
Components
• Create from scratch:
U
– Master model
– Upper body component
al

• Minimal instructions
rn

• Completed models for reference

te

Figure 2 – Shaver
In
C

Project Scenario
PT

Smoothcut Inc. designs and manufactures electric shavers. They currently

manufacture a range of cordless, battery-powered shavers. Due to the
increasing demand for rechargeable shavers, they are designing a new
model to cater to the changing market scenario. You are assigned to create
r
Fo

the design for the new shaver.

Minimal Instructions
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned up
to this point in the course, instructions for each project step will be minimal.
There will be no step-by-step "picks and clicks" given. This provides you with
a chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though
the project.

Completed Models for Reference

Be sure to save all project models within the working sub-folder of the
Project classroom folder structure. The project folder also contains a
sub-folder named completed, where, you will find a completed version

Module 17 | Page 2 © 2011 PTC

 of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as
reference, if required.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 3

Creating the Master Model
In this step of the project, you create the master model.

• Review the existing structure.

• Create the master model.
• Copy surfaces into the master
model.

y
Figure 1 – Surfaces Copied into
the Master Model

nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Product Structure Before Figure 3 – Product Structure After

Master Model Created Master Model Created
In

Creating the Master Model

C
PT

In this step of the project, you first examine the shaver's product structure.
You then create the master model and locate it properly in the structure.
Finally, you copy surfaces from the existing geometry to help you in the
creation of the contents for the master model.
r
Fo

Module 17 | Page 4 © 2011 PTC

 Creating Framework in the Master Model
In this step of the project, you create the framework for the
master model.

• Trim surfaces as needed.

• Create datum points.
• Create parting surface.
• Create body curves.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Master Model Framework

O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Master Model Framework

te

– Front View
In

Creating Framework in the Master Model

C

In this step of the project, you create the framework in the master model that
is to be used downstream. First, you trim the copied surfaces as needed.
PT

Next, you create datum points that will serve as references for the body
curves. Then, you create the parting surface for the shaver body. Finally, you
create the curves that will be used to create the shaver's body.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 5

Creating Surfaces in the Master Model
In this step of the project, you create the surfaces within the
master model.

• Create the surface.

• Create an additional curve that
better shapes the surface.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Shaver Body Surface

O
se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Shaver Body Surface

te

Creating Surfaces in the Master Model

In

In the previous step, you created the framework for the master model. In
this step of the project, you use the framework to create the surfaces that
C

ultimately become the shaver's body.

r PT
Fo

Module 17 | Page 6 © 2011 PTC

 Refining and Completing the Master Model
In this step of the project, you refine the master model and
complete it.

• Run analyses on the surface.

• Make improvements to the
surface quality.
• Re-run the analyses to verify
your improvements.
• Create trim curves.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Refined and Completed
Master Model

O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Shaded Curvature

Analysis Figure 3 – Reflection Analysis
In
C

Refining and Completing the Master Model

PT

In this step of the project, you examine the shape of the surface by running
analyses to determine its quality. Based on the results of the analyses, you
modify the surface shape to improve its quality. You then re-run the analyses
r

to verify the improvements. Finally, you create the curves that will be used to
Fo

trim the surface for the different shaver body components.

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 7

Sharing Geometry from the Master Model
In this step of the project, you share geometry from the master
model.

• Copy geometry into the upper

body component.
• Trim the upper body surface to its
final shape.

y
nl
Figure 1 – Trimmed Upper

O
Body Surface

se
U
al
rn

Figure 2 – Trimmed Upper

Body Surface
te
In
C

Sharing Geometry from the Master Model

PT

In this step of the project, you copy the surfaces and trim curves from the
master model into the upper body component that you will need. You then
trim the copied surface to its final shape.
r
Fo

Module 17 | Page 8 © 2011 PTC

 Creating a Body Component
In this step of the project, you create one of the shaver's upper
body components.

• Mirror the trimmed upper body

surface.
• Merge the halves.
• Thicken the surface.
• Apply an appearance.

y
Figure 1 – Completed Upper

nl
Body Component

O
se
U
al
rn
te

Figure 2 – Completed Upper

Body Component
In

Creating a Body Component

C
PT

In this step of the project, you mirror the upper body component's final trim
surface and thicken it. You then apply an appearance to the completed upper
body component.
r
Fo

© 2011 PTC Module 17 | Page 9

Copyright

Surfacing using Creo Parametric

Copyright © 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its
subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use
of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in
printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use
and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any
copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC.
Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation
may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or

y
transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no

nl
authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no

O
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the

se
United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,
disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
U
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL
DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is,
and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and
al

we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including
public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and
rn

scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized
distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection
te

and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and
contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information:
In

For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterComm
products, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 20xx. For other products, click Help >
About on the main menu of the product.
C

Registered Trademarks of PTC

Advanced Surface Design, Advent, Arbortext, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Calculation
PT

Management Suite, CoCreate, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, Designate,

EPD, [Link], Epic Editor, Expert Machinist, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine,
InPart, InterComm, IsoCompose, IsoDraw, IsoView, ITEDO, Mathcad, Mathsoft, MECHANICA,
NetRegulus, NetRM, the NetRegulus logo, Optegra, OneSpace, Parametric Technology, Parametric
r

Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, ProductPoint, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E,

Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First,
Fo

Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo,
PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, StudyWorks, The Product
Development Company, The Way to Product First, Wildfire, Windchill, Windchill DynamicDesignLink,
Windchill MPMLink, Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink..
Trademarks of PTC
3B2, 3DPAINT, Arbortext Editor, Arbortext Content Manager, Arbortext Contributor, Arbortext
Companion for Word®, Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher, Arbortext Publishing Engine, Arbortext
Dynamic Link Manager, Arbortext Styler, Arbortext Architect, Arbortext Digital Media Publisher,
Arbortext CSDB for S1000D®, Arbortext IETP Viewer for S1000D®, Arbortext Reviewer for
S1000D®, Arbortext Authoring Interface for S1000D®, Arbortext Editor for S1000D®, Arbortext
Publisher for S1000D®, Arbortext Provisioning Manager, Arbortext Provisioning Reviewer, Arbortext
Provisioning Transaction Manager, Arbortext Parts Catalog Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext
Learning Content Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext Learning Management System, Arbortext
Reviewer for EAGLE, Arbortext LSA Interface, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, Auto
Round, CDRS, CoCreate Modeling, CoCreate Drafting, CoCreate Model Manager, CoCreate
Drawing Manager, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker,
Create Collaborate Control Communicate, ECAD Compare, EDAcompare, EDAconduit,
DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER,
eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM,
Harmony, Import Data Doctor, InSight, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm
 EDAconduit, collective creativity, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice, Knowledge System
Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, PDS Workbench, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE,
Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE,
Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE,
Pro/FEM POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE,
Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/Manikin, Pro/MESH, Pro/[Link],
Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC ADVANCED, Pro/NC CHECK, Pro/NC MILL, Pro/NC POST, Pro/NC
SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC TURN, Pro/NC WEDM, Pro/NC Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR,
Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR,
Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN TOOLS,
Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TABLE, Pro/TOOLMAKER, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/[Link],
Pro/[Link], Pro/WELDING, ProductView, ProductView ECAD Compare, ProductView
Validate, PTC Precision, PTC DesignQuest, PTC Channel Advantage, Realized Value Platform,
Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, Validation Manager, Warp, Windchill ProjectLink, Windchill
SupplyLink, Windchill RequirementsLink, and Windchill Supplier Management..

y
Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

nl
Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or
pending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. 5,771,392/23-June-1998;
(EP)0240557/02-October-1986; 5,423,023/05-June-1990; 4,956,771/11-September-1990;

O
5,058,000/15-October-1991; 5,140,321/18-August-1992; 5,297,053/22-March-1994; 5,428,772/
27-June-1995; 5,469,538/21-Nov-1995; 5,469,538/21-November-1995; 5,506,950/09-April-1996;
4,310,614/30-April-1996; 5,513,316/30-April-1996; 5,526,475/11-June-1996; 5,561,747/01-October-

se
1996; 5,526,475/6-November-1996; 5,557,176/09-November-1996; 5,680,523/21-October-1997;
5,689,711/18-November-1997; 5,771,392/23-June-1998; 5,838,331/17-November-1998;
5,844,555/01-Dec-1998; 5,844,555/1-December-1998; 5,850,535/15-December-1998; 4,310,615/
U
21-December-1998; 4,310,614/22-April-1999; 6,275,866/14-Aug-2001; 6,275,866/14-August-2001;
6,308,144/23-October-2001; 6,447,223B1/10-Sept-2002; 6,473,673B1/29-October-2002; PCT
03/05061/13-Feb-2003; 6,545,671B1/08-April-2003; GB2354683B/04-June-2003; GB2354683B/04-
al

June-2003; 6,580,428B1/17-June-2003; GB2354685B/18-June-2003; GB2354684B/02-July-2003;

6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,625,607B1/23-September-2003;
rn

GB2354924/24-September-2003; GB2384125/15-October-2003; GB2354686/15-October-2003;

GB2353376/05-November-2003; GB2354096/12-November-2003; GB2353115/10-December-
2003; 6,665,569B1/16-December-2003; (KO)415475/6-January-2004; GB2388003B/21-January-
te

2004; GB2365567/10-March-2004; EU0812447/26-May-2004; GB2363208/25-August-2004;

GB2366639B/13-October-2004; 7,006,956/28-February-2006; 7,013,246B1/14-March-2006;
7,013,468/14-March-2006; (JP)3,962,109/25-May-2007; 7,464,007B2/09-December-2008.
In

Third-Party Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Distiller, FrameMaker and the Acrobat logo are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS Inc. I
C

Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. TeX is a trademark of the American
Mathematical Society. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Panther, and Tiger are trademarks or registered
PT

trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and RealDWG are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. BEA
WebLogic Server and BEA WebLogic Platform are trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. CATIA and
CADAM are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes, S.A. The Sigma Check icon, CETOL,
r

CETOL 6 Sigma are trademarks of Sigmetrix, LLC. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of
Fo

CAD Schroer GmbH. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence
Design Systems, Inc. Cognos is a registered trademark of Cognos Corporation. CYA, iArchive,
HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies,
Inc. DataDirect Connect is a registered trademark of DataDirect Technologies. Documentum
is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor
Company. JAWS is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific BLV Group, LLC in the United
States and other countries. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Geomagic, Inc. 2D DCM,
3D DCM, CDM and AEM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. HP, Hewlett-Packard, and HP-UX are
registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM, DB2, DOORS, AIX, and WebSphere
are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, the
ClusterProven design, Rational Rose, and Rational ClearCase are trademarks or registered
trademarks of International Business Machines in the United States and other countries and are
used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of
this software product. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered
trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. Feature-Following Anti-Aliasing is a trademark of LightWork
Design. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of
Logitech International S.A. [Link] is a registered trademark of MSC Software Corporation.
MainWin and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of
MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design,
AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Helix is a trademark
of Microcadam, Inc. Microsoft, ActiveX, Excel, JScript, Vista, Windows, the Windows logo, Visual
Basic, the Visual Basic logo, SharePoint, and Active Accessibility are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Moldflow is a
registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the
Mozilla Foundation. FLEXnet, FLEXnet Publisher, InstallShield, and InstallAnywhere are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Acresso Software Inc. Netscape, Netscape Navigator, Netscape
Communicator, and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks or service
marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. OSF/Motif and
Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Oracle and interMedia are registered
trademarks of Oracle Corporation. Palm Computing, Palm OS, Graffiti, HotSync, and Palm Modem
are registered trademarks, and Palm III, Palm IIIe, Palm IIIx, Palm V, Palm Vx, Palm VII, Palm,
More connected, Simply Palm, the Palm Computing platform logo, all Palm logos, and HotSync
logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. PANTONE is a registered trademark and
PANTONE CALIBRATED is a trademark of Pantone, Inc. Proximity and Linguibase are registered
trademarks of Proximity Technology, Inc. Elan License Manager and Softlock are trademarks of
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. RosettaNet is a trademark
and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit

y
organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. IRIX is a registered
trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. S1000D (R) is a registered trademark of ASD. SolidWorks

nl
and eDrawings are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolidWorks Corporation. SPARC is a
registered trademark and SPARCStation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. (Products

O
bearing the SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems,
Inc.) All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the

se
Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and "The Network is the Computer"
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in
other countries. Symbolics, CLOE Runtime, and Minima are trademarks, and CLOE, Genera, and
U
Zetalisp are registered trademarks of Symbolics, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open
Group. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO
Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are trademarks or
al

registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. I-DEAS,
Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks
or registered trademarks of UGS Corp., a Siemens group company. Galaxy Application Environment
rn

is a licensed trademark of Visix Software, Inc. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications,

Inc. API Tookit is a trademark of InterCAP Graphics Systems, Inc. BEA and WebLogic are registered
trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc.
te

VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Product may contain
RealDWG technology by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright 1998-2006 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved
In

([Link]/autodeskrealdwg). File Filters © 1986-2002 Circle Systems, Inc. Certain

business intelligence reporting functionality is powered by Cognos. [Link] is copyrighted
software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. Pro/TOOLMAKER
C

contains licensed third-party technology: 5AXMSURF is copyrighted software of ModuleWorks

GmbH. Certain 3D Read CAD data exchange tools are copyrighted software of Datakit SRL.
PT

Hyphenologist Copyright 1986-1999, Computer Hyphenation Ltd. All rights reserved. RetrievalWare
is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. DataDirect Connect is copyrighted software of
DataDirect Technologies. PStill and PSRaster software is copyright © Dipl.- Ing. Frank Siegert,
1996 to present. FAST InStream is copyright © of Fast Search & Transfer, Inc. Portions of the
Mathcad Solver © 1990-2002 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Exceed and Exceed 3D are copyrighted
r

software of Hummingbird Ltd., a division of Open Text Corporation. Rational Rose and Rational
Fo

ClearCase are copyrighted software of IBM Corp. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not
responsible for the operation of this software product. G POST is copyrighted software and a
registered trademark of Austin NC. Xdriver and 3dxsrv are copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion,
Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company. Larson CGM Engine 9.4, Copyright © 1992-2006 Larson
Software Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork
Design 1990–2001. MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation.
Microsoft Jet, Microsoft XML, Technology "Powered by Groove", Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Visual
Basic for Applications, Internet Explorer and Portions compiled from Microsoft Developer Network
Redistributable Sample Code, including Microsoft DLL redistributables, are all copyrighted software
of Microsoft Corporation. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Fatigue
Advisor nCode libraries from nCode International. NuTCRACKER Server Operating Environment is
copyrighted software of MKS Inc.
Oracle 8i run time, Oracle 9i run time, and Oracle 10g run time are Copyright 2002–2004
Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license
and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. PDFlib
software is copyright © 1997-2005 PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved. Proximity Linguistic
Technology provides Spelling Check/Thesaurus portions of certain software products, including:
The Proximity/Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Database. Copyright © 1997 Bertelsmann Lexikon
Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/C.A.
Strombertg AB Database. Copyright © 1989 C.A. Strombertg AB. Copyright © 1989, All Rights
 Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Editions Fernand Nathan Database. Copyright
© 1984 Editions Fernand Nathan. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,
Inc.; The Proximity/Espasa-Calpe Database. Copyright © 1990 Espasa-Calpe. Copyright ©
1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre
i Maura Database. Copyright © 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Copyright © 1991, All
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc.
Database. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994, All Rights
Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Hachette Database. Copyright © 1992
Hachette. Copyright © 1992, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/IDE
a.s. Database. Copyright © 1989, 1990 IDE a.s. Copyright © 1989, 1990, All Rights Reserved,
Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990
Merriam-Webster, Inc. Copyright © 1984, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.;
The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc./Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright ©
1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994,
All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Munksgaard International Publishers
Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Copyright © 1990, All

y
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/S. Fischer Verlag Database. Copyright
© 1983 S. Fischer Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The

nl
Proximity/Van Dale Lexicografie by Database. Copyright © 1995, 1997 Van Dale Lexicografie by.
Copyright © 1996, 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/William

O
Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd.
Copyright © 1988, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Zanichelli
Database. Copyright © 1989 Zanichelli. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity

se
Technology, Inc. Certain license management is based on Elan License Manager © 1989-1999
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. PDEFIT © 1995-2002 Dr. Klaus Schittkowski.
MuPAD OEM kernel, version 3.2.1 (Mathsoft Kernel) © 2005 by SciFace Software GmbH & Co.
U
KG. TetMesh GHS3D provided by Simulog Technologies, a business unit of Simulog S.A. HOOPS
graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America,
Inc. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix
al

Technologies Ltd. TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service,
TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc. Parasolid
rn

is copyrighted software of UGS Corp, a Siemens group company. VisTools library is copyrighted
software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging
to VKI Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Certain
te

graphics-handling portions are based on the following technologies: GIF: Copyright 1989, 1990 Kirk
L. Johnson. The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any special,
In

indirect, or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence, or other tortious action, arising out of or in
connection with the use or performance of this software. JPEG: This software is based in part on
C

the work of the Independent JPEG Group. PNG: Copyright 2004-2006 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
TIFF: Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
PT

software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind, express, implied, or otherwise,
including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In
no event shall Sam Leffler or Silicon Graphics be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or
consequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of damage, or on any theory of liability, arising
r

out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. XBM, Sun Raster, and Sun
Fo

Icon: Copyright, 1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine

copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc. Portions of software documentation are used
with the permission of the World Wide Web Consortium. Copyright © 1994–2006 World Wide Web
Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, European Research Consortium for Informatics
and Mathematics, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. [Link]
Such portions are indicated at their points of use. Copyright and ownership of certain software
components is with YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED, unauthorized use and copying of
which is hereby prohibited. YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED 1987. (Lic. #YSS:SC:9107001)
KCL (Kyoto Common Lisp) (C) Taiichi Yuasa and Masami Hagiya, 1984. 2D DCM, 3D DCM, CDM,
AEM Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 2006. BCGControlBar library (C) BCGSoft. Portions of this software
copyright Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2004-2005. PDFNet SDK is copyright
PDFTron Systems Inc., 2001-2006, and distributed by CoCreate Software GmbH under license.
All rights reserved. FE Analysis: Portions of this software copyright The MacNeal-Schwendler
Corporation 1996-2006. GOelan V4 is a registered trademark of CN Industries. Portions of
this software copyright LightWork Design Limited 1990 - 2005, 2006. Cabling copyright MIP
Ltd [Link] PartLibrary copyright TECHSOFT Datenverarbeitung GmbH
([Link]
LAPACK libraries used are freely available at [Link] (authors are Anderson, E.
and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J.
and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D.). Certain software
components licensed in connection with the Apache Software Foundation and/or pursuant to the
Apache Software License Agreement (version 2.0 or earlier) or similar style license. All rights
are reserved by the Licensor of such works, and use is subject to the terms and limitations
(and license agreement) at [Link] This software is provided by its Contributors
AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, and any expressed or
implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of title non-infringement,
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the Apache
Software Foundation or its Contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute
goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on
any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise)
arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Software includes: Apache Server, Axis, Ant, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, Batik, Jakarta, Apache POI,
Jakarta Regular Expression, Commons-FileUpload, Solr, Tika, and XMLBeans IBM XML Parser
for Java Edition, the IBM SaxParser and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition DITA-OT - Apache License
Version IzPack: Java-based Software Installers Generator ([Link]

y
Jakarta–ORO NekoHTML and CyberNeko Pull Parser software developed by Andy Clark
© Copyright Andy Clark. All rights reserved. Lucene ([Link] Quartz

nl
(scheduler) Copyright 2004-20xx OpenSymphony ([Link]
Jetty Copyright [Link] ([Link] Google Web Toolkit,

O
Google Web Toolkit (GWT) Incubator, and GWTx; Copyright Google U3D Library Copyright
1999 - 2006 Intel Corporation MyFaces ([Link] JDBCAppender
([Link] EHcache Copyright 2003-2007 Luck

se
Consulting Pty Ltd ([Link] cglib Copyright 2002-2004 ([Link]
[Link]/) LOG4PLSQL Copyright 2002 The LOG4PLSQL project team. All rights reserved
([Link] Log4cxx ([Link] SPRING -
U
See [Link]. HttpComponents project software ([Link] Commons
Codec ([Link] Apache Log4net ([Link]
Beans Scripting Framework (BSF) Copyright 2002-2006 The Apache Software Foundation -
al

includes software developed at The Apache Software Foundation ([Link] WebFX

Coolbar 2 ([Link] WebFX Cross Browser tree Widget 1.17 ([Link]
PCRE 7.2 ([Link] JDOM Copyright 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin.
rn

All rights reserved. This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on
behalf of the JDOM Project ([Link] The Ajax Control Toolkit (including compiled,
object code and source code versions) are licensed only pursuant to the Microsoft Public License
te

(Ms-PL) which can be found at [Link] Microsoft Ajax

Library provided pursuant to the Microsoft Software Supplemental License Terms for Microsoft
In

[Link] 2.0 AJAX Extensions. The Boost Library - Misc. C++ software from [Link]
Provided pursuant to: Boost Software License [Link] and
[Link] AspectJ ([Link] and Eclipse SWT
C

([Link] Copyright 20xx The Eclipse Foundation are distributed under the
Eclipse Public License (EPL) ([Link] and is provided
AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom and any provisions which differ from the EPL are
PT

offered by PTC. Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge
no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Command Line Argument Parser. Author
peterhal@[Link] is licensed pursuant to the Shared Source License for Command Line
Parser Library and is provided by the author "as is" with no warranties (none whatsoever). This
r

means no express, implied, or statutory warranty, including without limitation, warranties of

Fo

merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, or any warranty of title or noninfringement. No

contributor to the Software will be liable for any of those types of damages known as indirect,
special, consequential, or incidental related to the Software to the maximum extent the law permits,
no matter what legal theory it’s based on. The following software is incorporated pursuant to the
"BSD License" (Berkeley Software Distribution) or a similar style license: iCal4j is Copyright ©
2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved. Dojo – Copyright 2005, The Dojo Foundation, All rights
reserved. Jaxen (shipped as part of dom4j) Copyright 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All
Rights Reserved. XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) technology from Adobe - Copyright ©
1999 - 2007, Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Groovy Copyright 2003 James
Strachan and Bob McWhirter. All Rights Reserved. Firebug Copyright 2007, Parakey Inc. JMSN
([Link] Thumb Plug TGA Copyright 1991-2003 Echidna, Inc. All
rights reserved. ASM Copyright 2000-2005 INRIA, France Telecom. All rights reserved. PDFBox
Copyright 2002-2007, [Link]. All rights reserved. BerkeleyDB (as used with OpenDS);
Copyright 1990-20xx Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved.
MiGLayout - The Java Layout Manager for Swing & SWT; Copyright 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG
InfoCom AB. (miglayout@[Link]). All rights reserved. PCRE - Perl Compatible Regular
Expressions – Basic Library Functions written by: Philip Hazel, Email local part: ph10, Email
domain: [Link], University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England. Copyright
1997-2008 University of Cambridge. All rights reserved. SIMILE Copyright The SIMILE Project
2006. All rights reserved. Note that JQuery: Copyright 2008 John Resig ([Link]) is
 included in the Ajax section of this distribution and is covered under the MIT LICENSE (see below).
Launch4j ([Link] The head subproject (the code which is attached to the
wrapped jars) is licensed under the MIT license. Launch4j may be used for wrapping closed source,
commercial applications. JempBox Java XMP Library: Copyright 2006-2007, [Link].
All rights reserved. FontBox - Copyright 2003-2005, [Link]. All rights reserved. ANTLR
Copyright 2003-2008, Terence Parr. All rights reserved. Provided pursuant to ANTLR 3 License.
([Link] NativeCall Java Toolkit ([Link]
Redistribution and use of the above in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
is permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii)
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution;
and (iii) Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. THE ABOVE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

y
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT

nl
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

O
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

se
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The Java [Link] file, copyright 1987
1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #ZipLib GNU software is developed for the Free Software
U
Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA, copyright © 1989, 1991.
PTC hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program #ZipLib written by Mike Krueger. #ZipLib
licensed free of charge and there is no warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable
al

law. Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other parties provide the
program AS IS without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as
rn

to the quality and performance of the program is with you. Should the program prove defective,
you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. The following software is
incorporated pursuant to the "MIT License" (or a similar license): SLF4J source code and binaries
te

Copyright 2004-20xx [Link]. All rights reserved. [Link] (built on "[Link]").

Copyright 2005 Thomas Fuchs ([Link] [Link] ICU4J software Copyright
In

1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved. Except as
contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of
C

the copyright holder. json library: Copyright 2002 [Link]. XPM Copyright 1989-95 GROUPE
BULL. DynamicToolbar FCKEditor plugin, v1.1 (080810); Copyright 2008, Gonzalo Perez de la
Ossa ([Link] JQuery Copyright 2008 John Resig ([Link]) NATIVECALL
PT

(C) 2002–2008 Johann Burkard. All rights reserved. ([Link]

The above software is used and redistributed under the following permissions: Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
r

limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
Fo

of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. The Java™ Telnet Applet
([Link], [Link], [Link], [Link]), Copyright © 1996,
97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meißner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This
license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at [Link] (for
a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e mail
to leo@[Link] or marcus@[Link]—you are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said
source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. The following software,
which may be called by certain PTC software products, is licensed under the GNU General Public
License ([Link] and if used by the customer is provided AS IS by the
authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU GPL for more details). Upon request
PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing
this distribution: The PJA (Pure Java AWT) Toolkit library ([Link] The
following unmodified libraries are likewise distributed under the GNU-GPL: libstdc and #ziplib (each
are provided pursuant to an exception that permits use of the library in proprietary applications
with no restrictions provided that the library is not modified). The following products are licensed
with the Classpath exception (Linking this library statically or dynamically with other modules is
making a combined work based on this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of the GNU General
Public License cover the whole combination. As a special exception, the copyright holders of this
library give you permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable,
regardless of the license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the
resulting executable under terms of your choice, provided that you also meet, for each linked
independent module, the terms and conditions of the license of that module. An independent module
is a module which is not derived from or based on this library.): [Link].j3d package; Copyright
1996-2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA. All rights
reserved. The source code is licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2. This project
contains the following third-party source code that is provided under separate licensing terms (These

y
terms are found in the THIRDPARTY-LICENSE-*.txt files in the top-level directory of this project.
See the [Link] for more information.). 3D Graphics API for the Java Platform 1.6.0

nl
Pre-Release licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2, with the Classpath Exception. #ziplib
(SharpZipLib, formerly NZipLib), a Zip, GZip, Tar and BZip2 library, Copyright 2000-20xx IC#Code.

O
All rights reserved. #ZipLib was originally developed by Mike Krueger (mike@[Link]) with
the following attributions: (i) Zip/Gzip implementation (a Java version of the zlib) originally created
by the Free Software Foundation (FSF); (ii) zlib authors Jean-loup Gailly (jloup@[Link]), Mark

se
Adler (madler@[Link]) and its other contributors; (iii) Julian R Seward for the bzip2
implementation; (iv) the Java port done by Keiron Liddle, Aftex Software (keiron@[Link]);
(v) tar implementation by Timothy Gerard Endres (time@[Link]); and (vi) Christoph Wille for
U
beta testing, suggestions, and the setup of the Web site. The following is distributed under GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL) which is at [Link] and
is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of
al

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU LGPL for more
details). Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution: eXist, an Open Source Native XML Database. You
rn

may obtain a copy of the source code at [Link] The source code
is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit. You may obtain a copy of
the source code at [Link] which is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. Java
te

Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@[Link]). You may obtain a copy of the
source code at [Link] The source code is
In

likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. JFreeChart is licensed under the GNU LGPL and can
be found at [Link] OmniORB Libraries (OmniOrb is distributed under the terms and
conditions of the GNU General Public License). The generic AIM library provided pursuant to the
C

JAIMBot project ([Link] JAIMBot is a modular architecture for providing

services through an AIM client. It contains a generic AIM library and a Bot that uses this library to
provide such services as Offline Messaging and Weather. PTC does not use the Bot. JExcelApi
PT

([Link] 7-Zip Copyright 1999-2006 Igor Pavlov ([Link]

libiconv Copyright 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. ([Link]
NHibernate © 200x, Red Hat Middleware, LLC. All rights reserved ([Link]
org/[Link]). MPXJ © 2000-2008, Packwood Software ([Link] Java
r

Server Faces V3.0.1 ([Link] DevlL Image Lib [Link]

Fo

([Link] Zip Master Component Lib 1.79 ([Link] Exadel

RichFaces 3.0.1 ([Link] Jfree / Jfree Chart 1.0.0 ([Link] Memory
DLLLoading code 0.0.1 ([Link] source probjects/[Link]).
May include Jena Software © Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, LP. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Jena includes: Jakarta–ORO
software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (described above).
ICU4J software Copyright © 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All
rights reserved. Software is used under the MIT license described above. Except as contained in
this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright
holder. CUP Parser Generator Copyright ©1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott
 Ananian–used by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard
to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall
the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any
damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract,
negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this
software. ImageMagick software is Copyright © 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit
organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick
is freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement:
[Link] Info-Zip and UnZip (© 1990 2001 Info ZIP, All
Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete
Info ZIP license see [Link] "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set
of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup
Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert
Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor
Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,

y
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, and Mike White. ICU Libraries (International
Components for Unicode) Copyright 1995-2001 International Business Machines Corporation and

nl
others, All rights reserved. Libraries are provided pursuant to the ICU Project (notice is set forth
above) at [Link] The Independent JPEG

O
Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. iText Library
- Copyright © 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved – source

se
code and further information available at [Link] [Link] - JPEG image
compression library, version 6.2. Used to create images for HTML output; Provided pursuant to:
[Link] Pop up calendar components Copyright © 1998 Netscape
U
Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin
Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at [Link]
Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1
al

(at [Link] Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is
distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied
(see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original
rn

Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of
the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are
Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors:
te

Kazu Yamamoto (kazu@[Link]), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@[Link]), Tsukasa Maruyama

(mal@[Link]), Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@[Link]). The following components are subject
In

to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.0 or 1.1 at [Link] (the MPL) and
said software is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
expressed or implied and all warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations under PTC’s
C

software license agreements are provided by PTC alone (see the MPL for the specific language
governing rights and limitations the source code and modifications thereto are available under the
MPL and are available upon request): Gecko and Mozilla components Spidermonkey Charset
PT

Detector Saxon-B ([Link] Office Partner

Components 1.64 ([Link] Rhino JavaScript engine,
distributed with a form of the Mozilla Public License (MPL). [Link] - Libtiff File IO Library
version 3.4: (see also [Link] [Link] Used by the image EFI
r

library; Provided pursuant to: [Link] The DITA standards, including

Fo

DITA DTDs, DITA Schemas, and portions of the DITA specification used in online help; copyright
2005-2009 OASIS Open. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. ([Link] Copyright © 1998
2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@[Link]) WHICH IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ''AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This
product also includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@[Link]). [Link] -
Perl Compatible Regular Expression Library version 4.3. [Link] Provided pursuant
to: PCRE License. [Link] - PNG image library version 1.2.0. [Link] Provided
pursuant to: [Link] libpng, Copyright © 2004 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of
Contributing Authors) at [Link] METIS is © 1997
Regents of the University of Minnesota.
Curl software, Copyright ©1996 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg, All rights reserved. Software is used
under the following permissions: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for
any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use, or other dealings. Java Advanced Imaging (JAI)
is provided pursuant to the Sun Java Distribution License (JDL) at [Link] The
terms of the JDL shall supersede any other licensing terms for PTC software with respect to JAI

y
components. Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open

nl
source software, written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Regular Expressions
support was derived from copyrighted software written by Henry Spencer, Copyright © 1986 by

O
University of Toronto. SGML parser: Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998 James Clark,
1999 Matthias Clasen. XML parser and XSLT processing was developed using Libxml and Libxslt
by Daniel Veillard, Copyright © 2001. libWWW (W3C's implementation of HTTP) can be found at:

se
[Link] Copyright © 1994-2000 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, Keio
University). All Rights Reserved. This program is distributed under the W3C's Software Intellectual
U
Property License at: [Link]
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
al

PURPOSE. See W3C License [Link] for more details. Copyright

© 1995 CERN. "This product includes computer software created and made available by CERN.
rn

This acknowledgment shall be mentioned in full in any product which includes the CERN computer
software included herein or parts thereof." Perl support was developed with the aid of Perl Kit,
Version 5.0. Copyright © 1989-2002, Larry Wall. All rights reserved. The cad2eda program
te

utilizes wxWidgets (formerly wxWindows) libraries for its cross-platform UI API, which is licensed
under the wxWindows Library License at [Link] ZLib - Compression library;
Copyright 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; Provided pursuant to ZLib License at
In

[Link] ATLPort copyright 1999, 2000 Boris Fomitchev is provided by

the copyright holder "as is" with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Permission to use
or copy this software for any purpose is granted without fee, provided the foregoing notices are
C

retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted,
provided the above notices are retained and a notice that the code was modified is included with the
PT

above copyright notice. PTC reserves the right to modify this code and may do so without further
notice. OpenCASCADE software is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License
Version 6.2 (the "License"). This software may only be used in compliance with the License.
A copy of the License may be obtained at [Link] The Initial Developer
of the Original Code is Open CASCADE S.A.S., with main offices at 15 bis, rue Ernest Renan
r

92136, Issy Les Moulineaux, France. The Original Code is copyright © Open CASCADE S.A.S.,
Fo

2001. All rights reserved. "The Original Code” and all software distributed under the License
are distributed by OpenCASCADE on an "AS IS" basis, without warranty of any kind, and the
Initial Developer hereby disclaims all such warranties, including without limitation, any warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or noninfringement (please see the License
for the specific terms and conditions governing rights and limitations under the License). PTC
product warranties are provided solely by PTC. Certain Pro/TOOLMAKER functions/libraries are
as follows: CSubclassWnd version 2.0 - Misc. C++ software; Copyright © 2000 NEWare Software.
STLPort - C++ templates; ©1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev; Provided pursuant to: STLPort License
[Link] Zip32 - Compression library; Copyright © 1990-2007.
Info-ZIP; Provided pursuant to: Info-ZIP License [Link]
Inno Setup - Installer package; Copyright 1997-2007 Jordan Russell; Provided pursuant to Inno
Setup License [Link] 7-Zip - Compression package; Copyright
1999-2007 Igor Pavlov; Provided pursuant to 7-Zip License [Link] The
implementation of the loop macro in CoCreate Modeling is based on code originating from MIT
and Symbolics, Inc. Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1986 by the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology and Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 by Symbolics, Inc. All
Rights Reserved. Used under license pursuant to which permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is granted, provided
that the copyright holder’s copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The names "M.I.T." and
 "Massachusetts Institute of Technology" and "Symbolics" may not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Notice must
be given in supporting documentation that copying distribution is by permission of the copyright
holders. The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. ORACLE, ODBC, and
DB2/CLI Template Library, Version 4.0.126, Copyright Sergei Kuchin, 1996, 20xx. This library
is free software. Permission to use, copy, modify and redistribute it for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the preceding copyright statement appears in all copies. (see
[Link] The following items are used and licensed pursuant to the Common
Development and Distribution License (CDDL). See [Link] Metro
Web Services Stack, Copyright Sun Microsystems. The copyright holders of this library give
permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the
license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable
under differing terms, provided that, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions
of the license of that module are met. Source Code for Metro will be provided upon request and is
licensed under the terms of the CDDL. Open MQ – In addition, this project uses Mozilla Network

y
Security Services and Network Security Portable Runtime (NSS / NSPR) which are licensed under
the Mozilla Public License. OpenDS uses BerkeleyDB which is described above.

nl
The following components are licensed pursuant to the Common Public License (CPL). All warranties
and awarded damage relief from use of the technology as provided by PTC are provided solely by

O
PTC and same is disclaimed by other contributors. Source code for the program is available upon
request under the terms of the CPL: WIX Installer Toolkit, copyright Microsoft Corp. NSIS (Nullsoft
Scriptable Install System), Copyright 1995-20xx, all Contributors. Includes zlib/libpng, bzip2, and

se
lzma compression modules with licensing information at [Link] Certain
software is Copyright 2000 - 2008 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle ([Link]
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
U
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
al

to the following conditions. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
rn

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
te

BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
In

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
C

Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)

(JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
PT

procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227 7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227 19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 05222009
r

Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

Fo

PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T3406-380-01 08/12/2011 Initial Printing of:
Surfacing using Creo Parametric
Order Number DT-T3406-380-01
Printed in the U.S.A